WORLD INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY ORGANIZATION
International Bureau
PCT
INTERNATIONAL APPLICATION PUBLISHED UNDER THE PATENT COOPERATION TREATY (PCT)
(51) International Patent Classification 6 :
A61K 31/00, 31/17, 31/41, 31/435,
31/445, 31/415, 31/535
(11) International Publication Number: WO 97/09973
(43) International Publication Date: 20 March 1997 (20.03.97)
(21) International Application Number: PCT/US96/ 14727
(22) International Filing Date: 12 September 1996 (12.09.96)
(30) Priority Data:
528,510
12 September 1995 (12.09.95) US
(71) Applicants (for all designated States except US): THE
REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA
[US/US]; 9500 Gilman Drive, La Jolla, CA 92093-
0093 (US). ADOLOR CORPORATION [US/US]; 395
Phoenixville Pike, Malvem, PA 19355 (US).
(71)(72) Applicants and Inventors: YAKSH, Tony, L. [US/US];
4219 St. James Place, San Diego, CA 92103 (US).
FARRAR, John, J. [US/US]; 1066 Bodine Road, Chester
Springs, PA 19425 (US). MAYCOCK, Alan, L. [US/US];
1908 Standiford Drive, Malvern, PA 19355 (US). LEWIS,
Michael, E. [US/US]; 1007 Saber Road, West Chester, PA
19382 (US). DOW, Gordon. J. [US/US]; 4189 Chaparral
Court, Santa Rosa, CA 95409 (US).
(74) Agent: SEIDMAN, Stephanie, L.; Brown Martin Haller &
McClain, 1660 Union Street, San Diego, CA 92101-2926
(US).
(81) Designated States: AL, AM, AT, AU, AZ, BA, BB, BG, BR,
BY, CA, CH, CN, CU, CZ, DE, DK, EE, ES, FI, GB, GE,
HU, IL, IS, JP, KE, KG, KP, KR, KZ, LC, LK, LR, LS,
LT. LU, LV, MD, MG. MK. MN, MW. MX, NO, NZ, PL,
PT, RO, RU, SD, SE, SG, SI, SK, TJ, TM, TR, TT, UA.
UG, US, UZ, VN, ARIPO patent (KE, LS, MW, SD, SZ,
UG), Eurasian patent (AM, AZ, BY, KG, KZ, MD, RU, TJ,
TM), European patent (AT, BE, CH, DE, DK, ES, FI, FR,
GB, GR, IE, IT, LU, MC, NL, PT, SE), OAPI patent (BF,
BJ, CF, CG, CI, CM, GA, GN, ML, MR, NE, SN, TD, TG).
Published
Without international search report and to be republished
upon receipt of that report.
(54) Title: PERIPHERALLY ACTIVE ANTI-HYP ERALGESIC OPIATES
(57) Abstract
Compositions and methods using the compositions for treatment of peripheral hyperalgesia are provided. The compositions contain an
anti-hyperalgesia effective amount of one or more compounds that directly or indirectly interact with peripheral opiate receptors, but that do
not, upon topical or local administration, elicit substantial central nervous system effects. The anti-diarrheal compound 4-(p-chlorophenyl)-
4-hydroxy-N-N-dimethyl-a,a-diphenyl-l-piperidinebutyramide hydrochloride is preferred for use in the compositions and methods.
FOR THE PURPOSES OF INFORMATION ONLY
Codes used to identify States party to the PCT on the front pages of pamphlets publishing international
applications under the PCT.
AM
Armenia
GB
United Kingdom
MW
Malawi
AT
Austria
GE
Georgia
MX
Mexico
All
Australia
GN
Guinea
NE
Niger
BB
Barbados
CR
Greece
NL
Netherlands
BE
Belgium
HU
Hungary
NO
Norway
BF
Buricina Faso
IE
Ireland
NZ
New Zealand
BG
Bulgaria
IT
Italy
PL
Poland
BJ
Benin
JP
Japan
PT
Portugal
BR
Brazil
KE
Kenya
RO
Romania
BY
Belarus
KG
Kyrgystan
RU
Russian Federation
CA
Canada
KF
Democratic People's Republic
SD
Sudan
CF
Central African Republic
of Korea
SE
Sweden
CG
Congo
KR
Republic of Korea
SG
Singapore
CH
Switzerland
KZ
Kazakhstan
SI
Slovenia
CI
C6te d'lvoire
LI
Liechtenstein
SK
Slovakia
CM
Cameroon
LK
Sri Lanka
SN
Senegal
CN
China
LR
Liberia
sz
Swaziland
CS
Czechoslovakia
LT
Lithuania
TD
Chad
CZ
Czech Republic
LU
Luxembourg
TG
Togo
DE
Germany
LV
Latvia
TJ
Tajikistan
DK
Denmark
MC
Monaco
TT
Trinidad and Tobago
EE
Estonia
MD
Republic of Moldova
UA
Ukraine
ES
Spain
MG
Madagascar
UG
Uganda
FI
Finland
ML
Mali
US
United Stales of America
FR
France
MN
Mongolia
uz
Uzbekistan
GA
Gabon
MR
Mauritania
VN
Viet Nam
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-1 -
PERIPHERALLY ACTIVE ANTI-HYPERALGESIC OPIATES
RELATED APPLICATIONS
For purposes of the U.S. national stage, this application is a
continuation-in-part of U.S. application Serial No. 08/528,510, filed
5 September 1 2, 1 996, to Tony Yaksh, entitled "PERIPHERALLY ACTIVE
ANTI-HYPERALGESIC OPIATES". For international purposes, this
application claims priority to the U.S. application Serial No. 08/528,510.
The subject matter of U.S. application Serial No. 08/528,510 is herein
incorported in its entirety by reference.
10 All patents and publications referred to herein are, unless noted
otherwise, incorporated by reference in their entirety.
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to compositions and methods for
treatment and/or prevention of hyperalgesic states. The compositions,
15 which are formulated for topical and local administration, contain anti-
hyperalgesics that are substantially devoid of central nervous system
effects, and, thus, have very little, if any, potential for abuse.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Pain and analgesia
20 Pain has been defined in a variety of ways. For example, pain can
be defined as the perception by a subject of noxious stimuli that
produces a withdrawal reaction by the subject. The most commonly
experienced form of pain may be defined as the effect of a stimulus on
nerve endings, which results in the transmission of impulses to the
25 cerebrum. This somatic sensation and normal function of pain, referred to
as nociception or nociceptive pain, informs the organism of impending
tissue damage. Somatic and visceral free nerve endings, termed
nociceptors, initially process such pain signals.
Despite numerous definitions, the brain pathways governing the
30 perception of pain are not completely understood. Sensory afferent
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-2-
synaptic connections to the spinal cord, so-caiied "nociceptive
pathways", however, have been documented in some detail. The
nociceptive pathway, which exists for protection of the organism (such as
the pain experienced in response to a burn), is inactive. Activity is
5 initiated by the application of a high intensity, potentially damaging
stimulus. This stimulus serves to depolarize certain classes of afferent
(sensory) axons of the small unmyelinated category, designed C fibers.
The signal carried by the C fibers travels up the peripheral nerve
and into the spinal cord where synapses are made on second order and
10 higher order neurons, which then transmit the pain signal up the spinal
cord in the spinothalamic tract ending in the thalamus. Polysynaptic
junctions in the dorsal horn of the spinal cord are involved in the relay and
modulation of sensations of pain to various regions of the brain, including
the periaqueductal grey region. The ventrolateral and ventromedial
15 thalamic nuclei project to the cortex where the pain is then processed
with regard to localization and other integrative characteristics.
Opioid Analgesia
Analgesia, or the reduction of pain perception, can be effected
directly by decreasing transmission along such nociceptive pathways.
20 Analgesic opiates are thought to act by mimicking the effects of
endorphin or enkephalin peptide-containing neurons, which synapse
presynaptically at the C-fiber terminal and which, when they fire, inhibit
release of substance P from the C-fiber. Descending pathways from the
brain are also inhibitory to C-fiber firing. Thus, CNS-mediated analgesia
25 leads to an overall inhibition of the pain transmission.
Agents that selectively block an animal's response to a strong
stimulus without obtunding general behavior or motor function is referred
to as an analgesic. Opiates, via interaction with specific receptors in the
brain and spinal cord, are able to block the release of transmitters from
30 central terminals (Yaksh et aL (1988) In: Progress in Brain Research, Vol.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
77, Chapter 28, Elsevier Science Pub., B.V. pp. 371-94]). They are thus
able to increase the intensity of the peripheral stimulus necessary to
produce a given pain state. Accordingly, these agents are referred to as
analgesics.
5 Opiate receptors and opiate side effects
Central opiate receptors (in brain and spinal cord) appear to mediate
the effects of systemically administered opiates. Three principal classes
of opiate receptors have been identified: fj, k and 6 (Yaksh, T.L.: Eur. J.
Anaesthesiol. 1:201-243, 1984). The use of selective agonists and
10 antagonists have demonstrated that these receptors also appear to
mediate peripheral opioid effects. The central and peripheral actions
activities of opiates are an important component of their therapeutic
utility. It appears that after systemic delivery of opiates such as
morphine, the primary effect may be mediated by both sites of action.
15 On the other hand, many of the principal drawbacks of systemic
opiates are the results of their actions within the brain. These actions
include sedation, depression of respiration, constipation, nausea and
emesis, abuse liability and the development of addiction. These effects
serve to limit the utility of opiates for controlling post injury pain.
20 Addiction liability can occur secondary to medical uses of the drug where
the central effects lead to an addicted and dependent state.
Because constipation is among the actions of opiates, many agents
selected for anti-diarrheal activity act via one or more of these opioid re-
ceptors. Also, because of the diverse actions mediated by opioid
25 receptors, such agents also have undesirable central nervous system
effects and abuse potential. Because of these diverse activities and the
potential for abuse, anti-diarrheal opioid drug development has been
directed towards identifying compounds in which the potentially beneficial
activities are separated from the activities that lead to abuse and
30 dependence.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-4-
During the mid to late 1960's, several agents derived from classes
of molecules known to have opioid activity were synthesized. These
agents were shown to have naloxone reversible suppressant effects in
smooth muscle bioassays and were able to readily displace opioid ligands
5 in receptor binding assays. These results indicated that they act via
direct or indirect action with opioid receptors. These compounds were
designed to be selective anti-diarrheal opioid receptor (believed to be the
// receptor) agonists that are substantially free from analgesic and habit-
forming activities (see, e.g. . Shriver et aL (1987) "Loperamide" in
10 Pharmacological and Biochemical Properties of Drug Substances . Vol. 3,
Goldberg, M.E., ed. Am. Pharm. Assoc., Washington, D.C., p. 462).
Compounds, such as loperamide (4-{p-chlorophenyl)-4-hydroxy-N-
N-dimethyl-a,a-diphenyl-1-piperidinebutyramide hydrochloride], and its
analogs were among those synthesized. Loperamide was widely
15 reported to be completely devoid of analgesic effects and CNS effects
[see, e.g. , Jaffe et aL (1980) Clin. Pharmacol. Ther. 80:812-8191 even at
relatively high dosages. Subsequent work has explored whether
loperamide administered to mice intraparenterally might provide analgesic
effects [see, e.g. , Takasuna et aL (1994) Behavioural Pharm. 5:189-1951.
20 Specifically, Takasuna et aL report that suppression of acetic acid-induced
writhing was observed when loperamide was administered. The authors
note, however, that the writhing response depends on sensorimotor
integration, and that drugs may suppress writhing by impairing the
subject's motoric ability to respond without affecting the sensory events
25 consequent to the administration of a chemical irritant (see, Takasuna et
aL (1994) Behavioural Pharm. 5:189-195). The authors state that it
remains to be determined whether or not loperamide has any analgesic
properties.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-5-
ln contrast to conventional opiates, however, loperamide and
analogs thereof and other such agents exhibit little or no analgesic effects
as measured in acute pain models, such as the tail clip and hot plate tail
withdrawal tests, when given systemically [see, e.g. . Stahl et aL (1977)
5 Eur. J. Pharmacology 46:199-205; Shriver et aL (1981) "Loperamide" in
Pharmacological & Biochemi cal Properties of Drug ubstances Vol. 3,
Goldenberg, Ed., American Pharmaceutical Assn. Press, pp. 461-476;
see, also U.S. Patent No. 3,714,159 and U.S. Patent No. 3,884,916].
This absence of CNS effects, including analgesic effects, is believed
10 to be related to the failure of such compounds to effectively cross the
blood brain barrier. This failure is in part due to the extremely high lipid
partition coefficient of the compounds. The high partition coefficient
results in sequestration of the compound in the lipid membrane. This
local absorption is thought to contribute to its failure to cross the
15 blood brain barrier. In support of this conclusion, antinociceptive
analgesic action has been observed after direct delivery into the brain
[Stahl et aL ( 1 977) Eur. J. Pharmacology 46: 1 99-205].
Peripheral injury and hyperalgesia.
Changes in the milieu of the peripheral sensory terminal occur
20 secondary to local tissue damage. Mild damage (such as abrasions or
burns] and inflammation in the cutaneous receptive fields or joints
will produce significant increases in the excitability of polymodal
nociceptors [C fibers] and high threshold mechanoreceptors [Handwerker
et al (1991) Proceeding of the Vlth World Congress on Pain Bond et aL,
25 eds., Elsevier Science Publishers BV, pp. 59-70; Schaible et aL (1993)
Pam 55:5-54]. This increased excitability leads to increased spontaneous
activity [in otherwise silent sensory afferents] and an exaggerated
response to otherwise minimal stimuli.
These events have several consequences. First, the magnitude of
30 the pain state in humans and animals is proportional to the discharge
WO 97/09973
PCT7US96/14727
-6-
rate in such sensory afferent [Raja et aL (1988) Anesthesiology 68 :571-
590]. The facilitated response secondary to the local peripheral injury
may lead to an exaggerated pain state simply because of the increased
afferent activity. Secondly, spontaneous activity in small sensory afferent
5 causes central neurons in the spinal cord to develop an exaggerated
response to subsequent input [Woolf et aL ( 1 991 ) Pain 44:293-299;
Neugebauer et aL (1 993) J. Neurosci. 70: 1 365-1 377]. Both of these
events, secondary to the increased spontaneous activity and reactivity in
small sensory afferents generated by the peripheral
10 injury leads to a behavioral state referred to as hyperalgesia
(Yaksh (1993) Current Opinion in Neurology and Neurosurgery
6:250-256).
Thus, in the instance where the pain response is the result of an
exaggerated response to a given stimulus, the organism is hyperalgesic.
15 The importance of the hyperalgesic state in the post injury pain state
has been repeatedly demonstrated and this facilitated processing appears
to account for a major proportion of the post-injury/inflammatory pain
state [see, e.g. , Woold et aL (1993) Anesthesia and Analgesia 77:362-
79; Dubner et al. (1 994) In, Textbook of Pain . Melzack et aL, eds.,
20 Churchill-Livingstone, London, pp. 225-242].
Certain drug actions may serve to normalize the sensitivity of the
organism. Experimental investigations have shown that opiates with an
action in the vicinity of the peripheral terminal in injured or inflamed
tissue will normalize the activity in afferent innervating inflamed skin
25 [Russell et aL (1987) Neurosci. Lett 76:107-1 12; Andreev et aL (1994)
Neurosci. 58:793-798] and normalize the hyperalgesic threshold [Stein
(1988) Eur. J. Pharmac. 155 :255-264 Stein (1993) Anesth. Anala.
76:182-191]. Opiates, such as morphine, however, when peripherally
applied, may have a short duration of action and would, if applied at
30 sufficient levels, have effects upon consciousness and respiration. The
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-7-
possible systemic effects, CNS effects and abuse potential render
conventional opioids unsuitable for local application and unsuitable as
peripheral anti-hyperalgesics. Thus, there is a need for effective anti-
hyperalgesics that directly block peripheral sensitization, but that do not
5 have concomitant central nervous system [CNS] effects, including the
potential for abuse.
Therefore, it is an object herein to provide anti-hyperalgesics for
local and topical application that have minimal or no CNS effects.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
10 Methods for treatment and/or prevention of peripheral local
inflammatory states, including, but not limited to, inflammation following
local infection, blister, boils, or acute skin injuries, such as abrasions,
burns, such as thermal, radiation, sunburn and chemical burns, windburn,
frostbite, superficial cuts, surgical incisions, contusions, irritations,
15 inflammatory skin conditions, including but not limited to poison ivy, and
allergic rashes and dermatitis, insect stings and bites, joint inflammation,
post-surgical hyperalgesic conditions and any condition that yields a
hyperalgesic pain state are provided. Such conditions and indications,
include, but are not limited to: a) skin conditions;; b) oral, laryngal and
20 bronchial conditions and indications; c) ophthalmic indications and
conditions; d) post surgical conditions and indications; e) recto-anal
inflammations; and f) inflammations associated with infectious agents.
These methods involve topical or local administration of
compositions that contain one or more compounds that exert anti-
25 hyperalgesic activity via peripheral opiate receptors, but that do not
exhibit CNS, CNS-mediated analgesic or systemic effects {particularly
CNS effects] at dosages at which they are topically or locally applied.
The intended locus of application includes, but is not limited to, any body
surface or part that is amenable to local or topical treatment. Such body
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-8-
parts include, but are not limited to: the skin, joints, eyes, lips and
mucosal membranes.
The methods use compositions containing opioid anti-diarrheal
compounds or other opiate receptor agonist compounds that do not, upon
5 topical or local administration, evoke CNS effects, as defined herein,
particularly at the peripheral anti-hyperalgesic dosage. The compositions
that contain the opioid anti-diarrheal compounds or other opiate receptor
compounds are also provided.
Typically the compounds intended for use in the compositions and
10 methods herein possess peripheral anti-hyperalgesic and substantially no
CNS activities, as defined herein, because, without being bound by any
theory, they do not effectively cross the blood brain barrier. The failure
to cross the blood brain barrier precludes the occurrence of the CNS
systemic effects, so that there is limited potential for abuse. Other
15 opioids, such as morphine, that readily cross the blood brain barrier could
be effective as anti-hyperalgesics, but their permeability through the blood
brain barrier results in abuse liability. Their scheduling by the Drug
Enforcement Agency limits their applicability.
In contrast, the compositions provided herein, contain opioids that
20 do not, upon topical or local administration, substantially cross the blood
brain barrier as assessed by assays described herein. The compounds
intended for use in the methods and compositions provided herein include
any compound that by virtue of its interaction, either directly or indirectly,
with peripheral opioid receptors ameliorates the peripheral hyperalgesic
25 state, but does not exhibit systemic CNS-mediated analgesic activity [ i.e. ,
analgesic activity by virtue of interaction with CNS opioid receptors] or
CNS side-effects, including heaviness of the limbs, flush or pale
complexion, clogged nasal and sinus passages, dizziness, depression,
respiratory depression, sedation and constipation. These compounds
30 include anti-diarrheals that act as anti-diarrheals via interaction with jj, 6
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-9-
or k receptors, especially jj and 6 receptors, and opiate agonists, such as
metkephamide and related enkephalin analogs. Examples of such
compounds include, but are not limited to:
(i) loperamide (4-(/?-chlorophenyl)-4-hydroxy-N-N-dimethyl-a,£7-
5 diphenyl-1-piperidinebutyramide hydrochloride]], loperamide analogs and
related compounds as defined herein [see, Formula (I); see, also, U.S.
Patent No. 3,884,916 and U.S. Patent No. 3,714,159; see, also U.S.
Patent No. 4,194,045, U.S. Patent No. 4,116,963, U.S. Patent No.
4,072,686, U.S. Patent No. 4,069,223, U.S. Patent No. 4,066,654,], N-
10 oxides of loperamide and analogs, metabolites and prodrugs thereof and
related compounds as defined herein [see, also, U.S. Patent No.
4,824,853], and related compounds, such as (a), (b) and (c> as follows:
(a) 4-(aroylamino)piperidine-butanamide derivatives and N-
oxides thereof as defined herein [see, also U.S. Patent No. 4,990,521];
15 (b> 5-(1 ,1-diphenyl-3-(5- or 6-hydroxy-2-azabicyclo-
(2.2.2)oct-2-yl)propyl)-2-alkyl-1,3,4-oxadiazoles, 5-( 1 ,1 -diphenyl-4-(cyclic
amino)but-2-trans-en-1-yl>-2-alkyl-1,3,4-oxadiazoles, 2-[5-(cyclic amino)-
ethyl-1 0, 1 1 -dihydro-5H-dibenzo[a,d]-cyclohepten-5-yl]-5-alkyl-1 ,3,4-oxa-
diazoles] and related compounds [see, U.S. Patent No. 4,013,668, U.S.
20 Patent No. 3,996,214 and U.S. Patent No. 4,012,393];
(c) 2-substituted-1-azabicyclo[2,2,2]octanes [see, U.S.
Patent No. 4,125,531];
(ii) 3-hydroxy-7-oxomorphinans and 3-hydroxy-7-oxoisomorphinans
[see, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 4,277,605] including, but not limited to: 3-
25 hydroxy-7-oxomorphinan and 3-hydroxy-7-oxoisomorphinans including d,l-
3-hydroxy-7-oxo-N-methylmorphinan, l-3-hydroxy-7-oxo-N-methyl-
morphinan, d,l-3-hydroxy-7-oxomorphinan, l-3-hydroxy-7-oxomorphinan,
d,l-3-hydroxy-7-oxo-N-methylisomorphinan, l-3-hydroxy-7-oxo-N-methyl-
isomorphinan, d,l-3-hydroxy-7-oxoisomorphinan and l-3-hydroxy-7-
30 oxoisomorphinan;
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-10-
(iii) amidinoureas as provided herein [see, also U.S. Patent No.
4,326,075, U.S. Patent No. 4,326,074, U.S. Patent No. 4,203,920, U.S.
Patent No. 4,060,635, U.S. Patent No. 4,115,564, U.S. Patent No.
4,025,652] and 2-[(aminophenyl and amidophenyl)amino]-1-azacyclo-
5 alkanes [see, U.S. Patent No. 4,533,739];
(iv) metkephamid [H-L-Tyr-D-Ala-Gly-L-Phe-N(Me)Met-NH 2 ; see,
e.g. . U.S. Patent No. 4,430,327; Burkhart et a_L (1982) Peptides 3:869-
871; Frederickson et aL (1 991) Science 21 1 :603-6051 and other
synthetic opioid peptides, such as H-Tyr-D-Nva-Phe-Orn-NH 2 , H-Tyr-D-Nle-
10 Phe-Orn-NH 2 , H-Tyr-D-Arg-Phe-A 2 bu-NH 2 , H-Tyr-D-Arg-Phe-Lys-NH 2 , and
H-Lys-Tyr-D-Arg-Phe-Lys-NH 2 [see, U.S. Patent No. 5,312,899; see, also
Gesellchen et aL (1981) Pept.: Synth., Struct.. Funct., Proc. Am. Pept.
Svmp.. 7th .: Rich et aL (Eds), Pierce Chem. Co., Rockford, III, pp. 621-
62] that do not cross the blood brain barrier;
15 (v) propanamines as defined in U.S. Patent No. 5,236,947; and
(vi) other opioid compounds that may agonize peripheral jj or k
receptors, especially // receptors, but that, upon topical or local
administration, do not cross the blood brain barrier and do not exhibit
substantial CNS effects as defined herein.
20 The methods will employ compounds, such as those listed above,
and further include compounds, such as: (viii) certain phenylacetamide
derivatives [see, U.S. Patent No. 5,242,944], including, but not limited to
N-{(3,4-dimethylphenyl)propyl}-4-(2-aminoethoxy)-3-methoxy-
phenylacetamide, N-{(3,4-dimethylphenyl)propyl}-4-(2-aminoethoxy)-3-
25 hydroxy-phenylacetamide, N-{(3,4-dimethylphenyl)propyl}-4-(2-
aminoethoxy)-3-aminophenylacetamide, N-{(3-methylphenyl)propyl}-4-(2-
aminoethoxy)-3-methoxy-phenylacetamide, N-{(3-methylphenyl)propyl}-4-
(2-aminoethoxy)-3-hydroxy-phenylacetamide and N-{(3-dimethyl-
phenyl)propyl}-4-(2-aminoethoxy)-3-amino phenylacetamide.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-11-
Preferred compounds for use in the compositions and methods
herein are the loperamide analogs and N-oxides, preferably an N-oxide of
a piperidine-nitrogen, thereof or other pharmaceutically acceptable
derivatives thereof and related compounds [see (i), above). These
preferred compounds include compounds of formula (I):
10
15
20
25
30
Ar'-
R — M
Ar'
where M is NR 5 R°
N_J> or
* R 3
in which:
m is an integer from 0 to 3, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or
2 , and most preferably 2;
— Nd:
is an azabicycloalkyl containing from 6 to 9 carbon atoms
with at least 5 atoms in each ring, which ring is preferably pyrrolidino,
piperidino, or hexamethylenimino, where the tertiary amine is:
— N
i
and is unsubstituted or substituted with OR 18 in which R 18 is hydrogen or
lower alkanoyl containing 2 to 7, preferably 2 or 3, carbon atoms, and
OR 18 is preferably attached at the 5 position in 5-membered rings or the 5
or 6 position in 6-membered rings and is attached in the endo or exo
configuration, where R 3 , R 7 , R 5 and R 6 are as defined below. The
tertiary amine is preferably:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-12-
M is more preferably selected from among:
5
where m is an integer from 1 to 3, preferably 1 or 2, more
preferably 2; and
10 X 1 , X 2 and X 3 are -C(R 24 )(R 25 )-, -C(R 24 ) = C(R 25 )-, -C(R 24 )=N-,
-N = C(R 24 )-, -C( = 0)-, -O-, -S- or -N(R 24 )-, with the proviso that only one
of X 1 , X 2 and X 3 may be O, S or NR 24 ; and
R 24 and R 25 are hydrogen or lower alkyl.
97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-13-
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are either (i) or (ii) as follows:
(i) each is independently selected from a ring system,
preferably a 6- to 10-membered ring system, more preferably an aryl ring
sytem, or a heteroatom-containg ring system, preferably a 5- to 1 0-
membered heteroatom-containing ring system, more preferably a heteraryl
ring system, containing 1 or more heteroatoms, preferably 1 to 3
heteroatoms, such as oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atoms, wherein the aryl
and heteroaryl ring systems are each optionally substituted with one or
more, preferably up to three, aryl group substituents [as defined herein],
and Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each preferably independently phenyl or pyridyl,
optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy, haloalkyl, preferably halo lower
alkyl, particularly trifluoromethyl, alkyl, alkyloxy, aminosulfonyl,
alkylcarbonyl, nitro, amino, aminocarbonyl, phenylcarbonyl which is
optionally substituted with one or more, preferably up to three,
substituents selected from halo, halo alkyl and alkyl, or thienyl which is
optionally substituted with halo, haloalkyl or alkyl, where the alkyl groups
are straight or branched chain and preferably contain from 1 to 6 carbons,
more preferably 1 to 3 carbons; or
(ii) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently phenyl or pyridyl
groups, which are unsubstituted or substituted with, preferably aryl
substituent groups, as defined herein, preferably phenyl, and with the
carbon to which they are commonly linked form a fused ring system, so
that the compounds of formula (I) have the structure:
and is preferably,
WO 97/09973
POVUS96/14727
14-
(CH 2 )„
where:
A and B are independently selected from phenyl and pyridyl,
preferably phenyl, which are unsubstituted or substituted, preferably with
10 up to three aryl group substituents;
X 4 is a direct bond, -(CH 2 ) n -, -CH = CH-, -CH = CHCH 2 -,
-(CH 2 ) p O(CH 2 ) q -, -<CH 2 ) p S(0) r (CH 2 ) q -, -(CH 2 ) p NR 21 (CH 2 ) q - or
n is an integer from 0 to 3, preferably 1 to 3, and more
15 preferably 2 or 3;
each of p and q is 0 or 1 , and the sum of p and q is no
greater than 2;
r is 0 to 2;
R 2 is a direct bond, is alkylene in which the alkylene group is a
20 straight or branched chain, preferably is alkylene containing from 1 to 1 2,
preferably 1 to 6, more preferably 1 to 3 carbons and most preferably is
— <CH 2 ) 2 — or — CH 2 CH(CH 3 )-, is alkenylene having 2 to 6 carbon atoms,
preferably 2 to 3 carbons atoms, and one or two, preferably one, double
bond, or is alkynylene in which the alkynylene group is a straight or
25 branched chain, preferably is alkynylene containing from 2 to 12,
preferably 2 to 6, more preferably 2 to 3 carbons; in all instances the
chains are unsubstituted or substituted, and, if substituted, preferably
with one or more hydroxy groups;
R 3 is selected from Ar 3 , — Y-Ar 3 , where Y is alkylene or alkenylene
30 having, preferably, 2 to 4 carbon atoms; alkenyl containing 2 to 4
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-15-
carbons; cycloalkyl containing 3 to 8 carbons; heterocycle, preferably 1-
pyrrolidinyl, 1 -piperidinyl, 1 -hexamethyleneiminyl, 1-morpholinyl or -
N(Ar 4 )-R 23 , where R 23 is alkyl; alkenyl; alkanoyl which is optionally
substituted, preferably with halo, hydroxy or alkoxy, preferably lower
5 alkanoyl; alkenoyl having 3 to 10 carbons and 1 to 3 double bonds;
optionally substituted aroyl, preferably benzoyl; heteroaroyl, preferably
pyridoyl, furoyl and thienoyl; alkoxycarbonyl, preferably lower
alkoxycarbonyl; alkenyloxycarbonyl having 3 to 10 carbons and 1 to 3
double bonds; aryloxycarbonyl, preferably phenoxycarbonyl; formyl
10 (-CHO); cyano; aminocarbonyl (-CONH 2 ); alkylaminocarbonyl;
dialkylaminocarbonyl, arylaminocarbonyl, diarylaminocarbonyl or
arylalkylaminocarbonyl; or
O
II
15 N — C — Ar* .
I
R 8
R 8 is hydrogen or alkyl that is a straight or branched chain,
preferably containing from 1 to 6, more preferably 1 to 3, carbon atoms;
20 Af3 is selected from a ring system, preferably a 6- to 10-membered
ring system, more preferably an aryl ring sytem, or a heteroatom-containg
ring system, preferably a 5- to 10-membered heteroatom-containing ring
system, more preferably a heteraryl ring system, containing 1 or more
heteroatoms, preferably 1 to 3 heteroatoms, such as oxygen, sulfur or
25 nitrogen atoms, wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are each
optionally substituted with one or more, preferably up to three, aryl group
substituents (as defined herein]; it is more preferably an aryl ring system,
preferably a 6- to 10-membered aryl ring system, or a heteroaryl ring
system, preferably a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl ring system,
30 containing 1 or more heteroatoms, preferably 1 to 3 heteroatoms, such as
oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atoms, in which the aryl and heteroaryl ring
systems are each unsubtituted or substituted with one or more, preferably
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-16-
up to three, substitutents, preferably aryl group substituents halo, halo
lower alkyl or lower alkyl, and Ar 3 is preferably phenyl or pyridyl
unsubstituted or substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl;
Ar 4 is either:
5 (i) heterocycle containing 1 ring or 2 or more fused rings, preferably
1 ring or 2 to 3 fused rings, where each ring contains 1 or more,
preferably 1 to 3 heteroatoms, and preferably contains 4 to 10 members,
more preferably 5 to 7 members, and is optionally substituted with one or
more, preferably up to three, aryl group substituents, preferably halo, halo
10 lower alkyl or lower alkyl, and Ar 4 is preferably selected from heterocycles
that include, but are not limited to, indolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl,
isoquinolinyl, quinolinyl, benzimidazoly, thienyl, furanyl, pyridinyl, thiazolyl
and imidazolyl, each of which is optionally substituted, preferably with
halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl, preferably halo, and the heterocycle
15 is more preferably selected from thienyl, furanyl, pyridinyl, thiazolyl and
imidazolyl; or
(ii) a radical of formula:
20
in which:
25 R 10 , R 11 and R 12 are each independently selected from hydrogen,
alkyloxy, alkoxyalkyl, halo, hydroxy, cyano, nitro, amino, alkylamino,
di(alkyl)amino, aminocarbonyl, arylcarbonylamino, alkylcarbonylamino,
alkylcarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, aminosulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl,
alkylthio, mercapto, C 3 . 6 alkenyloxy, C 36 alkynyloxy, arylalkyloxy, aryloxy
30 and alkyl, in which alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl or aryl group defined by R 1 °, R 11
and R 12 is unsubstituted or substituted with one or more, preferably 1 to
4 substituents selected from halo, halo alkyl, preferably halo lower alkyl,
or alkyl, preferably lower alkyl,, and the alkyl groups are straight or
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-17
branched chains that are preferably lower alkyl (C,. 6 ) and more preferably
C,. 3 or
(iii) 1- or 2-naphthyl, dihydronaphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indenyl
or dihydroindenyl, each of which is optionally substitituted with one or
5 more aryl group substituents;
R is halo, haloalkyl, preferably lower halo alkyl, or alkenyl having 3
to 12 carbons, preferably lower alkenyl or hydroxy and is preferably at
the 3-position [relative to the N], more preferably a 3-halo or 3-lower
alkyl, or R is OR 9 that is preferably at the 3-position so that the piperidinyl
10 ring has the formula:
R is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, arylalkyl, alkylcarbonyl,
aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, in which the alkyl groups
20 are straight or branched chains and preferably contain 1 to 12, more
preferably 1 to 6 carbons, more preferably 1-3 carbons in the chain;
R 4 is selected from among:
(i) an aryl ring system, preferably a 6- to 10-membered aryl ring
system, or a heteroaryl ring system, preferably a 5- to 1 0-membered
25 heteroaryl ring system, containing 1 or more heteroatoms, preferably 1 to
3 heteroatoms, such as oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atoms, in which the
aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are each optionally substituted with one
or more, preferably up to three aryl group substituents, and R 4 is
preferably phenyl or pyridyl which is optionally substituted with lower
30 alkyl, halo or halo lower alkyl, with phenyl being even more preferred, or
that is unsubstituted or substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or lower
alkyl, and is preferably a pyrrolidinyl, oxadiazolyl or triazolyl radical, more
R
15
(ii) a heterocyclic ring containing one to three heteroatoms.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-18-
preferably oxadiazolyl, most preferably 1 ,3,4-oxadiazolyl, particularly a 5-
substituted 1 ,3,4-oxadiazolyl in which the substttuent is halo, halo lower
alkyl, hydroxy, lower alkoxy or lower alkyl, or
(iii) alkyl containing 1 to 8 carbons which is optionally substituted
5 with hydroxy or alkylcarbonyloxy (-OCOR), preferably 1 to 6 carbons,
more preferably 1 to 3 carbons; alkenyl containing 3 to 6 carbons;
cycloalkylalkyl in which the cycloalkyl contains 3 to 8 carbons and the
alkyl contains 1 to 3 carbons; cycloalkenylalkyl in which the cycloalkenyl
contains 3 to 8 carbons and the alkyl contains 1 to 3 carbons; or
10 (iv)
where
X 1 is as previously defined;
X 5 is O or S;
R 5 and R 6 are either:
15 (a) independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl that is
a straight or branched chain containing 1 to 1 2, preferably 1 to 6
carbons, more preferably 1-3 carbons, alkenyl that is straight or branched
chain, containing 2 to 12, preferably containing 3-6 carbons and one or
two double bonds, alkynyl that is straight or branched chain, containing 2
20 to 12, preferably containing 3-6 carbons and one or two double bonds, or
aryl, preferably a 6- to 10-membered aryl ring systemthat is optionally
substituted with one or more, preferably up to three, aryl group
97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-19-
substituents, or arylalkyl, and each is preferably 2-propenyl, ethyl, methyl
or aryl, preferably phenyl or phenylmethyl, or
(b) R 5 and R 6 are each independently selected from
carbon chains, heteroatoms, and carbon chains containing one or more
heteroatoms, so that together with the nitrogen atom to which each is
attached, they form a 3- to 10-, preferably 4-7, more preferably 5 to 6-
membered heterocyclic ring containing one to three heteroatoms, that is
preferably a piperidinyl, alkylpiperidinyl, morpholinyl, oxadiazolyl, triazolyl
or pyrrolidinyl radical that is unsubstituted or substituted with halo, halo
lower alkyl, hydroxy, lower alkoxy or lower alkyl, and is more preferably a
1,3,4-oxadiazolyl, 4-morpholinyl, or di(C r C 6 alkyl}-morpholinyl, preferably
2,6-di(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)-4-morpholinyl, radical;
(v) cyano, formyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyl or
arylcarbonyl;
(vi) -NR 5 COR 5 ; or
(vii) -S(0) r alkyl or -S(0} r aryl, where r is 1 or 2; and
R 7 is selected from among:
-H;
OH;
— R 14 OR 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, preferably
containing 1 to 4 carbons, or alkanoyl containing 2 to 5, preferably 2 or
3, carbon atoms, and R 14 is lower alkylene, preferably alkylene of 2 to 4
carbon atoms, more preferably methylene or ethylene, or R 14 is alkenylene
of 2 to 6 carbon atoms, alkynylene of 2 to 4 carbon atoms;
-CH 2 NR 15 R 16 in which R 16 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkanoyl,
aryl or aroyl, and R 16 is hydrogen or lower alkyl or, together with the
nitrogen atom to which they are attached, R 15 and R 16 form a 3 to 7-
membered ring which optionally contains an additional heteroatom
selected from oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur;
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-20-
-OR 16 ;
-C(0)H;
-CN;
-C( = 0)NR 5 R 6 in which R 5 and R 6 are as previously defined;
5 aikyl, preferably lower alkyl;
aryl, preferably phenyl;
— C(0)OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen, alkyl containing from 1 to 7
carbon atoms, alkenyl having 3 to 7 carbon atoms, an optionally
substituted aryl ring system (preferably a 6 to 10-membered aryl ring
10 system), an optionally substituted heteroaryl ring system (preferably a 5
to 10-membered heteroaryl ring system) containing 1 or more
heteroatoms, preferably 1 to 3 heteroatoms, such as oxygen, sulfur or
nitrogen atoms, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, preferably benzyl, phenethyl,
phenylpropyl or phenylbutyl, heteroarylalkyl, preferably furyimethyl,
15 thienylethyl or pyridylpropyl, particularly pyridyl, phenyl, tolyl,
ethylphenyl, butylphenyl or halophenyl, or a pharmaceutically acceptable
cation, such as an alkali metal or alkaline earth metal, including sodium,
potassium, calcium and ammonium cations;
where the optional aryl group substituents are selected from halo,
20 alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl,
alkenyl containing 1 to 2 double bonds, alkynyl containing 1 to 2 triple
bonds, haloalkyl and polyhaloalkyl, especially trifluoromethyl, formyl,
alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, heteroarylcarbonyl, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl,
aryloxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, alkylaminocarbonyl, dialkylaminocar-
25 bonyl, arylaminocarbonyl, diarylaminocarbonyl, arylalkylaminocarbonyl,
alkoxy, aryloxy, perfluoroalkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, arylalkoxy,
aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, arylaminoalkyl, amino,
alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, alkylarylamino, alkylcarbonylamino,
arylcarbonylamino, azido, nitro, mercapto, alkylthio, arylthio,
30 perfluoroalkylthio, thiocyano, isothiocyano, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsufonyl,
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-21-
arylsulfinyl, arylsulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, alkylaminosulfonyl,
dialkylaminosulfonyl and arylaminosulfonyl.
In certain embodiments herein, when Ar 3 is 1-(3-propionyl-2-
imidazolinon)yl, then R 4 is other than -CN. Also in certain embodiments
5 herein, when R 4 is -C( = X 5 )-NR 5 R 6 , X 5 is O and R 5 and R 6 , together with
the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form pyrrolidinyl, then M is
other than 4-morpholinyl. In yet other certain embodiments, when M is -
NR 5 R 6 and R 5 and R 6 are methyl, then R 4 is other than 1-hydroxypropyl
(CH 3 CH 2 CH(OH)-) or ethylcarbonyl (CH 3 CH 2 C( = 0)-). In still other certain
10 embodiments, when M is 4-morpholinyl or 1-piperidinyl, then R 4 is other
than ethylcarbonyl (CH 3 CH 2 C( = OH. In certain other embodiments, when
M is 4-morpholinyl, than R 4 is other than ethoxycarbonyl
(CH 3 CH 2 OC( = 0)-).
Also intended for use herein are salts of the compounds of formula
15 (I), including salts with pharmaceutically acceptable acids and quaternary
ammonium salts, N-oxides of the compounds of formula (I) and salts
thereof, including salts with pharmaceutically acceptable acids and
quaternary ammonium salts, including stereoisomeric forms of quaternary
ammonium salts, prodrugs of the compounds of formula (I), and
20 metabolites of the compounds of formula (I), including, for example,
glucuronides.
Among the suitable quaternary ammonium salts of the compounds
of formula (I), are for example, compounds of the following formulae:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-22-
in which:
R 1 is alkyl of 1 to 1 2 carbons which is optionally substituted with 1
5 to 6 halo atoms, 1 to 3 hydroxy groups or 1 to 3 alkoxy groups; alkenyl
of 3 to 12 carbons which contains 1 to 3 double bonds and is optionally
substituted with 1 to 6 halo atoms; alkynyl of 3 to 12 carbons which
contains 1 to 3 triple bonds and is optionally substituted with 1 to 6 halo
atoms; arylalkyl wherein the alkyl chain contains 1 to 6 carbons and the
10 aryl group contains 6 to 10 carbons, preferably phenyl, and is optionally
substituted with 1 to 3 aryl group substituents; arylalkenyl wherein the
alkenyl chain contains 3 to 6 carbons and 1 to 3 double bonds and the
aryl group contains 6 to 10 carbons, preferably phenyl, and is optionally
substituted with 1 to 3 aryl group substituents; arylalkynyl where the
15 alkynyl chain contains 3 to 6 carbons and 1 to 3 triple bonds and the aryl
group contains 6 to 10 carbons, preferably phenyl, and is optionally
substituted with 1 to 3 aryl group substituents; cycloalkyl of 3 to 8
carbons; cycloalkenyl of 3 to 8 carbons; cycloalkylalkyl in which the
cycloalkyl group contains 3 to 8 carbons and the alkyl chain contains 1 to
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-23-
6 carbons; cycloalkenylalkyl in which the cycloalkenyl group contains 3 to
8 carbons and the alkyl chain contains 1 to 6 carbons;
A is halo, hydroxy, alkoxy of 1 to 1 2 carbons, alkanoyloxy of 1 to
12 carbons or aroyloxy, preferably benzoyloxy, or any other
5 pharmaceutical^ acceptable group that is capable of forming a counterion
in a quaternary ammonium salt; and
m, X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , R, R 2 , R 3 , R\ R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , Ar 1 and Ar 2 are as
previously defined.
It is understood that compounds of the above formula [or any of
10 the compounds described herein] may have one or more asymmetric
centers. Pure enantiomers of the above compounds may be obtained,
and diastereoisomers isolated by physical separation methods, including,
but not limited to crystallization and chromatographic methods. Cis and
trans diasteriomeric racemates may be further resolved into their isomers.
15 If separated, active isomers may be identified by their activity as defined
herein. Such purification is not, however, necessary for preparation of
the compositions or practice of the methods herein.
Of the above classes of compounds and compounds of formula (I),
the compounds for use in the methods and compositions herein are those
20 that, upon topical or local administration, exhibit activity as peripheral
anti-hyperalgesics but, upon local or topical administration, are
substantially devoid of CNS activity as defined below. Such compounds
are typically anti-diarrheal compounds, as assessed in standard assays,
that exhibit low or no activity in assays that assess CNS activity. As
25 defined below, for purposes herein, such anti-diarrheal and CNS activity is
assessed in standard assays relative to 1 -(3-cyano-3,3-diphenylpropyl)-4-
phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxylic acid ethyl ester (also know as
2,2-diphenyl-4-[(4-carbethoxy-4-phenyl)piperidino]butyronitrile),
generically known as diphenoxylate. Selected compounds for use in the
30 methods and compositions herein have:
WO 97/09973 PCT/US96/14727
-24-
(1) activity as a peripheral anti-hyperalgesic agent as assessed in
any recognized in vivo or jn vitro model or assay; and substantially no
CNS-mediated effects, which are preferably assessed by selecting
compounds that have
5 {2) either
(a) a B/A ratio greater than or equal to diphenoxylate and a B
value at least about 2-fold greater than diphenoxylate, or
(b) a B/A ratio, at least equal to, and preferably more than
about 2-fold greater than diphenoxylate, where:
10 B is the ED 50 of the compound in an art-recognized assay Ithe hot
plate tail withdrawal test or the tail clip test, described below, tail flick or
assay that yields equivalent or substantially equivalent results] that
measures CNS activity of the compound, and
A is the ED 50 of the compound in an art-recognized assay [the
15 Castor Oil test or Antagonism of PGE 2 -induced diarrhea in mice, described
below, or an assay that yields equivalent results] that measures anti-
diarrheal activity of the compound. The ratio of these activities of the
compound of interest is compared to the ratio of the activities of
diphenoxylate in the same assays. Among preferred compounds are
20 those that have a B/A ratio that is more than about 3-fold greater than
diphenoxylate, although compounds with a B/A ratio greater than or equal
to diphenoxylate may also be used.
Preferred among the compounds of formula (I) are those of formula
(II) or N-oxides thereof:
preferably where R 4 is
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-25-
° ^R 5
— N
\
R 6
and more preferably where R 7 is OH, R is hydrogen or methyl, and R 3 is
Ar 3 , preferably phenyl, more preferably 4-halo-phenyl. Yet more preferred
are compounds where R 5 and R 6 are methyl or ethyl, or together with the
10 nitrogen to which they are attached form a pyrrolidine or piperidine ring.
More preferred among these compounds are loperamide [4-(p-chlo-
rophenyl)-4-hydroxy-N-N-dimethyl-a ( a-diphenyl-1-piperidinebutyramide
hydrochloride] and analogs [see formula III] thereof that exhibit B/A ratios
greater than loperamide [see, e^, U.S. Patent No. 3,884,916 and U.S.
15 Patent No. 3,714,159]. Such compounds include those in which:
(i> Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R is hydrogen, R 2 is (CH 2 ) 2 , R 5 and R 6 ,
with the nitrogen to which each is linked form pyrrolidine and R 3 is 4-
chlorophenyl or 3,4,-di-chlorophenyl;
(ii) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R is hydrogen, R 2 is (CH 2 ) 2 , R 5 and R 6 ,
20 with the nitrogen to which each is linked form piperidinyl and R 3 is
phenyl;
(iii) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R 2 is (CH 2 ) 2 , R is hydrogen, R 5 and R 6
are each methyl and R 3 is 4-bromophenyl;
(iv) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R 2 is (CH 2 ) 2 , R is hydrogen, R 5 and R 6
25 are methyl and ethyl, respectively, and R 3 is 4-chlorophenyl;
(v) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R 2 is CH 2 CHCH 3 , R is hydrogen, R 5 and
R 6 are each methyl and R 3 is 4-fluorophenyl; and
(vi) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R 2 is CH 2 CH 2 , R is 4-methyl, R 5 and R 6
are each methyl and R 3 is 3-trifluoromethylphenyl or phenyl.
30 ,n certain other preferred embodiments, the compounds of formula
(I) are those of formula (II) above, preferably where R 4 is cyano and R 7 is -
C(0)OR 17 , in which R 17 is preferably hydrogen or lower alkyl, more
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-26-
preferably methyl or ethyl. More preferred among these compounds is
diphenoxylate (2,2-diphenyl-4-[(4-carbethoxy-4-phenyl)piperidino]-
butyronitrile) and defenoxine (1 (3-cyano-3,3-diphenylpropyl)-4-phenyl-4-
piperidinecarboxylic acid).
5 Because of its ready availability and demonstrated safety,
loperamide HCI is presently most preferred.
Compositions formulated for topical and local administration for
treatment and/or prevention of hyperalgesia are also provided. The
compositions provided herein, may be formulated for single or multiple
10 dosage administration, and contain an anti-hyperalgesic effective amount
(where the amount refers that which is delivered as a single dose) of one
or more of the selected compounds in a vehicle formulated for topical or
local administration. Generally the compounds are provided in the form of
a suspension or emulsion at concentrations of from about 0.1%,
15 preferably from greater than about 1 %, particularly when formulated in
aqueous medium for application to the nasal passages or lungs, up to
50% or more.
The compositions are formulated as creams, aqueous or non-
aqueous suspensions, lotions, emulsions, suspensions or emulsions
20 containing micronized particles, gels, foams, aerosols, solids and other
suitable vehicles for application to the skin, eyes, lips and mucosa, as
suppositories or creams for vaginal administration, and as combinations
with bandages, patches, bioadhesives and dressings. The compounds
may be formulated in combination with other agents, such as local
25 anesthetics, vasoconstrictors and other therapeutic agents. The other
agents may be mixed in the compositions or provided separately and
administered prior to, simultaneously with or subsequent to administration
of the compositions provided for the methods herein. Such agents
include, but are not limited to: antibiotics, including cephalosporins, fi-
30 lactams, tetracyclines, vancomycins, sulfas and aminoglycosides;
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-27-
antivirals, including acylovir; antifungals including clotrimazole;
vasoconstrictors; non-steroidal anti-inflammatories (NSAIs) and steroids.
Methods of treating and/or preventing hyperalgesia by applying an
amount of the compositions provided herein effective to ameliorate or
5 eliminate the hyperalgesic state are provided. Thus, methods of treating
and/or preventing pain and irritation associated with inflammation
following local infection, blisters, boils, or acute skin injuries, such as
abrasions, burns, superficial cuts, surgical incisions, toothaches,
contusions, irritations, inflammatory skin conditions, including but not
10 limited to poison ivy, and allergic rashes and dermatitis and any condition
that yields a hyperalgesic pain state and other such conditions are
provided.
Articles of manufacture containing: packaging material, a
compound [or compounds] provided herein, which is effective for
15 ameliorating peripheral hyperalgesia within the packaging material, and a
label that indicates that the compound, acid, salt or other derivative
thereof is used for treating and/or preventing hyperalgesic conditions, are
provided.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
20 Figure 1 is a graphical representation of in vitro binding studies
involving a compound provided herein and also morphine.
Figures 2 to 9 are graphical representations of in vivo
pharmacological test studies described herein using compounds and
methods provided herein.
25 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
Definitions
Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used
herein have the same meaning as is commonly understood by one of skill
in the art to which this invention belongs. All patents and publications
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-28-
referred to herein are, unless noted otherwise, incorporated by reference
in their entirety.
As used herein, hyperalgesia or a hyperalgesic state refers to a
condition in which a warm-blooded animal is extremely sensitive to
5 mechanical, chemical or thermal stimulation that, absent the condition,
would be painless. In recent years, it has been shown that after the
induction of a local inflammatory state, peripheral afferent terminals,
which are otherwise only activated by high intensity stimuli, may develop
spontaneous activity [Handwerker et aL. (1991) Pain and inflammation,
10 Proceeding of the Vlth World Congress on Pain , Bond et aL eds, Elsevier
Science Publishers BV, pp. 59-701. Typical models for such a
hyperalgesic state include the inflamed rat paw compression model [Stein,
et ah (1989) J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 248 :1269-12751 and they
compression of the inflamed knee joint [Sato, et a/. (1986) J. Physiol
15 375 :61 1-624]. In these models, it has been shown that the local
injection of mu opioids can induce a normalization of the hyperalgesic
state. Agents that serve to normalize the sensitized thresholds are
behaving as anti-hyperalgesics, rather than as analgesics.
Hyperalgesia is known to accompany certain physical injuries to
20 the body, for example the injury inevitably caused by surgery.
Hyperalgesia is also known to accompany certain inflammatory conditions
in man such as arthritic and rheumatic disease. Prostaglandins, such as
prostaglandin E, or prostaglandin E 2 [hereinafter PGE, and PGE 2 respec-
tively], act to sensitize pain receptors to mechanical or chemical
25 stimulation. Low doses of these prostaglandins can induce the
hyperalgesic state. A long-lasting hyperalgesia occurs when PGE, is
infused in man, and the co-administration of PGE, with a further chemical
stimulant, such as bradykinin, causes marked pain that would not be
present in the absence of PGE,.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-29-
Hyperalgesia, thus refers to mild to moderate pain [and possibly
severe pain] such as the pain associated with, but not limited to,
inflammatory conditions [such as rheumatoid arthritis and osteoarthritis],
postoperative pain, post-partum pain, the pain associated with dental
5 conditions [such as dental caries and gingivitis], the pain associated with
burns, including but not limited to sunburns, abrasions, contusions and
the like, the pain associated with sports injuries and sprains, inflammatory
skin conditions, including but not limited to poison ivy, and allergic rashes
and dermatitis, and other such pain that increases sensitivity to mild
10 stimuli. Locally or topically applied or administered anti-hyperalgesic
agents do not necessarily abolish pain sensation, but need only restore [or
reduce the threshold closer to] the pre-hyperalgesic pain threshold.
As used herein, an agent that acts, directly or indirectly via a
receptor or receptors responsible for mediating or involved in peripheral
15 hyperalgesia, by antagonizing the activity of hyperalgesia mediating
agents, such as a prostaglandin, is an agent intended for use herein, if it
also does not exhibit CNS effects as defined herein. Such agent is a
peripheral antihyperalgesic. As intended herein, the activity of
antihyperalgesic agents is distinct from the activity of centrally-acting
20 analgesic agents [agents that act by virtue of crossing the blood brain
barrier]. Anti-hyperalgesic agents act to block the hypersensitivity. The
compositions and methods herein are intended for prevention N.e. .
pretreatment] and/or the amelioration of the symptoms [Le^, treatment] of
hyperalgesia by decreasing or eliminating the hyperalgesia or by
25 preventing its onset. An antihyperalgesic agent is distinct from a local
anesthetic, which is an agent that produces numbness by abolishing
sensitivity to touch and other stimuli, including pain stimuli. Local
anesthetics abolish sensation, including pain, by blocking conduction in
nerve axons in the peripheral nervous system. Antihyperalgesics, on the
30 other hand, alleviate pain by elevating a patient's threshold to pain.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-30-
Thus, unlike anesthetics, antihyperalgesics reduce sensation to pain
during states of increased sensitivity [hyperalgesia] without substantially
affecting normal sensitivity to touch and/or other stimuli.
Antihyperalgesics are agents that may reduce hypersensitivity to
5 touch and other stimuli that would not, under normal circumstances,
evoke a pain response. The hyperalgesic response is an exaggerated
response, such as excessive sensitiveness or sensibility to pain from
touch, slight exertion, warmth and the like. The hyperalgesic state
produces a situation in which stimuli that are normally innocuous can
10 produce pain. A particularly striking example is sunburned skin in which
severe pain can be produced by a gentle slap on the back or a warm
shower. Antihyperalgesics may be identified, for example, by the Randall-
Selitto method [see, e.g., Randall et al. (1957) Arch. Int. Pharmacodvn.
111 :409-41 9], as well as the formalin, carrageenan and yeast induced
15 inflammation methods. In addition to the antihyperalgesic effect, the
antihyperalgesic agents provided herein may concurrently provide an
analgesic effect.
Antihyperalgesics may be distinguished from analgesics. Anal-
gesics are agents that may reduce a patient's perception of pain evoked
20 by stimuli that are acutely painful under normal circumstances. Thus,
analgesics may be effective in reducing the acute and immediate pain
associated with trauma [ e.g. , pinpricks, burns, or crushing wounds] as
well as chronic pain, that is not normally associated with peripheral
sensitization, such as cancer or headache pain. Analgesics are typically
25 identified in experiments, such as thermal methods [for example, the hot
plate, tail withdrawal or tail flick tests], as compounds that suppress or
reduce the evocation of a pain response in an animal model upon
exposure to intense heat. Analgesics may also be identified by certain
mechanical methods [ e.g. . the tail clip or tail pinch tests] as compounds
30 that suppress or reduce the evocation of a pain response in a subject
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-31-
[laboratory mouse] upon exposure to intense mechanical pressure. In
these standard tests, analgesics may be identified as those compounds
that reduce normal sensitivity to an intense, intrinsically painful stimulus.
Central analgesics typically affect the central nervous system,
5 generally via opiate receptors. In preferred form, the antihyperalgesics
described herein do not substantially affect the central nervous system.
As used herein, the term peripheral, when used in connection with
the term antihyperalgesics, denotes antihyperalgesics that act on the
opioid receptor on sensory nerve fibers in the nociceptive (pain) pathways
10 of the peripheral nervous system, as contrasted with the central nervous
system.
As used herein, an effective dose or amount of a compound for use
herein refers to a concentration or amount that is effective upon topical
administration to reduce, including prevent, or ameliorate the hyperalgesic
15 condition and thereby reduce the pain threshold to levels closer to normal
or to normal [Le, the level in the absence of the hyperalgesic condition].
Typically, compounds are provided in compositions that may be
formulated for single dosage or multiple dosage administration. The
effective concentration is with reference to delivery of an effective
20 amount in a single dose [or in the number of recommended doses].
As used herein, the compounds provided herein, including those of
formula (I), also include pharmaceutical^ acceptable salts, acids and
esters thereof, stereoisomers, and also metabolites or prodrugs thereof
that possess activity as anti-hyperalgesics but do not cause substantial
25 CNS effects [as defined herein] when topically or locally administered or
applied. Metabolites include any compound that is produced upon
administration of the compound and metabolism thereof. Thus,
loperamide refers to 4-(p-chlorophenyl)-4-hydroxy-N-N-dimethyl-<7,a-
diphenyl-1-piperidinebutyramide hydrochloride and active metabolites
30 thereof.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-32-
As used herein, loperamide and analogs thereof are compounds
that have formula (I), below, and active N-oxides and pharmaceutically
acceptable salts thereof.
As used herein, local application or administration refers to admini-
5 stration of an anti-hyperalgesic agent to the site, such as an inflamed
joint, that exhibits the hyperalgesic condition and that does not exert
central analgesic effects or CNS effects associated with systemic admini-
stration of opioids that cross the blood brain barrier. Such local applica-
tion includes intrajoint, such as intra-articular application, via injection,
10 application via catheter or delivery as part of a biocompatible device.
Thus, local application refers to application to a discrete internal area of
the body, such as, for example, a joint, soft tissue area (such as muscle,
tendon, ligaments, intraocular or other fleshy internal areas), or other
internal area of the body. In particular, as used herein, local application
15 refers to applications that provide substantially no systemic delivery
and/or systemic administration of the active agents in the present
compositions. Also, as used herein, local application is intended to refer
to applications to discrete areas of the body, that is, other than the
various large body cavities (such as, for example, the peritoneal and/or
20 pleural cavities).
As used herein, topical application refers to application to the
surface of the body, such as to the skin, eyes, mucosa and lips, which
can be in or on any part of the body, including but not limited to the
epidermis, any other dermis, or any other body tissue. Topical
25 administration or application means the direct contact of the anti-
hyperalgesic with tissue, such as skin or membrane, particularly the
cornea, or oral, vaginal or buccal mucosa. Topical administration also
includes application to hardened tissue such as teeth and appendages of
the skin such as nails and hair. Thus, for purposes herein topical
30 application refers to application to the tissue of an accessible body
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-33-
surface, such as, for example, the skin (the outer integument or covering)
and the mucosa (the mucous-producing, secreting and/or containing
surfaces). In particular, topical application refers to applications that
provide no or substantially no systemic delivery and/or systemic
5 administration of the active compounds in the present compositions.
Exemplary mucosal surfaces include the mucosal surfaces of the eyes,
mouth (such as the lips, tongue, gums, cheeks, sublingual and roof of the
mouth), larynx, esophagus, bronchial, nasal passages, vagina and
rectum/anus; in some embodiments, preferably the mouth, larynx,
10 esophagus, vagina and rectum/anus; in other embodiments, preferably the
eyes, larynx, esophagus, bronchial, nasal passages, vagina and
rectum/anus; and in still other embodiments, preferably the vagina and
rectum/anus.
A composition formulated for topical administration may be liquid
15 or semi-solid (including, for example, a gel, lotion, emulsion, cream,
ointment, spray or aerosol) or may be provided in combination with a
"finite" carrier, for example, a non-spreading material that retains its form,
including, for example, a patch, bioadhesive, dressing or bandage. It may
be aqueous or non-aqueous; it may be formulated as a solution, emulsion,
20 dispersion, a suspension or any other mixture.
As used herein, a composition refers to a any mixture, including
but not limited to, dispersions, emulsions, suspensions, and other other
mixtures. . It may be a solution, a suspension, liquid, powder, a paste,
aqueous, non-aqueous or any combination thereof.
25 As used herein, a combination refers to any association between
two or among more items.
As used herein, a lack of (or without causing) CNS effects or
systemic effects, including and particularly CNS effects and CNS-
mediated effects, means that the agent preferably exhibits at least about
30 2-fold less activity in an assay or animal model [particularly those as
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-34-
defined and described herein] for such effects than 2,2-diphenyl-4-[(4-car-
bethoxy-4-phenyl)piperidino]butyronitrile, generically known as diphen-
oxylate, which has the formula:
5 o
15 As used herein, the biological activity or bioactivity of a particular
compound includes any activity induced, potentiated or influenced by the
compound in vivo or in vitro . It also includes the abilities, such as the
ability of certain molecules to bind to particular receptors and to induce a
functional response. It may be assessed by in vivo assays or by in vitro
20 assays, such as those exemplified herein.
As used herein, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters or other
derivatives of the compounds include any salts, esters or derivatives that
may be readily prepared by those of skill in this art using known methods
for such derivatization and that produce compounds that may be
25 administered to animals or humans without substantial toxic effects and
that either are pharmaceutically active or are prodrugs. For example,
hydroxy groups can be esterified or etherified.
As used herein, N-oxides refer to oxides of one or more nitrogens,
preferably the nitrogen on the piperidine ring [see, e.g. . formula (I)].
30 As used herein, substantially pure means sufficiently homogeneous
to appear free of readily detectable impurities as determined by standard
methods of analysis, such as thin layer chromatography [TLC], mass
spectrometry (MS), size exclusion chromatography, gel electrophoresis,
particularly agarose and polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis [PAGE] and
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-35-
high performance liquid chromatography [HPLC], used by those of skill in
the art to assess such purity, or sufficiently pure such that further
purification would not detectably alter the physical and chemical
properties, as well as biological activities, of the substance. Methods for
5 purification of the compounds to produce substantially chemically pure
compounds are known to those of skill in the art. A substantially
chemically pure compound may, however, be a mixture of enantiomers.
In such instances, further purification might increase the specific activity
of the compound.
10 As used herein, adequately pure or "pure" per se means sufficiently
pure for the intended use of the adequately pure compound.
As used herein, biological activity refers to the in vivo activities of
a compound or physiological responses that result upon in vivo
administration of a compound, composition or other mixture. Biological
15 activity, thus, encompasses therapeutic effects and pharmaceutical
activity of such compounds, compositions and mixtures.
As used herein, a prodrug is a compound that, upon in vivo admin-
istration, is metabolized or otherwise converted to the biologically,
pharmaceutical^ or therapeutically active form of the compound. To
20 produce a prodrug, the pharmaceutical^ active compound is modified
such that the active compound will be regenerated by metabolic
processes. The prodrug may be designed to alter the metabolic stability
or the transport characteristics of a drug, to mask side effects or toxicity,
to improve the flavor of a drug or to alter other characteristics or pro-
25 perties of a drug. By virtue of knowledge of pharmacodynamic processes
and drug metabolism in vivo, those of skill in this art, once a pharmaceu-
tical^ active compound is known, can design prodrugs of the compound
[see, e^, Nogrady (1 985) Medicinal Chemistry A Biochemical Approach
Oxford University Press, New York, pages 388-392].
WO 97/09973
PCTYUS96/14727
-36-
As used herein, the IC 50 refers to an amount, concentration or
dosage of a particular test compound that achieves a 50% inhibition of a
maximal response in an in vitro assay that measures such response.
As used herein, EC S0 refers to a dosage, concentration or amount
5 of a particular test compound that elicits 50% of maximal expression of a
particular dose-dependent response that is induced, provoked or
potentiated by the particular test compound in vivo .
As used herein, "halogen" or "halide" or "halo" refers to F, CI, Br
or I, and also pseudohalides. In preferred embodiments halo refers to F,
10 CI, Br and I.
As used herein, pseudohalides are compounds that behave
substantially similar to halides. Such compounds can be used in the same
manner and treated in the same manner as halides (X , in which X is a
halogen, such as CI or Br). Pseudohalides include, but are not limited to
15 cyanide, cyanate, thiocyanate, selenocyanate, azide and trifluoromethyl.
As used herein, carbon chains and carbon chains with heteroatoms, may
be straight or branched or, if they contain 3 or more members may be
cyclic.
As used herein, alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl carbon chains, if not
20 specified contain from 1 to 20 carbons, preferably 1 to 1 2 carbons, and
are straight or branched. Alkenyl carbon chains of from 1 to 20 carbons
preferably contain 1 to 8 double bonds, and the alkenyl carbon chains of
1 to 12 carbons preferably contain 1 to 4 double bonds. Alkynyl carbon
chains of from 1 to 20 carbons preferably contain 1 to 8 triple bonds, and
25 the alkynyl carbon chains of 1 to 1 2 carbons preferably contain 1 to 4
triple bonds. The alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl groups may be optionally
substituted, with one or more groups, preferably alkyl group substituents
that may be the same or different.
As used herein, an alkyl group substituent includes halo, haloalkyl,
30 preferably halo lower alkyl, aryl, hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkyloxy,
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-37-
alkylthio, arylthio, aralkyloxy, aralkylthio, carboxy alkoxycarbonyl, oxo
and cycloalkyl.
As used herein, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, and lower alkynyl refe
to carbon chains having one to about 6 carbons. In preferred
5 embodiments of the compounds provided herein that include alkyl,
alkenyl, or alkynyl portions include lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, and lower
alkynyl portions. Preferred among lower carbon chains are those havin
1-3 carbons.
As used herein, aryl refers to an aromatic carbocyclic radical,
10 preferably containing up to about 16 carbon atoms, more preferably from
about 6 to about 10 carbon atoms. The aryl group may be optionally
substituted with one or more, preferably one to three, aryl group
substituents that may be the same or different.
As used herein, an "aryl group substituent" includes alkyl,
15 cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl optionally substituted with 1 or
more, preferably 1 to 3, substituents selected from halo, halo alkyl and
alkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, alkenyl containing 1 to 2 double bonds,
alkynyl containing 1 to 2 triple bonds, halo, hydroxy, haloalkyl and
polyhaloalkyl, preferably halo lower alkyl, especially trifluoromethyl,
20 formyl, alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl that is optionally substituted with 1 or
more, preferably 1 to 3, substituents selected from halo, halo alkyl and
alkyl, heteroarylcarbonyl, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl,
aminocarbonyl, alkylaminocarbonyl, dialkylaminocarbonyl, arylamino-
carbonyl, diarylaminocarbonyl, arylalkylaminocarbonyl, alkoxy, aryloxy,
25 perfluoroalkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, arylalkoxy, aminoalkyl,
alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, arylaminoalkyl, amino, alkylamino,
dialkylamino, arylamino, alkylarylamino, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonyl-
amino, azido, nitro, mercapto, alkylthio, arylthio, perfluoroalkylthio,
thiocyano, isothiocyano, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsufonyl, arylsulfinyl,
30 arylsulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, alkylaminosulfonyl, dialkylaminosulfonyl and
WO 97/09973
PCT7US96/14727
-38-
arylaminosulfonyl. Exemplary aryl groups include optionally substituted
phenyl and optionally substituted naphthyl.
As used herein, cycloalkyl refers to a saturated mono- or multi-
cyclic ring system, preferably of 3 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 3
5 to 6 carbon atoms; cycloalkenyl and cycloalkynyl refer to mono- or
multicyclic ring systems that respectively include at least one double bond
and at least one triple bond. Cycloalkenyl and cycloalkynyl groups may
preferably contain 3 to 10 carbon atoms, with cycloalkenyl groups more
preferably containing 4 to 7 carbon atoms and cycloalkynyl groups more
10 preferably containing 8 to 10 carbon atoms. The ring systems of the
cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl and cycloalkynyl groups may be composed of one
ring or two or more rings which may be joined together in a fused,
bridged or spiro-connected fashion, and may be optionally substituted
with one or more alkyl group substituents.
15 As used herein, heteroaryl refers to a monocyclic or multicyclic ring
system, preferably of about 5 to about 10 members where one or more,
more preferably 1 to 3 of the atoms in the ring system is a heteroatom,
that is, an element other than carbon, for example, nitrogen, oxygen and
sulfur atoms. The heteroaryl may be optionally substituted with one or
20 more, preferably 1 to 3, aryl group substituents. Exemplary heteroaryl
groups include, for example, furanyl, thienyl, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, N-
methylpyrrolyl, quinolinyl and isoquinolinyl, with pyridyl being preferred.
As used herein, heterocyclic refers to a monocyclic or multicyclic
ring system, preferably of 3 to 10 members, more preferably 4 to 7
25 members, even more preferably 5 to 6 members, where one or more,
preferably 1 to 3 of the atoms in the ring system is a heteroatom, that is,
an element other than carbon, for example, nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur
atoms. The heterocycle may be optionally substituted with one or more,
preferably 1 to 3 aryl group substituents. Preferred substituents of the
30 heterocyclic group include hydroxy, alkoxy containing 1 to 4 carbon
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-39-
atoms, halo lower alkyl, including trihalomethyl, such as trifluoromethyl,
and halogen. As used herein, the term heterocycle may include reference
to heteroaryl. Exemplary heterocycles include, for example, pyrrolidinyl,
piperidinyl, alkylpiperidinyl, morpholinyl, oxadiazolyl or triazolyl.
5 As used herein, wherever Ar\ Ar 2 , Ar 3 , and other groups, for
example R 4 , R 5 , R 6 and R 17 in which ring systems are among alternative
embodiments, when such embodiments are specified, among the
preferred selections therefor are those in which each is independently
selected from a ring system, preferably a 6- to 10-membered ring system,
10 more preferably an aryl ring sytem, or a heteroatom-containg ring system,
preferably a 5- to 10-membered heteroatom-contarning ring system, more
preferably a heteraryl ring system, containing 1 or more heteroatoms,
preferably 1 to 3 heteroatoms, such as oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atoms,
wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are each optionally
15 substituted with one or more, preferably up to three, aryl group
substituents [as defined herein], and Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each preferably
independently phenyl or pyridyi, optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy,
haloalkyl, preferably halo lower alkyl, particularly trifluoromethyl, alkyl,
alkyloxy, aminosulfonyl, alkylcarbonyl, nitro, amino, aminocarbonyl,
20 phenylcarbonyl which is optionally substituted with one or more,
preferably up to three, substituents selected from halo, halo alkyl and
alkyl, or thienyl which is optionally substituted with halo, haloalkyl or
alkyl, where the alkyl groups are straight or branched chain and preferably
contain from 1 to 6 carbons, more preferably 1 to 3 carbons.
25 As used herein, the nomenclature alkyl, alkoxy, carbonyl, etc. are
used as is generally understood by those of skill in this art. For example,
as used herein alkyl refers to non-aromatic carbon chains that contain one
or more carbons; the chains may be straight or branched or include cyclic
portions or be cyclic. As used herein, alicyclic refers to alkyl groups that
30 are cyclic.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-40-
As used herein, "haloalkyl" refers to an alkyl radical, preferably
lower alkyl, in which one or more of the hydrogen atoms are replaced by
halogen including, but not limited to, chloromethyl, trifluoromethyl,
1 -chloro-2-fluoroethyl and other such groups. Halo lower alkyl refers to
5 lower alkyl substituted with one or more halo substituents, and is
preferably trichloromethyl or trifluoromethyl.
As used herein, "haloalkoxy" refers to RO- in which R is a haloalkyl
group.
As used herein, "aminocarbonyl" refers to -C(0)NH 2 .
10 As used herein, "alkylaminocarbonyl" refers to -C(0)NHR in which
R is alkyl, preferably lower alkyl.
As used herein, "dialkylaminocarbonyl" refers to -C{0)NR'R in
which R' and R are independently selected from alkyl, preferably lower
alkyl; "carboxamide" refers to groups of formula RCONH 2 , where R is
15 alkyl or aryl.
As used herein, "diarylaminocarbonyl" refers to -C(0)NRR' in which
R and R' are independently selected from aryl, preferably lower aryl, more
preferably phenyl.
As used herein, "arylalkylaminocarbonyl" refers to -C(0)NRR' in
20 which one of R and R' is aryl, preferably lower aryl, more preferably
phenyl, and the other of R and R' is alkyl, preferably lower alkyl.
As used herein, "arylaminocarbonyl" refers to -C(0)NHR in which R
is aryl, preferably lower aryl, more preferably phenyl.
As used herein, "alkoxycarbonyl" refers to -C(0)OR in which R is
25 alkyl, preferably lower alkyl.
As used herein, "aryloxycarbonyl" refers to -C(0)OR in which R is
aryl, preferably lower aryl, more preferably phenyl.
As used herein, "alkoxy" and "thioalkoxy" refer to RO- and RS-, in
which R is alkyl, preferably lower alkyl.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-41 -
As used herein, "aryloxy" and thioaryloxy" refer to RO- and RS-, in
which R is aryl, preferably lower aryl, more preferably phenyl.
As used herein, "alkylene" refers to a straight, branched or cyclic,
preferably straight or branched, bivalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group,
5 preferably having from 1 to about 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to
12 carbons, even more preferably lower alkylene. The alkylene group is
optionally substituted with one or more "alkyl group substituents." There
may be optionally inserted along the alkylene group one or more oxygen,
sulphur or substituted or unsubstituted nitrogen atoms, where the
10 nitrogen substituent is alkyl as previously described. Exemplary alkylene
groups include methylene (-CH 2 -), ethylene (-CH 2 CH 2 -) f propylene
(-(CH 2 ) 3 -), cyclohexylene ( C 6 H 10 -), (CH 2 ) n -N(R)-(CH 2 ) m - ; where each of m
and n is independently an integer from 0 to 30 and R is hydrogen or alkyl,
methylenedioxy (-0-CH 2 -0-) and ethylenedioxy (-0-(CH 2 ) 2 -0-). The term
15 "lower alkylene" refers to alkylene groups having 1 to 6 carbons.
Preferred alkylene groups are lower alkylene, with alkylene of 1 to 3
carbon atoms being particularly preferred.
As used herein, "alkenylene" refers to a straight, branched or
cyclic, preferably straight or branched, bivalent aliphatic hydrocarbon
20 group, preferably having from 1 to about 20 carbon atoms and at least
one double bond, more preferably 1 to 12 carbons, even more preferably
lower alkenylene. The alkenylene group is optionally substituted with one
or more "alkyl group substituents." There may be optionally inserted
along the alkenylene group one or more oxygen, sulphur or substituted or
25 unsubstituted nitrogen atoms, where the nitrogen substituent is alkyl as
previously described. Exemplary alkenylene groups include
-CH = CH-CH = CH- and -CH = CH-CH 2 -. The term "lower alkenylene"
refers to alkenylene groups having 2 to 6 carbons. Preferred alkenylene
groups are lower alkenylene, with alkylene of 3 to 4 carbon atoms being
30 particularly preferred.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-42-
As used herein, when any particular group, such as phenyl or
pyridyl, is specified, this means that the group is unsubstituted or is
substituted. Preferred substituents where not specified are halo, halo
lower alkyl, and lower alkyl.
5 As used herein, the abbreviations for any protective groups, amino
acids, including non-naturally occurring and amino acid analogs, and other
compounds, are, unless indicated otherwise, in accord with their common
usage, recognized abbreviations, or the IUPAC-IUB Commission on
Biochemical Nomenclature [see, (1972) Biochem. 11 :942-944]. Each
10 naturally or non-naturally occurring L-amino acid is identified by the
standard three letter code or the standard three letter code with the prefix
"L-"; the prefix "D-" indicates that the enantiomeric form of the amino
acid is D.
A. Compounds
15 In animal models, it is demonstrated herein that the local injection
of compounds that directly or indirectly agonize at least one of the fj
and/or k and/or 6, preferably /j and/or k, peripheral receptors induces a
normalization of the hyperalgesic state. This peripheral action of opiates
in reducing the hyperalgesic state is of value, but traditional opiates, such
20 as morphine, meperidine and fentanyl cross the blood-brain barrier
allowing for the appearance of systemically and CNS mediated undesir-
able side effects. To solve these problems, the compositions provided
herein contain compounds that exhibit activity as peripheral anti-
hyperalgesics, but do not exhibit substantial CNS effects as determined in
25 suitable animal models as described herein. Intended for use in the
methods and compositions herein are any compounds that, by virtue of
indirect or direct fj or k or 6, preferably /a or k, more preferably p, agonist
activity, act as peripheral anti-hyperalgesics but that, upon local or topical
administration, are substantially devoid [as defined herein] of CNS-
30 mediated analgesic and other activities. Such compounds are typically
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-43-
anti-diarrheal compounds, as assessed in standard assays, that exhibit
low or no activity in assays that assess CNS activity. In particular, such
a compound is one that:
(1) has activity as a peripheral anti-hyperalgesic as assessed in any
5 recognized in yjyo or in yjtro model or assay; and, substantially no CNS-
mediated effects, which are preferably assessed by selecting compounds
that have
(2) either:
(a) a B/A ratio greater than or equal to diphenoxylate and a B
10 value at least about 2-fold greater than diphenoxylate, or
(b) has a B/A ratio greater, at least about equal to, prefearbly
about 2-fold, [among the preferred compounds ratios greater than about
3-fold may be observed] than diphenoxylate, where:
B is the ED 50 of the compound in an assay [the well known tail clip
15 assay, tail flick assay or hot plate assay, described below and known to
those of skill in this art] that measures CNS activity of the compound, the
A is the ED 50 of the compound in an assay that measures anti-
diarrheal activity of the compound. The assay in which anti-diarrheal
activity is measured is the Castor oil test or the assay that measures
20 antagonism of PGE 2 -induced diarrhea in mice, described below [see, also,
Dajani et aL (1 977) J. Pharmac ol. Exp. Ther, 203:51 2-526, Dajani et aL
(1975) European Jour. Pharmacol 34- 1 0R-i 1 *3- u.S. Patent No.
4,870,084; U.S. Patent No. 4,066,654, U.S. Patent No. 4,057,549; U.S.
Patent No. 3,950,537; U.S. Patent No. 3,998,832, U.S. Patent No.
25 3,996,214]. The relative activities of the compound of interest are
compared to the activities of diphenoxylate in the same assays. It is
understood that the assays are art-recognized assays such that diphen-
oxylate activity serves as an accurate standard.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-44-
Of particular interest herein are compositions that are formulated,
at concentrations effective for reducing, alleviating or eliminating,
hyperalgesic pain, for topical or local administration and contain one or
more compounds of formula (I) or N-oxides, preferably an N-oxide of a
piperidine-nitrogen, thereof or other pharmaceutically acceptable
derivatives thereof:
10
15
Ar-
M
I
N ) or
(CM;),
in which:
m is an integer from 0 to 3, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or
20 2 , and most preferably 2;
"CD
is an azabicycloalkyl containing from 6 to 9 carbon atoms
with at least 5 atoms in each ring, which ring is preferably pyrrolidino,
piperidino, or hexamethylenimino, where the tertiary amine is:
and is unsubstituted or substituted with OR 18 in which R' 8 is hydrogen or
30 lower alkanoyl containing 2 to 7, preferably 2 or 3, carbon atoms, and
OR 18 is preferably attached at the 5 position in 5-membered rings or the 5
or 6 position in 6-membered rings and is attached in the endo or exo
configuration, where R 3 , R 7 , R 5 and R 6 are as defined below. The
tertiary amine is preferably:
35
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
where m is an integer from 1 to 3, preferably 1 or 2, more
preferably 2; and
X 1 , X 2 and X 3 are -C(R 24 )(R 25 >-, -C(R 24 ) = C(R 25 )-, -C(R 24 ) = N-,
-N = C(R 24 )-, -C( = OK -0-, -S- or -N(R 24 )-, with the proviso that only one
of X 1 , X 2 and X 3 may be O, S or NR 24 ; and
R 24 and R 25 are hydrogen or lower alkyl.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-46-
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are either (i) or (ii) as follows:
(i) each is independently selected from an aryl ring system
(preferably a 6- to 10-membered aryl ring system) or a heteroaryl ring
system (preferably a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl ring system)
5 containing 1 or more heteroatoms, preferably 1 to 3 heteroatoms, such as
oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atoms, where the aryl and heteroaryl ring
systems are each optionally substituted with one or more (preferably up
to three) aryl group substituents, and Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each preferably
independently phenyl or pyridyl, optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy,
10 haloalkyl, preferably halo lower alkyl, particularly trifluoromethyl, alkyl,
alkyloxy, aminosulfonyl, alkylcarbonyl, nitro, amino, aminocarbonyl,
phenylcarbonyl which is optionally substituted with one or more
(preferably up to three) substituents selected from halo, halo alkyl and
alkyl, or thienyl which is optionally substituted with halo, haloalkyl or
15 alkyl, where the alkyl groups are straight or branched chain and preferably
contain from 1 to 6 carbons, more preferably 1 to 3 carbons; or
(ii) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently phenyl or pyridyl
groups, which are unsubstituted or substituted with, preferably aryl
substituent groups, as defined herein, preferably phenyl, and with the
20 carbon to which they are commonly linked form a fused ring system, so
that the compounds of formula (I) have the structure:
and is preferably,
m ^
25 rZ \/ r4
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-47-
where:
A and B are independently selected from phenyl and pyridyl,
preferably phenyl, which are unsubstituted or substituted, preferably with
up to three aryl group substituents;
preferably 2 or 3;
10 R 21 is hydrogen or lower alkyl;
each of p and q is 0 or 1 , and the sum of p and q is no
greater than 2;
r is 0 to 2;
R 2 is a direct bond, or is alkylene in which the alkyl group is a
15 straight or branched chain, preferably is alkylene containing from 1 to 12,
preferably 1 to 6, more preferably 1 to 3 carbons and most preferably is
— (CH 2 ) 2 — or — CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) — , is alkenylene having 2 to 6 carbon atoms,
preferably 2 to 3 carbons atoms, and one or two, preferably one, double
bond, or is alkynylene having 2 to 6 carbon atoms, preferably 2 to 3
20 carbons atoms, and one or two triple bond, in all instances the chains are
unsubstituted or substituted, and, if substituted, preferably with one or
more hydroxy groups;
R 3 is selected from Ar 3 , -Y-Ar 3 , where Y is alkylene or alkenylene
having, preferably, 2 to 4 carbon atoms; alkenyl containing 2 to 4
25 carbons; cycloalkyl containing 3 to 8 carbons; heterocycle, preferably 1-
pyrrolidinyl, 1 -piperidinyl, 1-hexamethyleneiminyl, 1 -morpholinyl or -
N(Ar 4 )-R 23 , where R 23 is alkyl; alkenyl; alkanoyl which is optionally
substituted, preferably with halo, hydroxy or alkoxy, preferably lower
5
X 4 is a direct bond, -(CH 2 ) n -, -CH = CH-, -CH = CHCH 2 -,
-(CH 2 ) p O(CH 2 ) q -, -<CH 2 ) p S(0> r (CH 2 ) q -, -|CH 2 ) p NR 21 {CH 2 ) q - or
n is an integer from 0 to 3, preferably 1 to 3, and more
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-48-
alkanoyl; alkenoyl having 3 to 10 carbons and 1 to 3 double bonds;
optionally substituted aroyl, preferably benzoyl; heteroaroyl, preferably
pyridoyl, furoyl and thienoyl; alkoxycarbonyl, preferably lower
alkoxycarbonyl; alkenyloxycarbonyl having 3 to 1 0 carbons and 1 to 3
5 double bonds; aryloxycarbonyl, preferably phenoxycarbonyl; formyl
(-CHO); cyano; aminocarbonyl (-CONH 2 ); alkylaminocarbonyl;
dialkylaminocarbonyl, arylaminocarbonyl, diarylaminocarbonyl or
arylalkylaminocarbonyl; or
O
10 II
N — C — Ar
I
R 8
R 8 is hydrogen or alkyl that is a straight or branched chain,
15 preferably containing from 1 to 6, more preferably 1 to 3, carbon atoms;
Ar 3 is an aryl ring system, preferably a 6- to 10-membered aryl ring
system, or a heteroaryl ring system, preferably a 5- to 10-membered
heteroaryl ring system, containing 1 or more heteroatoms, preferably 1 to
3 heteroatoms, such as oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atoms, in the aryl and
20 heteroaryl ring systems are each unsubtituted or substituted with one or
more, preferably up to three, substitutents, preferably aryl group
substituents halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl, and Ar 3 is preferably
phenyl or pyridyl unsubstituted or substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl
or lower alkyl;
25 Ar* is either:
(i) heterocycle containing 1 ring or 2 or more fused rings, preferably
1 ring or 2 to 3 fused rings, where each ring contains 1 or more,
preferably 1 to 3 heteroatoms, and preferably contains 4 to 10 members,
more preferably 5 to 7 members, and is optionally substituted with one or
30 more, preferably up to three, aryl group substituents, preferably halo, halo
lower alkyl or lower alkyl, and Ar 4 is preferably selected from heterocycles
that include, but are not limited to, indolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl,
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-49-
isoquinolinyl, quinolinyl, benzimidazoly, thienyl, furanyl, pyridinyl, thiazolyl
and imidazolyl, each of which is optionally substituted, preferably with
halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl, preferably halo, and the heterocycle
is more preferably selected from thienyl, furanyl, pyridinyl, thiazolyl and
5 imidazolyl; or
(ii) a radical of formula:
10
in which:
R 10 , R 11 and R 12 are each independently selected from hydrogen,
alkyloxy, alkoxyalkyl, halo, hydroxy, cyano, nitro, amino, alkylamino,
15 di(alkyl)amino, aminocarbonyl, arylcarbonylamino, alkylcarbonylamino,
alkylcarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, aminosulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl,
alkylthio, mercapto, C 36 alkynyloxy, arylalkyloxy, aryloxy and alkyl, in
which alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl or aryl group defined by R 10 , R 11 and R 12 is
unsubstituted or substituted with one or more, preferably 1 to 4
20 substituents selected from halo, halo alkyl, preferably halo lower alkyl, or
alkyl, preferably lower alkyl,, and the alkyl groups are straight or branched
chains that are preferably lower alkyl (C 16 ) and more preferably C,. 3 or
(iii) 1- or 2-naphthyl, dihydronaphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indenyl
or dihydroindenyl, each of which is optionally substituted with one or
25 more aryl group substituents;
R is halo, haloalkyl, preferably lower halo alkyl, or alkenyl having 3
to 12 carbons, preferably lower alkenyl or hydroxy and is preferably at
the 3-position [relative to the N], more preferably a 3-halo or 3-lower
alkyl, or R is OR 9 that is preferably at the 3-position so that the piperidinyl
30 ring has the formula:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-50-
R
5
N
/
\
R 9 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, arylalkyl, alkylcarbonyl,
aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, in which the alkyl groups
10 are straight or branched chains and preferably contain 1 to 12, more
preferably 1 to 6 carbons, more preferably 1-3 carbons in the chain;
R 4 is selected from among:
(i) an aryl ring system, preferably a 6- to 10-membered aryl ring
system, or a heteroaryl ring system, preferably a 5- to 10-membered
15 heteroaryl ring system, containing 1 or more heteroatoms, preferably 1 to
3 heteroatoms, such as oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atoms, in which the
aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are each optionally substituted with one
or more, preferably up to three aryl group substttuents, and R* is
preferably phenyl or pyridyl which is optionally substituted with lower
20 alkyl, halo or halo tower alkyl, with phenyl being even more preferred, or
that is unsubstituted or substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or lower
alkyl, and is preferably a pyrrolidinyl, oxadiazolyl or triazolyl radical, more
preferably oxadiazolyl, most preferably 1 ,3,4-oxadiazolyl, particularly a 5-
25 substituted 1 ,3,4-oxadiazolyl in which the substituent is halo, halo lower
alkyl, hydroxy, lower alkoxy or lower alkyl, or
(iii) alkyl containing 1 to 8 carbons which is optionally substituted
with hydroxy or alkylcarbonyloxy (-OCOR), preferably 1 to 6 carbons,
more preferably 1 to 3 carbons; alkenyl containing 3 to 6 carbons;
30 cycloalkylalkyl in which the cycloalkyl contains 3 to 8 carbons and the
alkyl contains 1 to 3 carbons; cycloalkenylalkyl in which the cycloalkenyl
contains 3 to 8 carbons and the alkyl contains 1 to 3 carbons; or
<ii) a heterocyclic ring containing one to three heteroatoms.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
where
X 1 is as previously defined;
X s is O or S;
5 R 5 and R 6 are either:
(a) independently selected from hydrogen, alkylthat is
a straight or branched chain containing 1 to 12, preferably 1 to 6
carbons, more preferably 1-3 carbons, alkenyl or alkynyl that is straight or
branched chain, containing 2 to 12, preferably containing 3-6 carbons
10 and one or two double or triple bonds, or aryl, preferably a 6- to 10-
membered aryl ring systemthat is optionally substituted with one or more,
preferably up to three, aryl group substituents, or arylalkyl, and each is
preferably 2-propenyl, ethyl, methyl or aryl, preferably phenyl or
phenylmethyl, or
15 <°) R5 and R 6 are each independently selected from
carbon chains, heteroatoms, and carbon chains containing one or more
heteroatoms, so that together with the nitrogen atom to which each is
attached, they form a 3- to 10-, preferably 4-7, more preferably 5 to 6-
membered heterocyclic ring containing one to three heteroatoms, that is
20 preferably a piperidinyl, alkylpiperidinyl, morpholinyl, oxadiazolyl, triazolyl
or pyrrolidinyl radical that is unsubstituted or substituted with halo, halo
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-52-
lower alkyl, hydroxy or lower alkoxy or lower alkyl, and is more preferably
a 1 ,3,4-oxadiazolyl, 4-morpholinyl, or di^-Cg alkyD-morpholinyl,
preferably 2,6-di(C,-C 6 alkyl)-4-morpholinyl, radical;
(v) cyano, formyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyl or
5 arylcarbonyl;
(vi) -NR 5 COR 5 ; or
(vii) -S(0) r alkyl or -S(0) r aryl, where r is 1 or 2; and
R 7 is selected from among:
-H;
10 OH;
— R 14 OR 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, preferably
containing 1 to 4 carbons, or alkanoyl containing 2 to 5, preferably 2 or
3, carbon atoms, and R 1 * is lower alkylene, preferably alkylene of 1 to 4
carbon atoms, more preferably methylene or ethylene, or R 14 is alkenylene
15 of 2 to 6 carbon atoms;
— CH 2 NR 15 R 16 in which R 15 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkanoyl,
aryl or aroyl, and R 16 is hydrogen or lower alkyl or, together with the
nitrogen atom to which they are attached, R 15 and R 16 form a 3 to 7-
membered ring which optionally contains an additional heteroatom
20 selected from oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur;
— OR 15 ;
-C(0)H;
-CN;
-C( = 0)NR 5 R 6 in which R 5 and R 6 are as previously defined;
25 alkyl, preferably lower alkyl;
aryl, preferably phenyl;
— C(0)OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen, alkyl containing from 1 to 7
carbon atoms, alkenyl having 3 to 7 carbon atoms, an optionally
substituted aryl ring system (preferably a 6 to 10-membered aryl ring
30 system), an optionally substituted heteroaryl ring system (preferably a 5
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-53-
to 1 0-membered heteroaryl ring system) containing 1 or more
heteroatoms, preferably 1 to 3 heteroatoms, such as oxygen, sulfur or
nitrogen atoms, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, preferably benzyl, phenethyl,
phenylpropyl or phenylbutyl, heteroarylalkyl, preferably furylmethyl,
5 thienylethyl or pyridylpropyl, particularly pyridyl, phenyl, tolyl,
ethylphenyl, butylphenyl or halophenyl, or a pharmaceutical^ acceptable
cation, such as an alkali metal or alkaline earth metal, including sodium,
potassium, calcium and ammonium cations;
where the optional aryl group substituents are selected from halo,
10 alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl,
alkenyl containing 1 to 2 double bonds, alkynyl containing 1 to 2 triple
bonds, haloalkyl and polyhaloalkyl, especially trifluoromethyl, formyl,
alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, heteroarylcarbonyl, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl,
aryloxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, alkylaminocarbonyl, dialkylamino-
15 carbonyl, arylaminocarbonyl, diarylaminocarbonyl, arylalkylaminocarbonyl,
alkoxy, aryloxy, perfluoroalkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, arylalkoxy,
aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, arylaminoalkyl, amino,
alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, alkylarylamino, alkylcarbonylamino,
arylcarbonylamino, azido, nitro, mercapto, alkylthio, arylthio,
20 perfluoroalkylthio, thiocyano, isothiocyano, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsufonyl,
arylsuffinyl, arylsulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, alkylaminosulfonyl,
dialkylaminosulfonyl and arylaminosulfonyl.
In certain embodiments herein, when Ar 3 is 1 -(3-propionyl-2-
imidazolinon)yl, then R 4 is other than -CN. Also in certain embodiments
25 herein, when R 4 is -C( =X 5 )-NR 5 R 6 , X 5 is O and R 5 and R 6 , together with
the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form pyrrolidinyl, then M is
other than 4-morpholinyl. In yet other certain embodiments, when M is -
NR 5 R 6 and R 5 and R 6 are methyl, then R 4 is other than 1 -hydroxypropyl
(CH 3 CH 2 CH(OH)-) or ethylcarbonyl (CH 3 CH 2 C( =0)-). In still other certain
30 embodiments, when M is 4-morpholinyl or 1 -piperidinyl, then R 4 is other
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-54-
than ethylcarbonyl (CH 3 CH 2 C( = O)-). In certain other embodiments, when
M is 4-morpholinyl, than R 4 is other than ethoxycarbonyl
(CH 3 CH 2 OC( = 0)-).
Also intended for use herein are salts of the compounds of formula
5 (I), including salts with pharmaceutical^ acceptable acids and quaternary
ammonium salts, N-oxides of the compounds of formula (I) and salts
thereof, including salts with pharmaceutically acceptable acids and
quaternary ammonium salts, including stereoisomeric forms of quaternary
ammonium salts, prodrugs of the compounds of formula (I), and
10 metabolites of the compounds of formula (I), including, for example,
glucuronides.
Among the suitable quaternary ammonium salts of the compounds
of formula (I), are for example, compounds of the following formulae:
15 in which:
R 1 is alkyl of 1 to 1 2 carbons which is optionally substituted with 1
to 6 halo atoms, 1 to 3 hydroxy groups or 1 to 3 alkoxy groups; alkenyl
of 3 to 12 carbons which contains 1 to 3 double bonds and is optionally
substituted with 1 to 6 halo atoms; alkynyl of 3 to 12 carbons which
20 contains 1 to 3 triple bonds and is optionally substituted with 1 to 6 halo
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-55-
atoms; arylalkyl where the alkyl chain contains 1 to 6 carbons and the
aryl group contains 6 to 1 0 carbons, preferably phenyl, and is optionally
substituted with 1 to 3 aryl group substituents; arylalkenyl where the
alkenyl chain contains 3 to 6 carbons and 1 to 3 double bonds and the
5 aryl group contains 6 to 10 carbons, preferably phenyl, and is optionally
substituted with 1 to 3 aryl group substituents; arylalkynyl where the
alkynyl chain contains 3 to 6 carbons and 1 to 3 triple bonds and the aryl
group contains 6 to 10 carbons, preferably phenyl, and is optionally
substituted with 1 to 3 aryl group substituents; cycloalkyl of 3 to 8
10 carbons; cycloalkenyl of 3 to 8 carbons; cycloalkylalkyl in which the
cycloalkyl group contains 3 to 8 carbons and the alkyl chain contains 1 to
6 carbons; cycloalkenylalkyl in which the cycloalkenyl group contains 3 to
8 carbons and the alkyl chain contains 1 to 6 carbons;
A is halo, hydroxy, alkoxy of 1 to 12 carbons, alkanoyloxy of 1 to
15 12 carbons or aroyloxy, preferably benzoyloxy, or any other
pharmaceutically acceptable group that is capable of forming a counterion
in a quaternary ammonium salt; and
m, X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , R, R 2 , R 3 , R\ R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , Ar 1 and Ar 2 are as
previously defined.
20 Preferred among the compounds of formula (I) are those of formula
{ID or N-oxides thereof and other pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives:
2 — N X II
25
Ar'
Ar
where:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from an aryl ring
30 system, preferably a 6- to 10-membered aryl ring system, and a
heteroaryl ring system, preferably a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl ring
system, containing 1 or more heteroatoms, preferably 1 to 3
heteroatoms, such as oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atoms, where the aryl
WO 97/09973
PCT7US96/14727
-56-
and heteroaryi ring systems are each optionally substituted with one or
more, preferably one to three, aryl group substituents, and is preferably
phenyl or pyridyl optionally substituted with halo, halo alkyl, preferably
halo lower alkyl, particularly trifluoromethyl, hydroxy, alkyl, alkyloxy,
5 aminosulfonyl, alkylcarbonyl, nitro, amino, aminocarbonyl, phenylcarbonyl
that is optionally substituted with 1 or more, preferably 1 to 3,
substituents selected from halo, halo lower alkyl and alkyl, or thienyl
which is optionally substituted with 1 or more, preferably 1 to 3,
substituents selected from halo, haloalkyl or alkyl, in which the alkyl
10 groups are substituted with halo, haloalkyl or alkyl, in which the alkyl
groups are straight or branched chains that contain 1 to 12 carbons,
preferably are lower alkyl, more preferably containing 1 to 3 carbons;
R 3 is Ar 3 or
O
Ar 3 is an aryl ring system, preferably a 6- to 10-membered aryl ring
20 system, or a heteroaryi ring system, preferably a 5- to 10-membered
heteroaryi ring system, containing 1 or more, preferably 1 to 3,
heteroatoms, such as oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atoms, where the aryl
and heteroaryi ring systems are each optionally substituted with one or
more, preferably up to 3, aryl group substituents, and is preferably phenyl
25 or pyridyl optionally substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl;
Ar 4 is thienyl, furanyl, pyridinyl, thiazolyl, imidazolyl, each of which
is unsubstituted or substituted with 1 or more, preferably 1 to 3, aryl
group substituents, preferably halo or halo, lower alkyl, or Ar 4 is a radical
of formula:
30
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-57-
in which R 10 , R 1 ' and R 12 are each independently selected from
hydrogen, alkyl, alkyloxy, halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, cyano, nitro, amino,
alkylamino, di(alkyl)amino, aminocarbonyl, arylcarbonylamino, alkylcar-
bonylamino, alkylcarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, aminosulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl,
10 alkylsulfonyl, alkylthio, mercapto, C 3 . 6 alkenyloxy, C 3 . 6 alkynyloxy,
arylalkyloxy, aryloxy and alkyl, in which each group is unsubstituted or
substituted with up to 4 substituents selected from halo atoms, lower
alkyl or halo lower alkyl, and the alkyl groups are straight or branched
chains that are preferably lower alkyl, and more preferablyl C,. 3 ;
15 R2 's alkylene in which the alkylene group is a straight or branched
chain containing 1 to 12 carbon atoms, preferably lower alkylene, more
preferably containing 1 to 3 carbon atoms and most preferably is
— (CH 2 } 2 — or — CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) — or alkynylene containing 1 to 1 2 carbon
atoms, preferably lower alkynylene, more preferably containing 1 to 3
20 carbon atoms;
R is hydrogen, alkyl, preferably lower alkyl, halo or haloalkyl, and is
preferably at the 3-position [relative to the N] is more preferably a 3-lower
alkyl, or R is OR 9 that is preferably in the 3-position;
R 9 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, arylalkyl, alkylcarbonyl,
25 aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, in which the alkyl groups
are straight or branched chains, preferably containing 1 to 6 carbon
atoms, more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms in the chain;
R 4 is phenyl, pyridyl, cyano or
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-58-
X 5 R5
where
X 5 is O or S;
R 5 and R 6 are either:
5 (i) independently selected from hydrogen, aryl, alkyl,
that is a straight or branched chain containing 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 3
carbons, alkenyl that is straight or branched chain, preferably containing 2
to 6 carbons and 1 or 2 double bonds, more preferably containing 1 to 4
carbons and 1 double bond, and is more preferably 2-propenyl, aryl,
10 preferably phenyl or arylalkyl, preferably phenylmethyl, or
<ii) R 5 and R 6 , together with the nitrogen atom to
which each is attached form a 3- to 10-, preferably 4- or 7-, more
preferably 5 or 6-, membered heterocyclic ring containining one to three
heteroatoms, that is preferably selected from pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl,
15 alkylpiperidinyl, morpholinyl, oxadiazolyl or triazolyl radical, each of which
is unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents selected
from halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl, and is more preferably 1,3,4-
oxadiazolyl, particuarly a 5-substituted 1 ,3,4-oxadiazolyl in which the
substituent is halo, halo lower alkyl, hydroxy, lower alkoxy or lower alkyl,
20 a 4-morpholinyl or di(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)-morpholinyl, preferably 2,6-di(C,-C 5
alkyl)-4-morpholinyl;
R 7 is -H, -OH, -C(0)OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen, alkyl, preferably
lower alkyl, more preferably methyl, ethyl or propyl, or aryl, preferably
phenyl, -C(0)H- or — R 14 OR 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen or lower alkyl,
25 preferably containing 1-4 carbons, or is an alkanoyl containing 2 to 5,
preferably 2 or 3 carbon atoms, and R 14 is lower alkylene, preferably
methylene or ethylene, or R 14 is alkenylene; and
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/I4727
-59-
R 8 is hydrogen or alkyl that is a straight or branched chain
containing from 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 3, carbon atoms.
In more preferred embodiments all alkyl groups contain from 1 to 3
carbon atoms; R is hydrogen or methyl, R 4 is -CN or
20
25
in which:
X 5 is as previously defined
R 5 and R 6 are each independently hydrogen, straight or branched
10 chain alkyl, alkenyl, preferably methyl, ethyl or propyl, or phenyl, or R 5
and R 6 together with the nitrogen to which each is attached form
pyrrolidine piperidinyl or morpholinylthat is preferably unsubstituted, and
more preferably where R 7 is OH or -C(0>OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen or
methyl, ethyl or propyl which is branched or straight chain, and R 3 is Ar 3 ,
15 preferably phenyl, more preferably halo-substituted phenyl.
Among preferred compounds of formula (I) are those of formula (III)
or N-oxides thereof and other pharmaceutical^ acceptable derivatives:
30
" /-K OH
Ar" i— R 2 — N V III
Ar 2 ^ ^ Ar 3 '
in which:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from an aryl ring
system, preferably a 6- to 10-membered aryl ring system, and a
heteroaryl ring system, preferably a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl ring
system, containing 1 or more heteroatoms, preferably 1 to 3
heteroatoms, and Ar 1 and Ar 2 are preferably independently phenyl or
pyridyl, where the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are each unsubstituted
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-60-
or substituted with up to three aryl group substituents, preferably
selected from halo, haloalkyl or alkyl in which the alkyl groups are straight
or branched chains and preferably are lower alkyl containing from 1-6
carbons, more preferably 1-3 carbons;
5 R 2 is alkylene, alkenylene containing one double bond, where the
carbon chain in the alkylene or alkenylene group is a straight or branched
chain, in which the alkylene group, preferably contains from 1 to 6, more
preferably 1 to 3, carbons, alkynylene containing one triple bond, where
the carbon chain in the alkylene, alkenylene or alkynylene group is a
10 straight or branched chain, in which the alkylene group, preferably
contains from 1 to 6, more preferably 1 to 3, carbons;
R is hydrogen, alkyl, preferably lower alkyl, halo or halo lower alkyl,
and the alkyl group preferably contains 2 to 6 carbons, more preferably 2
to 3 carbons; and most preferably is a 3-lower alkyl or hydrogen;
15 R 4 is:
/
u — N ;
R 6
where:
X 5 is as previously defined
R 5 and R 6 are either:
20 (i) independently selected from hydrogen or alkyl, alkenyl, or
alkynyl which may be a straight or branched chain, and each is preferably
lower alkyl, more preferably methyl or ethyl, or
(ii) R 5 and R 6 , together with the nitrogen atom to which each
is attached, form a 3 to 7, preferably 5 or 6, membered carbon ring or
25 heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms, that is preferably a
pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, alkylpiperidinyl, morpholinyl, preferably 4-
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-61-
morpholinyl, or 61(0,-06 alkyD-morpholinyl, preferably 2,6-di(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)-
4-morpholinyl, radical; and
Ar 3 is an aryl ring system, preferably a 6- to 1 0-membered aryl ring
system or a heteroaryl ring system, preferably a 5- to 10-membered
5 heteroaryl ring system, containing 1 or more, preferably 1 to 3
heteroatoms, such as oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur atoms, more preferably
phenyl or pyridyl, where the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are each
unsubstituted or substituted with up to three aryl group substituents,
preferably selected from halo, halo lower alkyl and lower alkyl.
0 Of the compounds of formula (II), the compounds of formula (IV)
are particularly preferred:
R 5
in which Ar 3 is phenylthat is unsubstituted or preferably substituted with
halo or halo lower alkyl, preferably 4-halo. More preferred are those
compounds in which R 2 is — (CH 2 ) 2 — .
In other embodiments, the compounds of formula (I) are those
having formula (V) [see, e.g. . U.S. Patent No. 4,990,521] or N-oxides
thereof and other pharmaceutical^ acceptable derivatives:
OR*
in which:
35 Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from an aryl ring
system, preferably a 6- to 10-membered aryl ring system, and a
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-62-
heteroaryl ring system, preferably a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl ring
system, containing 1 or more, preferably 1 to 3, heteroatoms, such as
oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atoms, where the aryl and heteroaryl ring
systems are each optionally substituted with 1 or more, preferably 1 to 3
5 aryl group substituents, and is preferably phenyl or pyridyl optionally
substituted with halo, halo alkyl, preferably halo lower alkyl, particularly
trifluoromethyl, hydroxy, alkyl, alkyloxy, aminosulfonyl, alkylcarbonyl,
nitro, amino, aminocarbonyl, phenylcarbonyl which is optionally
substituted with 1 or more, preferably 1 to three, substituents selected
10 from halo, halo lower alkyl and alkyl, or thienyl which is optionally
substituted with 1 or more, preferably 1 to 3, substituents selected from
halo, haloalkyl or alkyl, in which the alkyl groups are straight or branched
chain and preferably are lower alkyl containing from 1-6 carbons, more
preferably 1-3 carbons;
15 Ar 4 is a heteroaryl ring system, preferably a 5- to 10-membered
heteroaryl ring system, containing 1 or more, preferably 1 to 3,
heteroatoms, such as oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur atoms, preferably
thienyl, furanyl, pyridinyl, thiazolyl or imidazolyl, each of which is
unsubstituted or substituted with 1 or more, preferably 1 to 3, aryl group
20 substituents, preferably halo or halo lower alkyl, or Ar 4 is a radical of
formula:
in which R 10 , R 11 and R 12 are each independently selected from
hydrogen, alkyl, alkyoxy, halide, hydroxy, cyano, nitro, amino, alkyl-
30 amino, di(alkyl)amino, aminocarbonyl, arylcarbonylamino, alkylcarbonyl-
amino, alkylcarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, aminosulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, alkyl-
sulfonyl, alkylthio, mercapto, C 3 . 6 alkenyloxy, C 3 . 6 alkynyloxy, arylalkyloxy,
aryloxy, alkyl, in which each group is unsubstituted or substituted with up
25
R
12
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-63-
to 4 aryl group subsitutents, preferably halo atoms, and the alkyl groups
are straight or branched chains that are preferably lower alkyl (C 16 ) and
more preferably C 13 ;
R 2 is alkylene, where the alkylene group is a straight or branched
5 chain, preferably is lower alkylene containing from 1 to 6, preferably 1-3
carbons and more preferably is — (CH 2 ) 2 — or -CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) -;
R 9 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, arylalkyl, alkylcarbonyl,
aminoalkyl, alkyiaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, in which the alkyl groups
are straight or branched chains and preferably contain 1-6 carbons, more
10 preferably 1-3 carbons in the chain:
R 4 is:
where:
X 5 is as previously defined;
20 R 5 and R 6 are either:
(i) independently selected from hydrogen, aryl,
alkylthat is a straight or branched chain containing preferably 1-6
carbons, more preferably 1-3 carbons, alkenylthat is straight or branched
chain, preferably containing 2-6 carbons and 1 double bond, and is more
25 preferably 2-propenyl, aryl, preferably phenyl or arylalkyl, preferably
phenylmethyl; or
(ii) R 5 and R 6 , together with the nitrogen atom to
which each is attached, form a 4- to 7-, preferably 5- or 6-, membered
heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from O, S
30 and N, preferably O or N, that is preferably a pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl,
alkylpiperidinyl, morpholinyl, preferably 4-morpholinyl or difCVCe alkyl)-
morpholinyl, more preferably 2,6-di(C r C 6 alkyl)-4-morpholinyl, radical;
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-64-
R 8 is hydrogen or alkyl that is a straight or branched chain,
preferably containing from 1 to 6, more preferably 1 to 3, carbons or
alkylcarbonyl, preferably lower alkylcarbonyl, such as — C( = 0)CH 2 CH 3 — .
Preferred among these compounds are those in which the substi-
5 tuents in the 3- and 4-positions on the piperidine ring have the trans
configuration. More preferred are those in which Ar 4 is phenyl; R 10 is aryl,
loweralkyloxy, C 3 . 6 alkenyloxy, C 36 alkynyloxy, or C 15 alkyl substituted
with 1 to 4 halo atoms, and R 11 and R 12 are each independently selected
from hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkyoxy, halo, halo alkyl, hydroxy,
10 cyano, nitro, amino, mono and di(alkyl)amino, aminocarbonyl, aryl-
carbonylamino, alkylcarbonylamino, alkylcarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy,
aminosulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl, alkylthio and mercapto in which
each group is unsubstituted or substituted with up to 4 halo atoms, and
the alkyl groups are straight or branched chains that are preferably lower
15 alkyl (C-,_ 6 ) and more preferably C A . 3 ; R 5 and R 6 are independently selected
from hydrogen, C 1 . 4 alkyl, phenylmethyl and 2-propenyl.
In more preferred compounds R 10 is trifluoromethyl substituted on
the meta positions, and R 11 and R 12 are each independently hydrogen,
methyl, methoxy, halo, hydroxy, nitro, amino, trifluoromethyl,
20 phenylmethoxy, phenyloxy, and propenyloxy. Preferred compounds
include trans - 3-hvdroxv-N,N,K-trimethvl-g,a-diphenyl-4-[[3-(trifluoro-
methyD-benzoyl] amino]- 1 -piperidinebutanamide.
In other embodiments, the compounds of formula (I) are those
having formula (VI) [see, e.g. . U.S. Patent No. 4,194,0451 or N-oxides
25 thereof and other pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-65-
where:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from an aryl ring
5 system, preferably a 6- to 10-membered aryl ring system, and a
heteroaryl ring system, preferably a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl ring
system, containing 1 or more, preferably 1 to 3, heteroatoms, such as
oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur atoms, where the aryl and heteroaryl ring
systems are each optionally substituted with 1 or more, preferably 1 to 3,
10 aryl group substituents, and are preferably phenyl, alkyl substituted
phenyl, halo-substituted phenyl, or pyridyl, in which the alkyl groups are
straight or branched chains and preferably are lower alkyl containing from
1 to 6 carbons, more preferably 1 to 3 carbons;
R 2 is alkylene, in which the alkylene group is a straight or branched
15 chain, preferably lower alkylene containing from 1 to 6, more preferably 1
to 3 carbons, or is alkenylene containing 2-4 carbons, preferably
propenylene or ethenylene, and more preferably — (CH 2 ) 2 — or
— CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) — , and most preferably — (CH 2 ) 2 — ;
R 7 is -R ,4 OR 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen or lower alkyl, preferably
20 containing 1-4 carbons, or is an alkanoyl containing 2 to 5 carbons,
preferably 2 or 3, carbon atoms, and R 14 is lower alkylene or lower
alkenyl, preferably methylene or ethylene; and
R 19 is hydrogen or lower alkyl, preferably containing 1-4 carbons;
and
25 R2 ° 's hydrogen, halo, haloalkyl, preferably trifluoromethyl, or lower
alkyl, preferably containing 1-4 carbons.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
10
25
-66-
Preferred among the compounds of formula (VI) are compounds in
which R 13 is hydrogen or lower alkyl or alkanoyl having 2-5 carbon atoms;
R 14 is methylene or ethylene; R 19 is hydrogen or methyl; R 20 is hydrogen,
halogen or methyl; R 2 is — (CH 2 ) 2 — ; and Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl. Such
preferred compounds include, for example, 5-[1 , 1-diphenyl-3-(4-phenyl-4-
methanolpiperidino)propyl]-2-methyl-1 ,3,4-oxadiazole. More preferrred
among the compounds of formula VI, are compounds having the formula:
15
In other embodiments, the compounds of formula (I) are those
having formula (VII) [see. e.g. , U.S. Patent No. 3,996,214] or N-oxides
20 thereof and other pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives:
30
where:
R 19 is lower alkyl, preferably containing from 1-3 carbon atoms; the
configuration of the double bond is trans ; and
^ — is a tertiary amine selected from azabicycloalkyls containing
35 from 6 to 9 carbon atoms with at least 5 atoms in each ring,
where each ring is preferably pyrrolidine, piperidino or hexamethylenim-
ino, and where the tertiary amine is preferably 7-azabicyclo[2.2.1]hept-7-
yl, 2-azabicyclo[2.2.2]oct-2-yl, 2-azabicyclo[3.2. 1 ]oct-2-yl, 3-azabicy-
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-67-
15
20
clo[3.2.1]oct-3-yl, 6-azabicyclo[3.2. 1 ]oct-6-yl, 3-azabicyclo[3.2.2]non-3-
yl, 8-azabicyclo[4.3.0]-non-8-yl, 2-azabicyclo[3.2.2]non-2-yl, 2-azabicy-
clo[3.3.1]non-2-yf, 3-azabicyclo[3.3.1 )non-3-yl, 2-azabicyclo[4.3.0]non-2-
yl, 7-azabicyclo[4.3.0]non-7-yl, 8-azabicyclo[4.3. 1 ]dec-8-yl, 2-azabicy-
clo[4.4.0]-dec-2-yl, and 7-azabicyclo[4.2.2]dec-7-yl, and is more
preferably:
R? , where R 3 and R 7 are as previously defined.
Preferred compounds include, for example, 5-[1 ,1-diphenyl-4-(2-
azabicyclo[2.2.2]oct-2-yl)but-2-trans-en-l-y!]-2-methyl-1,3,4-oxadiazole.
10 ln other embodiments, the compounds of formula (I) are those
having formula (VIII) [see, e^, U.S. Patent No. 4,012,393) or N-oxides
thereof and other pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives:
(CHA
VIII
where:
R 19 is lower alkyl, preferably containing from 1-3 carbon atoms,
25 preferably methyl, n is an integer from 1 to 3, preferably 2 or 3; and
— N ^ — } is a tertiary amine selected from azabicycloalkyls containing
from 6 to 9 carbon atoms with at least 5 atoms in each ring, where each
ring is preferably pyrrolidine piperidino or hexamethylenimino, and where
the tertiary amine is preferably 7-azabicyclo[2.2. 1 ]hept-7-yl, 2-azabicy-
30 clo[2.2.2]oct-2-yl, 2-azabicyclo[3.2. 1 ]oct-2-yl, 3-azabicyclo[3.2. 1 ]oct-3-
yl, 6-azabicyclo[3.2.1]oct-6-yl, 3-azabicyclo[3.2.2]non-3-yl, 8-azabicy-
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
68-
clo[4.3.0]-non-8-yl, 2-azabicyclo[3.2.2]non-2-yl, 2-azabicyclo[3.3. 1 ]non-
2-yl, 3-azabicyclo[3.3.1]non-3-yl, 2-azabicyclo[4.3.0]non-2-yl / 7-azabicy-
clo[4.3.0]non-7-yl, 8-azabicyclo|4.3. 1 ]dec-8-yl, 2 azabicyclo[4.4.0]-dec-
2-yl, and 7-azabicycio[4.2.2]dec-7-yl, and is more preferably:
Preferred compounds include, for example, 2-{5-[2-{2-
azabicyclo[2.2.2]oct-2-yl)ethyil-10.1 1-dihydro-5H-dibenzo[a,d]cyclo-
hepten-5-yl}-5-methyl-l ,3,4-oxadiazole; and 2-{1 2-[2-{2-azabicyclo-
[2.2.2]oct-2-yl)ethyl}-5,6,7,12-tet-rahydrodibenzo[a,d]cycloocten-12-yl}-
10 5-methyl-1 ,3,4-oxadiazole.
In other embodiments, the compounds of formula (I) are those
having formula (IX) [see, e.g. . U.S. Patent No. 4,013,668] or N-oxides
thereof and other pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives:
15 in which R 19 is lower alkyl; R 18 is hydrogen or lower alkanoyl containing 2
to 7, preferably 2 or 3, carbon atoms, or preferably R 18 is hydrogen or
acetyl, and is attached at the 5 or 6 position in either the endo or exo
configuration.
5
N
, where R 3 and R 7 are as previously defined.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-69-
Preferred among the compounds of formula (IX) are: 5-[1,1-di-
phenyl-3-(exo-5-hydroxy-2-azabicyclo[2.2.2]oct-2-yl)-propyl]2-methyl-
1 ,3,4-oxadiazole; 5-[ 1 , 1 -diphenyl-3-(exo-5-acetoxy-2-azabicy-
clo[2.2.2]oct-2-yl)-propyl]-2-methyl-1 ,3,4-oxadiazole; 5-[1 , 1-diphenyl-3-
5 (endo-5-acetoxy-2-azabicyclo[2.2.2]oct-2-yi)-propyl]-2-methyl-1,3,4-oxa-
diazole; 5-[1 , 1 -diphenyl-3-(endo-5-hydroxy-2-azabicyclo[2.2.2]oct-2-yl)-
propyl]-2-methyl-1 ,3,4-oxadiazole; 5-[1 ,1-diphenyl-3-(endo-6-acetoxy-2-
azabicyclo[2.2.2]oct-2-yl)-propyl]-2-methyl-1,3,4-oxadiazole; 5-[1,1-di-
phenyl-3-(endo-6-hydroxy-2-azabicyclo[2.2.2]oct-2-yl)-propyl]-2-methyl-
10 1 ,3,4-oxadiazole; 5-[1 ,1-diphenyl-3-(exo-6-acetoxy-2-azabicy-
clo[2.2.2]oct-2-yl)-propyl]-2-methyl-1,3,4-oxadiazole; and 5-[1,1-diphenyl-
3-(exo-6-hydroxy-2-azabicyclo[2.2.2]oct-2-yl>-propyl]-2-methyl-1,3,4-oxa-
diazole.
In other embodiments, the compounds of formula (I) are those
15 having formula (X) [see, e.g. . U.S. Patent No. 4,069,223] or N-oxides
thereof and other pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives:
in which:
Ar 1 , Ar 2 , and Ar 3 are each independently selected from an aryl ring
system, preferably a 6 to 10-membered aryl ring system, more preferably
25 phenyl, optionally substituted with 1 or more, preferably 1 to 3, more
preferably 1 or 2, aryl group substituents, preferably halo, lower alkyl or
halo lower alkyl;
R 2 is alkylene, in which the alkylene group is a straight or branched
chain, preferably is lower alkylene containing from 1 to 6, preferably 1-3
30 carbons, or is alkenylene containing 2-4 carbons, preferably 2 or 3
carbons, and is more preferably is — (CH 2 ) 2 — or — CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) — , and
most preferably — (CH 2 ) 2 — ;
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-70-
R 4 is an aryl ring system, preferably a 6 to 1 0-membered aryl ring
system, or a heteroaryl ring system, preferably a 5 to 10-membered
heteroaryl ring system, containing 1 or more, preferably 1 to 3,
heteroatoms, such as oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur atoms, preferably
5 phenyl or pyridyl, optionally substituted with 1 or more, preferably 1 to 3,
aryl group substituents, preferably halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl;
and
R 7 is C(0)OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen or lower alkyl, -R 14 OR 13 or
CH 2 NR 15 R 16 in which R 15 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or lower alkanoyl and
10 R 16 is hydrogen or lower alkyl. In more preferred embodiments of the
compounds of formula (X), Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each phenyl and R 4 is
phenyl or pyridyl.
Included among the preferred compounds of these compounds of
formula (X) are, for example, 4-amino-methyl-4-phenyl-1-(3,3,3-triphenyl-
15 propyDpiperidine and N-{[4-phenyl-1 -(3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)piperidine-4-
yl[methyl]acetamide.
In other embodiments, the compounds are those of formula (X)
[see, e.g. , U.S. Patent No. 4,066,654] in which Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each
independently selected from among phenylthat is unsubstituted or
20 substituted with up to three aryl group substituents, preferably at one or
two positions with halo, lower alkyl or halo lower alkyl, preferably
containing 1 to 4 carbons; R 2 is alkyl, where the alkylene group is a
straight or branched chain, preferably is lower alkylene containing from 1
to 6, preferably 1-3 carbons, or is alkenylene, preferably a branched
25 chain, containing 2-4 carbons, preferably alkenylene containing 3 or 4
carbons, and more preferably is — (CH 2 ) 2 — or — CH 2 CH{CH 3 ) — , and most
preferably — (CH 2 ) 2 — ; R 4 is phenyl or pyridyl, each of which is
unsubstituted or is substituted with 1 or more, preferably 1 to 3, aryl
group substituents, such as halo or lower alkyl, preferably containing 1
30 to 4 carbons; R 7 is C(0)OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen, alkyl containing
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/I4727
-71-
from 1 to 7 carbons or alkenyl having 3 to 7 carbon atoms, aryl or
heteroaryl, particularly pyridyl, phenyl, tolyl, ethylphenyl, butylphenyl,
halophenyl, alkenyi containing 3 to 7 carbons and having formula
— C nH (2 n-i), where n is an integer from 3 to 7, or is an alkali metal or
5 alkaline earth metal salt, such as sodium, potassium, calcium, and
ammonium. In preferred embodiments, Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl and R 4 is
phenyl or 2-, 3- or 4-pyridyl.
Among the preferred of these compounds of formula (X) are, for
example, 1 -(3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxylic acid
10 and the hydrochloride salt thereof; ethyl 1 -{3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-
phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxylate; potassium 1 -(3,3,3-triphenylpropyl}-4-
phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxylate; sodium 1 (3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-phenyl-
4-piperidinecarboxylate; 1-[3,3-diphenyl-3-(2-pyridyl)propyl]4-phenyl-4-
piperidine carboxylic acid hydrochloride; sodium 1-[3,3-diphenyl-3-(2-
15 pyridyl)propyl]-4-phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxylate; ethyl 1-[3,3-diphenyl-3-
(2-pyridyl)propyl]-4-phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxylate; potassium 1 [3,3-
diphenyl-3-(2-pyridyl)propyl]-4-phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxylate.
In other embodiments, the compounds are those of formula (X)
[see, e^, U.S. Patent No. 4,072,686] in which Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each
20 independently selected from among phenylthat is unsubstituted or
substituted with up to three aryl group substituents, which are preferably
halo, lower alkyl or halo lower alkyl, preferably containing 1 to 4 carbons;
R 2 is alkylene, where the alkylene group is a straight or branched chain,
preferably is lower alkylene containing from 1 to 6, preferably 1-3
25 carbons, or is alkenylene containing 2-4 carbons, preferably alkenylene
containing 3 or 4 carbons, and is more preferably — (CH 2 ) 2 — or
-CH 2 CH(CH 3 )-, and most preferably — (CH 2 ) 2 -; R 4 is phenyl or pyridyl,
each of which is unsubstituted or is substituted with up to three aryl
group substituents, preferably halo or lower alkyl, where the alkyl
30 preferably contains 1 to 4 carbons; R 7 is — R 14 OR 13 in which R 13 is
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-72-
hydrogen or lower alkyl, preferably containing 1-4 carbons, or is an
alkanoyl containing 2 to 5, preferably 2 or 3, carbon atoms, and R 14 is
lower alkylene containing 1 to 4 carbons, and is preferably methylene or
ethylene, or is lower alkenylene containing 2 to 4 carbons, having formula
5 — C n H 2n1 — where n is an integer from 1 to 4, containing preferably 3 or 4
carbons. In preferred embodiments, Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl and R 4 is
phenyl or 2-, 3- or 4-pyridyl.
Among the preferred of these compounds of formula (X) are, for
example, 1-(3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-phenyl-4-piperidinemethanol; 1-[3,3-
10 diphenyl-3-(2-pyridyl)propyl]-4-phenyl-4-piperidinemethanol; 1 -(3, 3,3-tri-
phenylpropyl)-4-phenyl-4-acetoxymethyl-piperidine; 1 -(3,3,3-triphenyl-
propyl)-4-phenyl-4-methoxymethyl-piperidine; 1 (3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-
(4-chlorophenyl)-4-piperidinemethanol; 1-[3-p-chlorophenyl-3,3-diphenyl-
propyl]-4-(phenyl)-4-piperidinemethanol; 1 -[3-</o-tolyl)-3,3-diphenylpropyl]-
15 4-(phenyl)-4-piperidinemethanol; 1-[3-(/o-bromophenyl)-3,3-diphenyl-
propyl]-4-(phenyl)-4-piperidinemethanol; 1-[3,3-diphenyl-3-(4-pyridyl>-
propyl]-4-phenyl-4-piperidinemethanol; 1 -[3,3-diphenyl-3-(3-
pyridyl)propyl]-4-phenyl-4-piperidinemethanol; 1 -(3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-
phenyl-4-hexoxymethyl-piperidine; 1 -(3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-(p-tolyl)-4-
20 piperidinemethanol; 1 -(3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-(p-trifluoromethylphenyl)-
4-piperidinemethanol; 1-{4,4,4-triphenylbutyl)-4-(phenyl)-4-piperidine-
methanol; 1 -(3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-phenyl-4-methoxyethylpiperidine; 1 -
[3,3-diphenyl-3-(2-pyridyl)propyl]-4-phenyl-4-methoxyethylpiperidine; 1-
(3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-phenyl-4-piperidinemethanol; 1-[3,3-diphenyl-3-
25 (2-pyridyl)propyl]-4-phenyl-4-piperidinemethanol; and acid salts thereof.
In other embodiments, the compounds of formula (I) are those
having formula (XI) [see, e.g. . U.S. Patent No. 4,1 16,963] or N-oxides
thereof and other pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof:
30
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-73-
5
where:
Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each independently selected from an aryl ring
system, preferably a 6- to 1 0-membered aryl ring system, most preferably
phenylthat is unsubstituted or substituted with 1 or more, preferably 1 to
10 3, aryl group substituents, preferably selected from halo, halo lower alkyl
or lower alkyl, preferably containing 1 to 4 carbons; R 2 is alkylene, where
the alkylene group is a straight or branched chain, preferably is lower
alkylene containing from 1 to 6, preferably 1-3 carbons, or is alkenylene
containing 2-4 carbons, preferably alkenylene containing 2 to 4,
15 preferably 3 or 4 carbons, and more preferably is — (CH 2 ) 2 - or
— CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) — , and most preferably is — (CH 2 ) 2 — ; R 4 is an aryl ring
system, preferably a 6- to 10-membered aryl ring system, most preferably
phenyl, or a heteroaryl ring system, preferably a 5- to 10-membered
heteroaryl ring system, containing 1 or more, preferably 1 to 3,
20 heteroatoms, such as oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur atoms, most preferably
pyridylphenylthat is unsubstituted or is substituted with 1 or more,
preferably 1 to 3, aryl group group substituents, preferably selected from
halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl, preferably containing 1 to 4 carbons;
R is hydrogen, alkyl, containing 1 to 1 2 carbons, preferably lower alkyl,
25 or alkanoyl containing 2 to 1 2 carbons, preferably lower alkanoyl; and Y
is alkylene having 1 to 3 carbons, and is preferably — CH 2 — .
Among the preferred compounds of formula (XI) are, for example,
1-{3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)4-hydroxy-4-benzylpiperidine and 1 (3,3,3-tri-
phenylpropyl)-4-hydroxy-4-benzylpiperidine; hydrochloride; 1 -(3,3,3-tri-
30 phenylpropyl)-4-hydroxy-4-p-chiorobenzylpiperidine; 1 -(3,3,3-triphenyl-
propyl)-4-hydroxy-4-p-methylbenzylpiperidine; and 1 -[3,3-diphenyl-3-(2-
pyridyl)propyl]-4-benzyl-4-hydroxypiperidine.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-74-
ln other embodiments, the compounds are amidinoureas [see, U.S.
Patent No. 4,326,075, U.S. Patent No. 4,203,920, U.S. Patent No.
4,115,564, U.S. Patent No. 4,060,635 and U.S. Patent No. 4,025,652]
or are 2-[(aminophenyl and amidophenyl)amino]-1-azacycloalkanes [see,
5 U.S. Patent No. 4,533,739] that have formula XII or pharmaceutical^
acceptable derivatives, including the non-toxic acid addition salts thereof:
R 3 R*
Xll(a) Xll(b) Xll(c)
20
In the compounds of formula (XII), W is Xll<a), Xll(b) or Xll(c).
(i) When, W is Xll(a) or Xll(c), then R 2 , P. 3 , R\ R 5 and R 6 , which are
the same or different, are each independently selected from: hydrogen,
25 halo, lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl, nitro, lower alkoxy, hydroxy, aryl lower
alkoxy, acyloxy, cyano, halo lower alkoxy or lower alkyl sulfonyl; R is
hydrogen or lower alkyl; R' and R" are hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl or
aralkyl, or R' and R" together form a 5-7 atom ring that includes 0 to 2
hetero atoms selected from N, 0 or S; and R n is hydrogen or lower alkyl,
30 provided that at least one of R, R' and R" is other than hydrogen, and the
non-toxic acid addition salts thereof.
When W is Xll(a) or Xll(c) preferred compounds are those in which:
R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 are hydrogen, halo, lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl,
nitro, hydroxy or lower alkoxy; and R and R n are hydrogen or lower alkyl
35 and R' and R" are hydrogen or alkyl; provided R, R' and R" are not all
hydrogen at the same time.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-75-
More preferred compounds, when W is Xll(a) include those where:
R 2 is hydrogen or lower alkyl; R 3 and R 5 are hydrogen, hydroxy or lower
alkoxy; R 4 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, hydroxy, lower alkoxy or halo, R 6 is
hydrogen, lower alkyl, nitro, alkoxy or halo; R and R n are hydrogen or
5 lower alkyl; and R' and R" are hydrogen or alkyl; provided R, R' and R"
are not all hydrogen at the same time.
More preferred compounds, when W is Xll(c}, include those where:
R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 are hydrogen, chloro, bromo, fluoro, methyl, ethyl,
trifluoromethyl, nitro, methoxy or hydroxy; R and R n are hydrogen or
10 lower alkyl; and R' and R" are hydrogen or alkyl; provided R, R' and R"
are not all hydrogen at the same time.
The most preferred compounds, when W is Xll(a), are those where:
R 2 is hydrogen, methyl or ethyl; R 3 is hydrogen, hydroxy or methoxy; R 4 is
hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, hydroxy, methoxy, chloro or bromo; R 5 is
15 hydrogen, hydroxy or methoxy; R 6 is hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, nitro,
methoxy, ethoxy, chloro, bromo or fluoro; R and R n are hydrogen, methyl
or ethyl; and R' and R" are hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, i-propyl,
butyl, i-butyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl or heptyl; provided R, R'
and R" are not all hydrogen at the same time. The most preferred
20 compounds, when W is Xll(c), include those where: R 2 and R 6 are lower
alkyl or lower alkoxy; and R 3 , R 4 and R 5 are halo, halo lower alkyl, lower
alkoxy or hydroxy.
Other preferred compounds, when W is Xll(a) include those in
which the compounds have a R 2 , R 6 -di-iower alkyl substitution; R 2 -lower
25 alkyl substitution; R 2 , R 6 -lower alkyl, alkoxy substitution; R 2 , R 6 -lower
alkyl, halo substitution; R 2 , R 6 -alkyl, nitro substitution; R 2 , R 4 , R 6 -tri-lower
alkyl substitution, or R 2 , R 4 , R 6 -lower alkyl, di-halo substitution.
Other preferred compounds have an R 3 , R 4 -hydroxy or alkoxy substitution;
a R 3 , R 4 , R 5 -hydroxy or alkoxy substitution; R 2 , R 5 -di-halo substitution or
30 R 2 , R 6 -di-halo substitution.
WO 97/09973
PCT7US96/14727
-76-
Other preferred compounds, when W is Xll(a) include those that in
which R, R' and R" are hydrogen or lower alkyl substitution, provided that
all are not hydrogen at the same time; or R and R' are hydrogen or lower
alkyl and R" is an alkyl group from 3 to 7 carbon atoms.
5 Other preferred compounds, when W is Xll(c), include those in
which the compounds have R 3 , R 4 -dihalo substitution; R 3 , R 4 and/or R 3 , R 4
and R 5 alkoxy or hydroxy substitution; R 2 , R 6 -dilower alkyl substitution; or
R 2 , R 6 -lower alkyl, alkoxy substitution. Other preferred compounds have
an R, R' and R" hydrogen or lower alkyl substitution, provided all are not
10 hydrogen at the same time; or R and R' are hydrogen or lower alkyl and
R" is alkyl containing from 3 to 7 carbon atoms.
When W is Xll(a), preferred compounds include, but are not limited
to: 1 -amidino-3-(2-methyl-6-chlorophenyl)urea; 1 -amidino-3-{2-chloro-4-
methylphenyDurea; 1 -amidino-3-(2-methyl-6-bromophenyl)urea; 1 -amidino-
1 5 3-(2-chloro-5-bromophenyl)urea; 1 -amidino-3-(2,5-dichlorophenyl)-urea;
1 -amidino-3-(2-methyl-6-ethylphenyl)urea; 1 -amidino-3-(2-ethyl-6-
trifluoromethylphenyljurea; 1 -amidino-3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)urea; 1-
amidino-3-<3,4,5-trimethoxyphenyl)urea; 1 -amidino-3-(3,4,5-tribenzyloxy-
phenyDurea; 1 -amidino-3-(2,4-dimethyl-6-nitrophenyl)urea; 1 -amidino-3-
20 (2-ethylphenyl)urea; 1 -amidtno-3-(2,4-dimethyl-6-methoxyphenyl)urea;
and 1 -amidino-3-(2-methyl-4-methoxy-6-chlorophenyl)urea.
When W is Xll(c), preferred compounds include, but are not limited
to: /77-chlorophenylamidinourea; p-chlorophenylamidinourea; 3,4-dichloro-
phenylamidinourea; /n-bromophenylamidinourea; p-bromophenylamidino-
25 urea; 3,4-dibromo-phenylamidinourea; 3-chloro-4-bromophenylamidino-
urea; 3-bromo-4-chlorophenylamidinourea; 3-chloro-4-fluorophenylamidi-
nourea; 3-bromo-4-fluorophenylamidinourea; 3-fluoro-4-chlorophenylamidi-
nourea; 2,6-dimethylphenylamidinourea; 2,6-diethylphenylamidinourea; 2-
methyl-6-ethylphenylamidinourea; 2-methyl-6-methoxyphenylamidinourea;
30 2-methyl-6-ethoxyphenylamidinourea; 2-ethyl-6-methoxyphenylamidino-
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-77-
urea; 2-ethyl-6-ethoxyphenylamidinourea; 3,4-dimethoxyphenylamidino-
urea; 3,4-dihydroxyphenylamidinourea; 3,4, 5-trimethoxyphenylamidino-
urea; and 3,4,5-trihydroxyphenylamidinourea.
(ii) In the compounds of formula (XII) or the pharmacologically
5 acceptable salts thereof, when W is Xll(b), when n is 1 to 3, preferably 1;
R 2 , R 6 and R 3 , which are independently selected and are the same
or different, are selected from among: (a) hydrogen; (b) alkyl or 1 to 6
carbon atoms, inclusive; or (c) halogen; with the proviso that R 2 and R 6
are not hydrogen at the same time; and one of R 4 and R 5 is hydrogen,
10 alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, inclusive, or halogen and the other is of the
formula: — NR 8 R 7 in which R 8 and R 7 , which are the same or different, are
selected from among: (a) hydrogen; (b) alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms,
inclusive; (c) alkoxycarbonyl of 2 to 7 carbon atoms, inclusive; (d)
aryloxycarbonyl of 6 to 12 carbon atoms inclusive; (e) alkylcarbonyl of 2
15 to 7 carbon atoms inclusive; (f) arylcarbonyl of 6 to 12 carbon atoms,
inclusive; (g) hydroxyalkoxycarbonyl of 3 to 7 carbon atoms, inclusive; (h)
R 8 and R 7 are taken together to form (1) -(CH 2 ) p -; where p is 4 or 5; (2)
-(CH 2 ) m CO — , where m is 3 or 4; (i) haloalkylcarbonyl of 2 to 7 carbon
atoms, inclusive; where n is an integer of from 1 to 3, inclusive.
20 Preferred among the compounds of formula (XII) in which W is
Xll(b) are: 2-[(2-methyl-3-aminophenyl)amino]-1-pyrroline, dihydro-
chloride; 2-[(2-methyl-3-acetamidophenyl)amino]-1 -pyrroline, hydro-
chloride; and 2-I(2-methyl-3-(ethoxycarbonylamino)phenyl-)amino]-1 -
pyrroline, hydrochloride.
25 Also among the compounds of formula (I) of interest herein are the
2-substituted-1-azabicyclo[2,2,2]octanes [see, U.S. Patent No.
4,125,531] of formula XIII:
30
XIII
WO 97/09973
PCTYUS96/14727
-78-
where:
R 2 is lower alkylene, preferably containing 1 to 3 carbons;
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from an aryl ring
system, preferably a 6- to 10-membered aryl ring system, and a
5 heteroaryl ring system, preferably a 5- to 1 0-membered heteroaryl ring
system, containing 1 or more, preferably 1 to 3, heteroatoms, such as
oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atoms, where the aryl and heteroaryl ring
systems are each optionally substituted with 1 or more, preferably 1 to 3
aryl group substituents, and each is preferably phenyl or pyridyl optionally
10 substituted with halo, halo alkyl, preferably halo lower alkyl, particularly
trifluoromethyl, hydroxy, alkyl, alkyloxy, aminosulfonyl, alkylcarbonyl,
nitro, amino, aminocarbonyl, phenylcarbonyl that is optionally substituted
with 1 or more, preferably 1 to 3, substituents selected from halo, halo
lower alkyl and alkyl, or thienyl that is optionally substituted with 1 or
15 more, preferably 1 to 3, substituents selected from halo, haloalkyl and
alkyl, in which the alkyl groups are straight or branched chains and
preferably are lower alkyl containing from 1-6 carbons, more preferably 1-
3; and
R 4 is selected from alkyl containing from 1 to 8 carbons, preferably
20 1 to 6, more preferably 1 to 3 carbons, or is alkenyl containing 3 to 6
carbon atoms, or is cycloalkyl containing from 3 to 6 carbons, or is
cycloalkyl alkyl in which the cycloalkyl contains 3 to 6 carbons and the
alkyl contains 1 to 3 carbons, or is a cycloalkenyl containing 4 to 7
carbons. Preferred among compounds of formula XIII are 2-(2,2-di-
25 phenylpentyl)-1-azabicylo[2.2.2]octane, 2-(2,2-diphenylhexyl)-1 -azabicylo-
[2.2.2]octane, 2-(2,2-diphenylpropyl)-1 -azabicylo[2.2.2]octane, 2-{2,2-di-
phenyloctyl)-1 -azabicylo[2.2.2]octane and 2-(2,2-diphenylheptyl)-1 -aza-
bicylo[2.2.2]octane.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/I4727
-79-
Other compounds of interest for use in the methods of preventing
or treating hyperalgesia provided herein include certain phenylacetamide
derivatives [see, U.S. Patent No. 5,242,944], including, but not limited to
N-{(3,4-dimethylphenyl)propyl}-4-(2-aminoethoxy)-3-methoxy-
5 phenylacetamide, N-{(3,4-dimethylphenyl)propyl}-4-(2-aminoethoxy)-3-
hydroxy-phenylacetamide, N-{(3,4-dimethylphenyl)propyl}-4-(2-amino-
ethoxy)-3-aminophenylacetamide, N-{(3-methylphenyl)propyl}-4-(2-
aminoethoxy)-3-methoxy-phenylacetamide, N-{(3-methylphenyl)propyl}-4-
{2-aminoethoxy)-3-hydroxy-phenylacetamide and N-{(3-dimethylphenyl)-
10 propyl}-4-(2-aminoethoxy)-3-aminophenylacetamide and other such
compounds.
Also of interest are 3-hydroxy-7-oxomorphinans and 3-hydroxy-7-
oxoisomorphinans [see, U.S. Patent No. 4,277,605] including, but not
limited to: 3-hydroxy-7-oxomorphinan and 3-hydroxy-7-oxoisomorphinans
15 including d,l-3-hydroxy-7-oxo-N-methylmorphinan, l-3-hydroxy-7-oxo-N-
methylmorphinan, d,l-3-hydroxy-7-oxomorphinan, l-3-hydroxy-7-
oxomorphinan, d,l-3-hydroxy-7-oxo-N-methylisomorphinan, l-3-hydroxy-7-
oxo-N-methylisomorphinan, d,l-3-hydroxy-7-oxoisomorphinan l-3-hydroxy-
7-oxoisomorphinan and quaternary ammonium salts thereof, and other
20 such compounds.
Among other opioid compounds for use herein are enkephalin
analogs, such as metkephamid H-L-Tyr-D-Ala-Gly-L-Phe-N(Me)Met-NH 2 ;
see, e^, U.S. Patent No. 4,430,327; Burkhart et aL (1982) Peptides
3:869-871 ;Frederickson et aL (1991) Science 211:603-605], [D-Thr 2 ,A 3 -
25 Pro 5 ]-enkephalinamide, and other such analogs that have been designed
not to pass through the blood-brain barrier or to exhibit minimal CNS
effects relative to anti-diarrheal activity, such as synthetic opioid
peptides, including H-Tyr-D-Nva-Phe-Orn-NH 2 , H-Tyr-D-Nle-Phe-Orn-NH 2 ,
H-Tyr-D-Arg-Phe-A 2 bu-NH 2 , H-Tyr-D-Arg-Phe-Lys-NH 2 , and H-Lys-Tyr-D-
30 Arg-Phe-Lys-NH 2 [see, U.S. Patent No. 5,312,899; see, also Gesellchen
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-80-
et al. (1981) Pept.: Svnth.. Struct., Funct.. Proc. Am. Pept. Svmp., 7th .:
Rich et aL (Eds), Pierce Chem. Co., Rockford, III, pp. 621-62] that do not
cross the blood brain barrier.
Of all of the above compounds, those of formulae (I) are presently
5 preferred. Those of formulae (ll)-(IV) are more preferred and of those the
following compounds or N-oxides or pharmaceutically active acid addition
salts thereof are particularly preferred: 1 -[4-(4-hydroxy-4-phenyl-1 -
piperidino)-2,2-diphenylbutyryl]piperidine; 4-{4-I4-hydroxy-4-(3-trifluoro-
methylphenyl)- 1 -piperidino]-2,2-diphenylbutyryl}morpholine; 1 -{4-[4-hy-
10 droxy-4-(3-trifluoromethylphenyl)-1-piperidino]-2,2-diphenylbutyl}piperi-
dine; 4-(p-chlorophenyl)-4-hydroxy-N-N-,K-trimethyl-a,a-diphenyl-1 -piperi-
dine-1 -butyramide; 4-(p-chlorophenyl)-4-hydroxy-N-N-dimethyl-or,a-di-
phenyl-1 -piperidine-1 -butyramide (loperamide); 4-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-
N,N-diethyl-4-hydroxy-a,a-diphenyl-1 -piperidine-1 -butyramide; 4-(3,4-
15 dichlorophenyl)-4-hydroxy-N,N-dimethyl-o,a-dipheny 1-1 -piperidine-1 -butyr-
amide; 4-(4-chloro-3-trifluoromethylphenyl)-4-hydroxy-N,N-dimethyl-<7,CT-
diphenyl-1 -piperidine-1 -butyramide; 4-(p-fluorophenyl)-4-hydroxy-N-N,K-
trimethyl-ar,a-diphenyl-1 -piperidine-1 -butyramide; 4-(p-bromophenyl)-4-
hydroxy-N-N-dimethyl-o,o-diphenyl-1 -piperidine-1 -butyramide; 1-{4-{4-
20 (3,4-dichlorophenyl)-4-hydroxypiperidino]-2,2-diphenylbutyryl}pyrrolidine;
and 4-(p-chlorophenyl)-N-ethyl-4-hydroxy-N-methyl-a,a-diphenyl- 1 -piperi-
dine-1 -butyramide.
Diphenoxylate may be used in the methods and compositions
herein. More preferably, difenoxin [1-(3-cyano-3,3-diphenylpropyl)-4-
25 phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxylic acid] is used.
Of the compounds provided herein, loperamide, [4-(p-chlorophenyl)-
4-hydroxy-N-N-dimethyl-cr,ar-diphenyl-1-piperidinebutyramide] and the
salts, hydrates, N-oxides, and metabolites (preferably glucuronides)
thereof, particularly the hydrochloride salts, are presently most preferred.
30 The structure of loperamide is as follows:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
10
15
20
-81
CH,
\\ /
CH,
OH
-CH,-CH — N
Also preferred are the N-oxides of loperamide [see, e.g. . U.S.
Patent No. 4,824,853] having the formula:
CH,
O /
w /
CH,
OH
-CH 2 -CH 2 - N
/v
CI
25 or other derivatives thereof.
Loperamide and its derivatives and analogs and the compounds
described above [including those of formulae l-XIII, the other disclosed
compounds and any compound that has the requisite hyperalgesic activity
and lack of CNS activity as defined herein] will serve as topical or local
30 peripheral anti-hyperalgesics that, by virtue of their inability or substantial
inability to cross the blood-brain barrier, are safe and without abuse
potential. This finding with respect to loperamide [see, e.g. . Jaffe et al.
(1980) Clin. Pharmacol. Ther. 80:81 ?-fil Pi has been verified by its use
over-the-counter for over 10 years as an anti-diarrheal medication.
Other particularly preferred compounds include loperamide
analogs, particularly compounds of formula (II) above, that have similar
activity to loperamide [see, e.g. . U.S. Patent No. 3,714,159 and U.S.
Patent No. 3,884,916, which set forth data regarding CNS activity (as
35
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-82-
measured in the tail withdrawal assay) and B/A ratios for the compounds]
or better activity [higher B/A ratio than loperamide].
B. Identification of compounds for use as peripheral anti-
hyperalgesics
5 In general the Randall-Selitto methods, described below, and the
Exemplified methods are preferred for assessing peripheral anti-
hyperalgesic activities of tested compounds. Most preferred among the
methods for assessing anti-hyperalgesic activity are those described in
Niemegeers et aL (1974) Drug Res. 24 :1633-1636.
10 1 . Assessment of ratio [C] of the ED 50 value [A] in a test
for anti-diarrheal activity, such as the Castor Oil Test,
to the ED 50 value [B] in a test of CNS effects, such as
the Tail Withdrawal Test
The agents intended for use in the methods and compositions can
15 be identified by their activity as anti-diarrheals, and their lack of CNS
effects. In particular, the selected compound exhibits anti-hyperalgesic
activity in any of the standard models, discussed or exemplified below,
and, preferably, either (a) the ratio of these activities [B/A], as measured
in standard assays, is substantially greater or equal to [at least equal to,
20 more preferably at least about 2-fold greater] than the ratio of such
activities for diphenoxylate; or (b) the activity of the compound in an
assay that measures CNS activity is substantially less [at least two-fold,
preferably 3-fold or more] than diphenoxylate.
2. Assessment of anti-hyperalgesic activity
25 The agents for use herein may be identified using standard assays
that assess the anti-hyperalgesic properties. The anti-hyperalgesic
properties of a particular agent may be evaluated using the clinically
relevant models of hyperalgesia, particularly animal models of tissue
inflammation [see, e.g. , Ferreira et aL (1979) Prostaglandins 73 :191-
30 200; Abbott et aL (1988) Eur. J. Pharmacol. 152 :92-100; Levine et aL
(1 989) Neuroscience 32:571-575; Stein et aL (1 989) J. Pharmacol. Exp.
Ther. 248 : 1 269-1 275; Porreca et aL ( 1 984) J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther.
97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-83-
230:341-348; Stein et aL ( 1 993) Anesth. Analo. 76:187-1911 For
example, the intraplantar injection of agents, such as prostaglandins into
hindpaws of rats produces a localized inflammatory response which
exhibits symptoms of hyperalgesia. In this model the latency of response
by the animal to superimposed stimuli, such as pressure exerted on
inflamed tissue is measured. Alternatively, the amount of pressure
required to evoke a behavior response is measured.
In other models, the intraperitoneal administration of irritants, such
as acetic acid, prostaglandins, carrageenan, killed mycobacteria, formalin
or bradykinin, produces an inflammatory reaction in which hyperalgesia is
evidenced by writhing; behavioral alterations, such as the number of
abdominal constrictions Iwrithing], following application of the irritant are
measured.
Any suitable in vitro or m vivo test (for purposes herein in vivo
tests are preferred) known to those of skill in this art may be used to
assess systemic opioid activity. The rat hot plate assay and the rat tail
withdrawal assay are typical of such assays.
(a) Inflamed knee joint hyperalgesia model and
blood pressure response to compression of the
inflamed knee joint
Inflammation in a joint is often associated with hyperalgesia [pain
during normal flexion and extension and during the application of gentle
innocuous pressure] and/or persistent pain [resting pain; Schaible et aL
(1993) Pain 55:5-54]. During the course of knee-joint inflammation, a
cascade of events has been shown to occur, which includes:
(i) synthesis and release of inflammatory mediators in the joint, (ii) release
of neuropeptides from afferent fibers in the joint cavity, and (iii) increased
primary afferent outflow from group II, III, IV sensory fibers [Schaible et
aL (1993) Pain 55:5-54. An important result of this cascade is that there
is an augmentation in the response of small, lightly myelinated and
unmyelinated afferent to low intensity stimuli. In this manner, the
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-84-
peripheral nerve innervating inflamed tissue can evoke an exaggerated
behavioral response to otherwise innocuous stimuli, Le^, a state of
hyperalgesia. Thus, inflammation of the knee joint will result in increased
spontaneous afferent activity, the appearance of an exaggerated
5 discharge with joint flexion and extension [Schaible et aL (1 985) J^.
Neurophvsiol. 54:1 109-1 122] and signs of a pain-associated autonomic
reaction [Sata et aL (1984) Neurosci. Lett. 52 :55-601.
Injection of a mixture of kaolin and carrageenan into the knee joint
induces an experimental arthritis. As exemplified below, this treatment
10 was characterized by a reliable increase in joint volume and
circumference. In the unanesthetized rat, these joint changes were
accompanied by a tendency to avoid weight bearing, indicating the
presence of hyperalgesia. According to electrophysiological studies, in
the course of the development of this acute arthritis, C and A<5 units
15 normally responding only to extreme joint distortion become activated by
slight movement [Schaible et aL (1985) J. Neurophvsiol. 54:1 109-1 122].
Spinal neurons with knee joint receptive fields in the deep dorsal horn of
the spinal cord show clear development of hyperexcitability with the
acute inflammation in the joint [Neugebauer et aL (1 993) J. Neurosci.
20 70:1365-1377]. This sensitization of group III and IV fibers was
observed within 2-3 hours after injection of kaolin and carrageenan into
the knee joint, a time course that closely matches the time course of the
development of hyperalgesia in the rat knee joint compression model.
These observations indicate that spinal cord neurons and joint
25 primary afferent fibers became sensitized and may underlie hyperalgesia
observed in this arthritic state. Such afferent input may drive autonomic
responses that are typically associated with the processing of input from
afferents typically activated by stimuli generated by the local
inflammatory state. In addition to the above-mentioned inflamed knee
30 joint mechanism, the blood pressure [BP] changes might also be evoked
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-85-
reflexively by afferent neural activity from receptors located in the skeletal
muscle [Williamson et aL (1994) J. Phvsiol. 475 :351-3571. This response
is dependent on the changes in intramuscular pressure and the quantity of
muscle mass compressed. This particular mechanical reflex, however,
5 appears to operate independently of the pain response and appears to
play a minor role in the exemplified experiments, as inflation of the cuff
on the left normal knee joint had no effect upon BP. In any case, it is
possible that overflow of the carrageenan from the joint capsule may
serve to render surrounding tissue inflamed as well. Sensitization of
10 C and AS units was observed in the rat gastrocnemius muscle by
infiltration with carrageenan [Handwerker et aL (1991) Pain and
inflammation. Proc eeding of the Vlth World Congress on Pain . Bond et aL
eds, Elsevier Science Publishers BV, pp. 59-70]. Based on these
considerations, it appears that compression of the inflamed knee joint
15 yields a noxious stimulus and this in turn activates a sympathetic
response resulting in an increase in BP.
As described in the Examples below, local inflammation of the knee
results in a state where otherwise innocuous stimuli results in a prominent
autonomic response, including increased blood pressure [BP] and heart
20 rate [see, e.g. . Sata et aL(1 984) Neurosci. Lett. 52:55-60].
Alternatively, neural outflow from the inflamed knee is recorded [see,
e.g. . Neugebauer et aL (1993) J. Neurosci. 70:1365-13771
An jn vitro test that measures spontaneous discharge in injured skin
by topical application may also be used, [see, e.g. . Andreev et aL (1994)
25 Neurosci. 58:793-798].
(b) Guinea Pig Ileum Assay (in vitro)
Compounds are tested for opioid activity in the isolated guinea pig
ileum [see, e.g. . Kosterlitz et aL (1968) Br. J. Pharmacol. 33:266-276
with modifications set forth in James et aL (1987) Pharmacol Exp. Ther.
30 240:138-144; see, e^, U.S. Patent No. 5,387,688]. The terminal ileum
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/ 1 4727
— 86 —
is removed from male Hartley guinea pigs after sacrifice by cervical
dislocation. The isolated ileum is washed and placed in Krebs-Henseleit
buffer [(millimolar): NaCI, 118.1; KCI, 4.15; CaCI 2 , 2.5; MgS0 4 1.2;
KH 2 P0 4 , 1.23; NaHC0 3 , 25.5 and glucose, 11.1] oxygenated with a 95%
5 oxygen and 5% carbon dioxide mixture and maintained at 37° C. The
washed ileum is cut into segments (about 2.0-2.5 cm) and mounted on
platinum ring electrodes. The ileal segments are then placed in 10 ml
temperature-controlled tissue baths containing oxygenated
Krebs-Henseleit buffer.
10 The ileal segments are stimulated at 0.1 Hertz, 0.5 milliseconds
duration at a supramaximal voltage to induce contractions. Opioid
activity in the test compounds is manifested as inhibition of electrically
evoked contractions. A non-cumulative concentration-effect curve for
each test compound is performed to assess the ability of the compound
15 to inhibit contraction in the guinea pig ileum.
After the concentration-effect curve is completed, naloxone is
added to the tissue baths to determine if the compound-induced inhibition
of contraction is reversed. Antagonism of the inhibition by naloxone
confirms that the inhibitory effects of the compounds are mediated
20 through opioid receptors. Assay results are expressed as IC 50 values [the
concentration producing fifty percent of the maximal response].
(c) Randall-Selitto Test
Numerous variations and exemplifications of this assay are known
to those of skill in this art [see, Randall et aJL (1 957) Arch. Int.
25 Pharmacodvn. 111 :409-419; see, also, e.g. . U.S. Patent No. 5,434,292,
U.S. Patent No. 5,369,131, U.S. Patent No. 5,345,943, U.S. Patent No.
5,242,944, U.S. Patent No. 5,109,135, see Examples, below).
The pain threshold is measured in this method as the amount of
pressure in mm Hg required to induce a flight reaction (struggle) when
30 applied to the foot of an experimental animal exhibiting hyperalgesia.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-87-
typically an inflamed paw, compared to a control, such as the same or
equivalent animal in the absence of the inflammation, and/or in the
absence of a test compound. Air pressure from an air line is admitted
through a needle valve to a syringe into a pressure gauge which is
5 connected by a T-tube. The syringe is mounted with a plunger
downward, to which is connected a short bullet-shaped wooden peg.
The pressure is applied through the wooden tip to the plantar surface of
the rat's foot at a specified rate of mm Hg per second. The end point is
said to have been reached when the rat starts struggling.
10 Typically, rats, such as albino rats (120-170 g) of the Charles River
Sprague-Dawley strain, or other laboratory strain are used. Hyperalgesia
[inflammation] is produced by the injection of 0.1 ml of a 20%
suspension of Brewer's yeast into the plantar surface of the rat's hind
foot. Thresholds can be determined using a modified apparatus described
15 in Winter and Flataker [(1965) J. Pharm. Exp. Ther. 148:3731, The pain
threshold is measured as the pressure in mm Hg required to induce the
desired response fa sharp audible squeak and/or struggle] when pressure
is applied to the foot. Air pressure from an air line [or other source, such
as a vice] is admitted through a needle valve to a 20 ml glass syringe and
20 to a pressure gauge. Pressure is applied to the foot of the rat at a
selected rate. The agent compound to be tested is administered typically
2 hours after the yeast injection and threshold response is determined.
These results are compared with the results obtained from controls,
typically a yeast-treated, saline control group. Analgesic activity was
25 determined in terms of the percentage of
inhibition of response:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-88-
Inhibition (%) = Threshold of the tre ated group-Thresho ld of the contro l group x 10Q
Threshold of the control group
(d) Tail-pinch or tail clip test in rats with
hyperalgesia induced by Freund's adjuvant
Desiccated Mycobacterium butvricum [such as that obtainable from
Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Ml] is ground in a mortar, suspended in liquid
5 paraffin, sterilized in an autoclave, and injected (0.5 mg in 0.1 ml, s.c.) in
the distal region of the tail of a rat, such as a Sprague-Dawley rat
weighing 1 20 g to 170. Within a few hours of injection, animals that are
so-treated exhibit hypersensitivity [hyperalgesia] to pressure placed on the
tail and can be used, typically in 18 to 24 hours after injection as models
10 to test the effectiveness of compounds in alleviating the hyperalgesia
[see, e.g. . U.S. Patent No. 5,242,944]. The hypersensitivity of the tail
can be examined by applying gentle pressure (using one's fingers) to the
injected area. This gentle squeeze or " tail pinch" elicited a "squeak"
from the animal. Five such stimuli are typically given at 4-second
15 intervals. If the animal emits no more than one squeak in five trials, it is
recorded as not having hyperalgesia and given a rating of 0. If more than
one squeak is emitted, the animal is recorded as having hyperalgesia and
is assigned a rating of 1 . This test is administered before and after
administration of a test compound to ascertain whether the compound
20 has any activity in relieving the hyperalgesia. This activity can be
quantitated dividing the total rating by the number of animals tested [and
if a percentage is desired, multiplying by 100] and comparing this number
before and about two hours after administration of the test compound.
(e) Thermal Methods - Tail withdrawal assay
25 Typically thermal models are used to assess analgesia. They,
however, can be used to assess hyperalgesia, if inflamed tissues are
used. In addition, if the test is administered repeatedly resulting in
inflammation, the measured response includes a hyperalgesic component.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-89-
The simplest form of these methods is the hot plate technique
originally described by Woolfe and McDonalds [see, Woolfe et aL (1944)
J. Pharmacol. Exptl. Therap 80:300]. Originally, this method used a zinc
plate with a lamp placed underneath. In a later modification it uses an
5 electric lamp as the source of heat and a copper plate for the conduction
of heat [Eddy et aL (1 953) J. Pharmacol Exptl. Thftra p 107:3851. The
first sign of discomfort is usually expressed as an attempt to sit up and
lick the forepaws by the experimental animal. This is taken to be an
indication of a threshold under the predetermined conditions. Dancing and
10 jumping about by an undrugged animal is taken as an indication of
unbearable pain; whereas drugged animals more commonly withdraw the
hind paws and keep them close to their abdomen.
In the wire technique, heat is applied from a wire coiled inside an
asbestos plate. The animal's tail is placed in a channel made in the plate
15 [Davis et aL (1 946) J. Pharmacol. 1:255]. Yet another thermal method
uses light from a headlamp focused on the tip of the tail of an animal
[D'Amour etaL (1941) J. Pharmacol. Exptl. Theran. 73-7A1 This method
measures the time between the application of the heat and the flick of the
tail and has therefore been called the "tail flick" method. Another
20 thermal method uses a light bulb focused on the loin of an animal which
is protected by a plexiglass shield having a port and a shutter positioned
between a lens and the animal. When the shutter is opened the timer
starts and when the animal reacts the shutter is closed and the timer
stopped [Ercoli et aL (1945) J. Pharmacol. Exptl. Thpra p aa-ani] This
25 method applies an incident light the strength of which can be varied by
means of a rheostat.
The preferred tail withdrawal method for use herein is the rat tail
withdrawal reflex model [modified from D'Amour et aL (1941) Pharmacol.
Exp. Ther. 72:74-79; see, e^Gamse (1 982) Naunvn-Schmiedebem 's
30 Arch. Pharmacol. 320:205-216; U.S. Patent No. 5,387,688; U.S. Patent
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-90-
No. 3,714,159; and U.S. Patent No. 5,112,596]. Male Sprague-Dawley
rats are anesthetized and implanted with femoral vein cannulae and
allowed to recover overnight. After recovery, the test compounds are
administered intravenously through the cannula and effects of tail
5 withdrawal latency are measured.
Tail withdrawal latency is measured as the time to tail movement
by the rat after exposure of the tail to a radiant heat source. The heat
source is calibrated to produce a temperature of 62° C after 15 seconds.
Tail withdrawal latency in control animals [the absence of an opioid drug]
10 is six to eight seconds. Test compounds demonstrating opioid activity
prolong tail withdrawal latency beyond that seen in the absence of drugs.
A maximal latency cut-off of fifteen seconds is imposed to prevent tissue
damage. The assay is verified with known opioids as standards. Results
of these studies are expressed as ED 50 concentration values, calculated as
15 the dose producing a tail withdrawal latency equal to half the difference
between the maximum latency (15 seconds) and the baseline latency (six
to eight seconds). ED 50 values typically are expressed as milligrams of
compound/kilogram of body weight. Duration of action is defined as the
time (in minutes) necessary for the tail withdrawal response to return to
20 baseline values after being elevated in response to drug administration.
Duration of action is measured at the lowest dose producing a fifteen
second (maximum) tail withdrawal latency.
(f) Other Mechanical Methods [see the Randall-
Selitto] method described above]
25 These methods, other than the Randall-Selitto method, are
generally used for the primary screening of analgesics. Surgical blades
adapted in various manners are used in the most primitive of these
methods to produce a pain reaction. The blade is applied with a graded
forceps and the amount of pressure necessary to elicit pain is expressed
30 as the number of steps required in order to produce a squeak in the
experimental animal. The pressure exercised by the blades of the forceps
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-91-
has also been measured by placing a dynamometer between the handles
of the forceps. Artery clamps or clips have also been used instead of
forceps. In humans, mechanical pressure has been applied over bone
structures or by eliciting visceral pain such as in the enteric canal or in the
5 esophagus by introducing and inflating balloons therein. The amount of
pressure required to produce pain can be measured by means of a
manometer but the subject itself is the one to report the degree of pain.
3. Tests for anti-diarrheal activity
(a) Castor Oil Test in Rats [see, e.g. . Niemegeers et
10 al. (1972) Arzneim Forsch 22:51fi-g1«- II S
Patent No. 4,867,979; U.S. Patent No.
4,990,521; U.S. Patent No. 4,824,853]
Rats are fasted overnight. Each animal is treated intravenously with
the desired dose of the compound to be tested. One hour thereafter, the
15 animal receives 1 ml of castor oil orally. Each animal should be kept in an
individual cage and about 2 hours after the castor oil treatment, each
animal is assessed for the presence or absence of diarrhea. The ED K „
value is determined as that dose in mg/kg body weight at which no
diarrhea is present in 50% of the tested animals.
20 For example, young female Wistar rats (230-250 g body weight)
are fasted overnight and in the morning each animal is treated orally with
a dose level of the compound to be tested. One hour thereafter, the
animal receives 1 ml of castor oil orally. Each animal is kept in an
individual cage. At different selected time intervals ( e.g. . 1, 2, 3, 4, 6
25 and 8 hrs) after the castor oil treatment, the presence or absence of
diarrhea is noted. In more than 95% of 500 control animals, severe
diarrhea is observed 1 hour after treatment with castor oil. Using this
all-or-none criterion, a significant positive effect occurs with the tested
compound if no diarrhea is observed 1 hour after the castor oil treatment.
30 A minimum of 5 dose levels are used per drug, each dose level being
given to 10 rats on ten different days. The ED 50 value, Le^, the dose level
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-92-
at which such effect is observed in 50% of the animals, for the
compounds, such as the compounds of formula (II), generally ranges from
about 0.01 to about 10 mg/kg.
(b) Castor oil test in mice [see, e.g. , U.S. Patent
5 No. 4,326,075
Groups of mice are orally dosed with test compound and one-half
hour later all mice are given 0.3 ml of castor oil. Three hours after castor
oil administration, all of the mice are checked for diarrhea and the dose of
testing compound which protected 50% of the mice from diarrhea is the
10 ED 50 dose.
(c) Ricinus oil test [see, e.g. , U.S. Patent
No. 4,990,521]
Rats, such as female Wistar rats or other laboratory strains, are
fasted overnight. Each animal is treated orally with a dose level of the
15 test compound. One hour thereafter, the animal is given an amount,
typically 1 ml, of ricinus oil orally. Each animal is kept in an individual
cage and 1 hour after the ricinus oil treatment, the presence or absence
of diarrhea is noted. The ED 50 value is determined as that dose in mg/kg
body weight at which no diarrhea is present in 50% of the treated
20 animals.
(d) Antagonism of PGE 2 -induced diarrhea in mice
Anti-diarrheal activity can be determined by assessing the effects
of a compound as an antagonist of PGE 2 -induced diarrhea in mice [see,
e.g. . Dajani et aL 1 975) European Jour. Pharmacol. 34 : 1 05-1 1 3; and
25 Dajani et aL (1977) J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 203:51 2-526; see, e.g. .
U.S. Patent No. 4,870,084]. This method reliably elicits diarrhea in
otherwise untreated mice within 1 5 minutes. Animals that are pretreated
with the test agent in which no diarrhea occurs are considered protected
by the test agent. The constipating effects of test agents are measured
30 as an "all or none" response, and diarrhea is defined as watery unformed
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-93-
stools, very different from normal fecal matter, which has well-formed
boluses, and is firm and relatively dry.
Standard laboratory mice, such as albino mice of the Charles River
CD-1 strain, are used. They are typically kept in group cages. The
5 weight range of the animals when tested is between 20-25 g. Pelleted rat
chow is available ad libitum until 1 8 hours prior to testing, at which time
food is withdrawn. Animals are weighed and marked for identification.
Five animals are normally used in each drug treatment group and
compared with controls. Mice weighing 20-25 g are housed in group
10 cages, and fasted overnight prior to testing. Water is available. Animals
are challenged with PGE 2 [0.32 mg/kg i.p. in 5% ETOH] one hour after
test drug treatment, and immediately placed individually, for example, in
transparent acrylic boxes. A disposable cardboard sheet on the bottom of
the box is checked for diarrhea on an all or nothing basis at the end of 1 5
15 minutes.
As discussed in detail above, the identification of suitable
antihyperalgesic compounds for use in the present methods and
compositions involve comparing the B/A ratio of test compounds to the
B/A ratio of a standard compound (diphenoxylate). As would be apparent
20 to one skilled in the art, to best assure accuracy in the comparison of the
B/A ratio for a test compound to the B/A ratio for diphenoxylate, the test
compound and diphenoxylate should be assessed under substantially the
same conditions.
C. Formulation of compositions for in vivo use and methods of
25 use
Effective concentrations of one or more of anti-hyperalgesic
compounds or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof are mixed
with a suitable pharmaceutical carrier or vehicle for topical or local
administration. Compounds are included in an amount effective for
30 reducing the hyperalgesic state for which treatment is contemplated. The
concentration of active compound in the composition will depend on
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-94-
absorption, inactivation, excretion rates of the active compound, the
dosage schedule, and amount administered as well as other factors
known to those of skill in the art. Generally, the dosages are higher,
typically at least about 5 to 10 fold, than the amount delivered when
5 administered orally or rectally for diarrhea or when administered as for
treatment of respiratory disorders, and, if necessary may be empirically
determined.
Pharmaceutical carriers or vehicles suitable for administration of the
compounds and for the methods provided herein include any such carriers
10 known to those skilled in the art to be suitable for the particular mode of
administration. In addition, the compounds may be formulated as the sole
pharmaceutically active ingredient in the composition or may be combined
with other active ingredients.
Typically a therapeutically effective dosage is formulated to contain
15 a concentration [by weight] of at least about 0.1% up to about 50% or
more, and all combinations and subcombinations of ranges therein.
Preferably, the compositions are formulated to contain the active
compound or compound(s) in a concentration of from about 0.1 to less
than about 50%, for example, about 49, 48, 47, 46, 45, 44, 43, 42, 41
20 or 40%, with concentrations of from greater than about 0.1%, for
example, about 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 or 0.5%, to less than about 40%, for
example, about 39, 38, 37, 36, 35, 34, 33, 32, 31 or 30% being more
preferred. In even more preferred embodiments, the compositions contain
from about 0.5% to less than about 30%, for example, about 29, 28, 27,
25 26, 25, 25, 24, 23, 22, 21 or 20%, with concentrations of from greater
than about 0.5%, for example, about 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9 or 1%, to less
than about 20%, for example, about 19, 18, 17, 16, 15, 14, 13, 12, 11
or 10% being still more preferred. In yet more preferred embodiments,
the compositions contain from greater than about 1% for example, about
30 2%, to less than about 10%, for example about 9 or 8%, with
97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-95-
concentrations of greater than about 2%, for example, about 3 or 4%, to
less than about 8%, for example, about 7 or 6% being still more
preferred. In certain particularly preferred embodiments, the active agent
is present in a concentration of about 5%. In all embodiments, amounts
may be adjusted to compensenate for differences in amounts of active
ingredients actually delivered to the treated tissue.
The active ingredient may be administered at once, or may be
divided into a number of smaller doses to be administered at intervals of
time. It is understood that the precise dosage and duration of treatment
is a function of the tissue being treated and may be determined
empirically using known testing protocols or by extrapolation from in vivo
or in yjtro test data. It is to be noted that concentrations and dosage
values may also vary with the age of the individual treated. It is to be
further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage
regimens should be adjusted over time according to the individual need
and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising
the administration of the compositions, and that the concentration ranges
set forth herein are exemplary only and are not intended to limit the scope
or practice of the claimed compositions.
The compound may be suspended in micronized or other suitable
form or may be derivatized to produce a more soluble active product or to
produce a prodrug, or where the compound is a prodrug, to use the active
form. The form of the resulting mixture depends upon a number of
factors, including the intended mode of administration and the solubility
of the compound in the selected carrier or vehicle. The effective
concentration is sufficient for ameliorating the hyperalgesic condition and
may be empirically determined.
Compounds are typically included at concentrations 0.001 % {by
weight] or greater than 1 % up to 50% or higher [for purposes herein the
concentrations are set forth with reference to loperamide; for other
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-96-
compounds the concentrations may be greater or lesser depending upon
their relative potency as anti-hyperalgesics compared to loperamide]. The
concentration is generally greater than the concentration for systemic
administration of the compound as an anti-diarrheal. Preferable
5 concentrations [by weight] are in the range of 0.01 % to about 25%,
more preferably 1% to 25%, yet more preferably greater than about 1%
to about 10%, and most preferably greater than 1% up to about 5%.
Aqueous suspensions and compositions contain 1 % or more.
The resulting mixture may be a solution, suspension, emulsion or
10 the like and are formulated as creams, gels, ointments, emulsions,
solutions, elixirs, lotions, suspensions, tinctures, pastes, foams, aerosols,
irrigations, sprays, suppositories, bandages, or any other formulation
suitable for topical or local administration.
The intended route of administration herein is topical or local
15 administration, and compositions are formulated in a manner suitable for
each route of administration. Preferred modes of administration include
topical application to the skin, eyes or mucosa, and local application to
the joints, such as by intra-articular injection. Thus, typical vehicles are
those suitable for pharmaceutical or cosmetic application to body surfaces
20 or for local injection. The compositions provided herein may be applied
topically or locally to various areas in the body of a patient.
As noted above, topical application is intended to refer to application to
the tissue of an accessible body surface, such as, for example, the skin
(the outer integument or covering) and the mucosa (the mucous-
25 producing, secreting and/or containing surfaces). Thus, as used herein,
topical application refers to applications that provide no or substantially
no systemic delivery and/or systemic administration of the active
compounds in the present compositions. Exemplary mucosal surfaces
include the mucosal surfaces of the eyes, mouth (such as the lips,
30 tongue, gums, cheeks, sublingual and roof of the mouth), larynx.
97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-97-
esophagus, bronchial, nasal passages, vagina and rectum/anus; in some
embodiments, preferably the mouth, larynx, esophagus, vagina and
rectum/anus; in other embodiments, preferably the eyes, larynx,
esophagus, bronchial, nasal passages, vagina and rectum/anus; and in
still other embodiments, preferably the vagina and rectum/anus.
As noted above, local application herein refers to application to a discrete
internal area of the body, such as, for example, a joint, soft tissue area
(such as muscle, tendon, ligaments, intraocular or other fleshy internal
areas), or other internal area of the body. Thus, as used herein, local
application refers to applications which provide substantially no systemic
delivery and/or systemic administration of the active agents in the present
compositions. Also, local application is intended to refer to applications
to discrete areas of the body, that is, other than the various large body
cavities (such as, for example, the peritoneal and/or pleural cavities).
Pharmaceutical and cosmetic carriers or vehicles suitable for
administration of the compounds provided herein include any such carriers
known to those skilled in the art to be suitable for the particular mode of
administration. In addition, the compounds may be formulated as the
sole pharrnaceutically active ingredient in the composition or may be
combined with other active ingredients. The active compound is included
in the carrier in an amount sufficient to exert a therapeutically useful
effect [Le,., prevention or amelioration of hyperalgesia] in the absence of
serious toxic effects on the treated individual. The effective
concentration may be determined empirically by testing the compounds
using \n vitro and in vivo systems, including the animal models described
herein.
For topical administration, the compounds may be formulated in
compositions in the form of gels, creams, lotions, solids, solutions or
suspensions, or aerosols. Compositions for treating human skin are
formulated for topical application with an anti-hyperalgesic effective
WO 97/09973
PCT7US96/14727
-98-
amount of one or more the compounds selected as described herein,
preferably one of those of the above-defined formula (I), in an effective
concentration range [by weight], between about 0.1% and 80%,
preferably 0.1 to 50%, more preferably greater than about 1 % up to
5 about 50% or more in a cream, ointment, lotion, gel, solution or solid
base or vehicle known in the art to be non-toxic and dermatologically
acceptable or suitable for application to the mucosa. Aqueous
suspensions are preferably formulated at concentrations greater than
about 1%, more preferably 2%.
10 To formulate a composition, the weight fraction of compound is
dissolved, suspended, dispersed, or otherwise mixed in a selected vehicle
at an effective concentration such that the hyperalgesic condition is
relieved or ameliorated. Generally, emollient or lubricating vehicles that
help hydrate the skin are more preferred than volatile vehicles, such as
15 ethanol, that dry the skin. Examples of suitable bases or vehicles for
preparing compositions for use with human skin are petrolatum,
petrolatum plus volatile silicones, lanolin, cold cream [USP], and
hydrophilic ointment [USP].
The choice of an acceptable vehicle is largely determined by the
20 mode of application and tissue to be treated. Generally speaking, the
characteristics of a composition for topical and/or local administration
may be tailored for the particular condition being treated, as well as the
particular surface and/or location of the body to which the compositions
are being administered, by the selection of suitable vehicle or vehicles.
25 The selection of a suitable vehicle may be achieved by one of ordinary
skill in the art without undue experimentation, in light of the disclosure
herein.
Generally speaking, the compositions provided herein are preferably
formulated to possess certain desirable and beneficial characteristics. In
30 this connection, the compositions preferably provide a desirable efficacy.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-99-
With respect to topical and/or local administration of the present
compositions [as these terms are defined herein], desirable efficacy may
involve, for example, penetration of the active ingredient, such as the
compounds of formula (I), into the skin and/or tissue to substantially
5 reach the hyperalgesic site to provide desirable anti-hyperalgesic pain
relief. The efficacy of the present compositions may be about the same
as that achieved, for example, with central opiate analgesics. But, as
discussed in detail herein, the efficacy achieved with the present
compositions is preferably obtained without the undesirable effects that
10 are typically associated with central opiates including, for example,
respiratory depression, sedation and constipation.
The compositions described herein are also preferably non-irrating
and/or non-sensitizing to the skin or other tissues proximate to the site(s)
of administration. In addition, the compositions provided herein also
15 preferably provide a sustained delivery of active ingredient to provide
antihyperalgesic efficacy over a period of time, including extended periods
of time, preferably for at least about 6 hours, more preferably at least
about 12 hours, and even more preferably at least about 24 hours (or
about a day). These compositions are preferably compatible with other
20 topical and/or local treatments that a patient may receive at or about the
same time that the compositions are administered to the patient according
to the methods described herein. Such additional topical or local
treatments include, for example, topical treatments that may be used in
connection with patients suffering from second and/or third degree burns.
25 In addition, the present compositions are preferably physiologically
compatible, that is, the present compositions are preferably substantially
isotonic and/or possess about a neutral pH. The compositions described
herein are preferably easily administered topically and/or locally.
Specifically, the compositions are preferably substantially fluid to provide
30 ease of administration, but also remain at the site of application without
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-100-
run off. The compositions are also desirably water washable for ease of
cleanup and removal from skin and/or tissue (when desired). Other
desirable and beneficial characteristics of the compositions described
herein, in addition to those described above, would be apparent to one
5 skilled in the art, once armed with the present disclosure
Suitable pharmaceutically and dermatologically acceptable vehicles
for topical application include those suited for use include lotions, creams,
solutions, gels, tapes and the like. Generally, the vehicle is either organic
in nature or an aqueous emulsion and capable of having the selected
10 compound or compounds, which may be micronized, dispersed, sus-
pended or dissolved therein. The vehicle may include pharmaceutically-
acceptable emollients, moisterizers, including lactic acid, ammonium
lactate and urea, skin penetration enhancers, coloring agents, fragrances,
emulsifiers, thickening agents, and solvents.
15 In connection with certain preferred embodiments herein that
involve aqueous vehicles, the vehicles also preferably contain a salt of
phosphoric acid (H 3 P0 4 ). Such salts of phosphoric acid include
monobasic salts (MH 2 P0 4 ), dibasic salts (M 2 HP0 4 ) and tribasic salts
(M 3 P0 4 ), where M is a metallic element, for example, an alkali metal, such
20 as sodium (Na) or potassium (K), or an alkaline earth metal, such as
magnesium <Mg) or calcium (Ca). Preferably, the compositions contain at
least two of the monobasic, dibasic and tribasic salts of phosphoric acid.
More preferably, the compositions contain a monobasic and dibasic salt of
phosphoric acid. The concentration of the salt or salts of phosphoric acid
25 employed in the compositions may vary and depends, for example, on the
particular salts selected, the other components of the compositions, the
form of the composition (for example, emulsion, suspension, cream
and/or lotion), and the intended use, including topical or local use.
In preferred embodiments which involve compositions that contain
30 monobasic and dibasic salts of phosphoric acid, the compositions
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-101-
preferably contain from greater than 0 to about 10 wt.% (based on the
total weight of the composition) of a monobasic salt of phosphoric acid,
with from greater than 0 to about 5 wt.% being more preferred. Even
more preferably, the compositions contain from about 0.1 to about 0.5
5 wt.% of a monobasic salt of phosphoric acid, with about 0.2 wt.% being
still more preferred. Also in preferred embodiments, the compositions
contain from greater than 0 to about 10 wt.% (based on the total weight
of the composition) of a dibasic salt of phosphoric acid, with from about
0.1 to about 5 wt.% being more preferred. Even more preferably, the
10 compositions contain from about 1 to about 2 wt.% of a dibasic salt of
phosphoric acid, with about 1.3 wt.% still more preferred.
As noted above, the compositions may also contain a tribasic salt
of phosphoric acid. In these embodiments, the compositions preferably
contain from greater than 0 to about 10 wt.% (based on the total weight
15 of the composition) of a tribasic salt of phosphoric acid, with from greater
than 0 to about 5 wt.% being more preferred. More preferably, the
compositions contain from about 0.1 to about 1 wt.% of a tribasic salt of
phosphoric acid, with about 0.6 wt.% even more preferred.
Also in certain preferred embodiments, including embodiments that
20 involve aqueous vehicles, the compositions may also contain a glycol,
that is, a compound containing two or more hydroxy groups. A glycol
which is particularly preferred for use in the compositions is propylene
glycol. In these preferred embodiments, the glycol is preferably included
in the compositions in a concentration of from greater than 0 to about
25 5 wt.%, based on the total weight of the composition. More preferably,
the compositions contain from about 0.1 to less than about 5 wt.% of a
glycol, with from about 0.5 to about 2 wt.% being even more preferred.
Still more preferably, the compositions contain about 1 wt.% of a glycol.
Other formulation variations may also be employed, as desired, as
30 described below and elsewhere herein.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-102-
For local internal administration, such as intra-articular
administration, the compounds are preferably formulated as a solution or
a suspension in an aqueous-based medium, such as isotonically buffered
saline or are combined with a biocompatible support or bioadhesive
5 intended for internal administration.
1 . Lotions
The lotions, which, for example, may be in the form of a
a suspension, dispersion or emulsion, preferably contain an effective
concentration of one or more of the compounds. The effective
10 concentration is preferably effective to deliver an anti-hyperalgesic
amount, typically at a concentration of between about 0.1 - 50% [by
weight] or more of one or more of the compounds provided herein. The
lotions also contain [by weight] from 1% to 50%, preferably from 3% to
1 5%, of an emollient and the balance water, a suitable buffer, a C 2 or C 3
15 alcohol, or a mixture of water or the buffer and the alcohol. Any
emollients known to those of skill in the art as suitable for application to
human skin may be used. These include, but are not limited to, the
following:
(a) Hydrocarbon oils and waxes, including mineral oil,
20 petrolatum, paraffin, ceresin, ozokerite, microcrystalline wax,
polyethylene, and perhydrosqualene.
(b) Silicone oils, including dimethylpolysiloxanes,
methylphenylpolysiloxanes, water-soluble and alcohol-soluble
silicone-glycol copolymers.
25 (c) Triglyceride fats and oils, including those derived from
vegetable, animal and marine sources. Examples include, but are not
limited to, castor oil, safflower oil, cotton seed oil, corn oil, olive oil, cod
liver oil, almond oil, avocado oil, palm oil, sesame oil, and soybean oil.
(d) Acetoglyceride esters, such as acetylated
30 monoglycerides.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-103-
(e) Ethoxylated glycerides, such as ethoxylated glyceryl
monstearate.
(f) Alkyl esters of fatty acids having 10 to 20 carbon atoms.
Methyl, isopropyl and butyl esters of fatty acids are useful herein.
5 Examples include, but are not limited to, hexyl laurate, isohexyl laurate,
isohexyl palmitate, isopropyl palmitate, isopropyl myristate, decyl oleate,
isodecyl oleate, hexadecyl stearate, decyl stearate, isopropyl isostearate,
diisopropyl adipate, diisohexyl adipate, dihexyldecyl adipate, diisopropyl
sebacate, lauryl lactate, myristyl lactate, and cetyl lactate.
10 (9> Alkenyl esters of fatty acids having 10 to 20 carbon
atoms. Examples thereof include, but are not limited to, oleyl myristate,
oleyl stearate, and oleyl oleate.
(h) Fatty acids having 9 to 22 carbon atoms. Suitable
examples include, but are not limited to, pelargonic, lauric, myristic,
15 palmitic, stearic, isostearic, hydroxystearic, oleic, linoleic, ricinoleic,
arachidonic, behenic, and erucic acids.
(i) Fatty alcohols having 10 to 22 carbon atoms, such as,
but not limited to, lauryl, myristyl, cetyl, hexadecyl, stearyl, isostearyl,
hydroxystearyl, oleyl, ricinoleyl, behenyl, erucyl, and 2-octyl dodecyl
20 alcohols.
(j) Fatty alcohol ethers, including, but not limited to
ethoxylated fatty alcohols of 10 to 20 carbon atoms, such as, but are not
limited to, the lauryl, cetyl, stearyl, isostearyl, oleyl, and cholesterol
alcohols having attached thereto from 1 to 50 ethylene oxide groups or 1
25 to 50 propylene oxide groups or mixtures thereof.
(k) Ether-esters, such as fatty acid esters of ethoxylated
fatty alcohols.
(I) Lanolin and derivatives, including, but not limited to,
lanolin, lanolin oil, lanolin wax, lanolin alcohols, lanolin fatty acids,
30 isopropyl lanolate, ethoxylated lanolin, ethoxylated lanolin alcohols.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-104-
ethoxylated cholesterol, propoxylated lanolin alcohols, acetylated lanolin,
acetylated lanolin alcohols, lanolin alcohols linoleate, lanolin alcohols
ricinoleate, acetate of lanolin alcohols ricinoleate, acetate of ethoxylated
alcohols-esters, hydrogenolysis of lanolin, ethoxylated hydrogenated
5 lanolin, ethoxylated sorbitol lanolin, and liquid and semisolid lanolin
absorption bases.
(m) Polyhydric alcohols and polyether derivatives,
including, but not limited to, propylene glycol, dipropylene glycol,
polypropylene glycol [M.W. 2000-4000], polyoxyethylene polyoxy-
10 propylene glycols, polyoxypropylene polyoxyethylene glycols, glycerol,
ethoxylated glycerol, propoxylated glycerol, sorbitol, ethoxylated sorbitol,
hydroxypropyl sorbitol, polyethylene glycol [M.W. 200-6000], methoxy
polyethylene glycols 350, 550, 750, 2000, 5000, polytethylene oxide)
homopolymers [M.W. 100,000-5,000,000], polyalkylene glycols and
15 derivatives, hexylene glycol (2-methyl-2,4-pentanediol), 1,3-butylene
glycol, 1 ,2,6,-hexanetriol, ethohexadiol USP (2-ethyl-1 ,3-hexanediol),
C 15 -C 18 vicinal glycol and polyoxypropylene derivatives of
trimethylolpropane.
(n) Polyhydric alcohol esters, including, but not limited to,
20 ethylene glycol mono- and di-fatty acid esters, diethylene glycol mono-
and di-fatty acid esters, polyethylene glycol [M.W. 200-6000], mono- and
di-fatty esters, propylene glycol mono- and di-fatty acid esters,
polypropylene glycol 2000 monooleate, polypropylene glycol 2000
monostearate, ethoxylated propylene glycol monostearate, glyceryl mono-
25 and di-fatty acid esters, polyglycerol poly-fatty acid esters, ethoxylated
glyceryl monostearate, 1,3-butylene glycol monostearate, 1,3-butylene
glycol distearate, polyoxyethylene polyol fatty acid ester, sorbitan fatty
acid esters, and polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters.
(o) Wax esters, including, but not limited to, beeswax,
30 spermaceti, myristyl myristate, and stearyl stearate and beeswax
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-105-
derivatives, including, but not limited to, polyoxyethylene sorbitol
beeswax, which are reaction products of beeswax with ethoxylated
sorbitol of varying ethylene oxide content that form a mixture of
ether-esters.
5 (p) Vegetable waxes, including, but not limited to,
carnauba and candelilla waxes.
(q) Phospholipids, such as lecithin and derivatives,
(r) Sterols, including, but not limited to, cholesterol and
cholesterol fatty acid esters.
10 < s > Amides, such as fatty acid amides, ethoxylated fatty
acid amides, and solid fatty acid alkanolamides.
The lotions further preferably contain [by weight] from 1% to 10%,
more preferably from 2% to 5%, of an emulsifier. The emulsifiers can be
nonionic, anionic or cationic. Examples of satisfactory nonionic
15 emulsifiers include, but are not limited to, fatty alcohols having 10 to 20
carbon atoms, fatty alcohols having 10 to 20 carbon atoms condensed
with 2 to 20 moles of ethylene oxide or propylene oxide, alkyl phenols
with 6 to 12 carbon atoms in the alkyl chain condensed with 2 to 20
moles of ethylene oxide, mono- and di-fatty acid esters of ethylene oxide,
20 mono- and di-fatty acid esters of ethylene glycol where the fatty acid
moiety contains from 10 to 20 carbon atoms, diethylene glycol,
polyethylene glycols of molecular weight 200 to 6000, propylene glycols
of molecular weight 200 to 3000, glycerol, sorbitol, sorbitan,
polyoxyethylene sorbitol, polyoxyethylene sorbitan and hydrophilic wax
25 esters. Suitable anionic emulsifiers includ, but are not limited to, the
fatty acid soaps, e.g. sodium, potassium and triethanolamine soaps,
where the fatty acid moiety contains from 1 0 to 20 carbon atoms. Other
suitable anionic emulsifiers include, but are not limited to, the alkali metal,
ammonium or substituted ammonium alkyl sulfates, alkyl arylsulfonates,
30 and alkyl ethoxy ether sulfonates having 1 0 to 30 carbon atoms in the
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-106-
alkyl moiety. The alkyl ethoxy ether sulfonates contain from 1 to 50
ethylene oxide units. Among satisfactory cationic emulsifiers are
quaternary ammonium, morpholinium and pyridinium compounds. Certain
of the emollients described in preceding paragraphs also have emulsifying
5 properties. When a lotion is formulated containing such an emollient, an
additional emulsifier is not needed, though it can be included in the
composition.
The balance of the lotion is water or a C 2 or C 3 alcohol, or a
mixture of water and the alcohol. The lotions are formulated by simply
10 admixing all of the components together. Preferably the compound, such
as loperamide, is dissolved, suspended or otherwise uniformly dispersed
in the mixture.
Other conventional components of such lotions may be included.
One such additive is a thickening agent at a level from 1 % to 10% by
15 weight of the composition. Examples of suitable thickening agents
include, but are not limited to: cross-linked carboxypolymethylene
polymers, ethyl cellulose, polyethylene glycols, gum tragacanth, gum
kharaya, xanthan gums and bentonite, hydroxyethyl cellulose, and
hydroxypropyl cellulose.
20 2. Creams
The creams are formulated to contain concentration effective to
deliver an anti-hyperalgesic effective amount of the compound to the
treated tissue, typically at between about 0.1 %, preferably at greater
than 1 % up to and greater than 50%, preferably between about 3% and
25 50%, more preferably between about 5% and 15% of one or more the
compounds provided herein. The creams also contain from 5% to 50%,
preferably from 10% to 25%, of an emollient and the remainder is water
or other suitable non-toxic carrier, such as an isotonic buffer. The
emollients, as described above for the lotions, can also be used in the
30 cream compositions. The cream may also contain a suitable emulsifier, as
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-107-
described above. The emulsifier is included is in the composition at a
level from 3% to 50%, preferably from 5% to 20%.
3. Solutions and suspensions for topical and local
administration
5 The solutions are formulated to contain an amount of one or more
compounds effective to deliver a an anti-hyperalgesic amount, typically at
a concentration [by weight] of between about 0.1 - 50%, preferably at
least more than 1 %, more preferably more than 2%, of one or more of
the compounds provided herein. The balance is water, a suitable organic
10 solvent or other suitable solvent or buffer. Suitable organic materials
useful as the solvent or a part of a solvent system are as follows:
propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol [M.W. 200-600], polypropylene
glycol [M.W. 425-2025], glycerine, sorbitol esters, 1 ,2,6-hexanetriol,
ethanol, isopropanol, diethyl tartrate, butanediol, and mixtures thereof.
15 Such solvent systems can also contain water.
Solutions or suspensions used for local application can include any
of the following components: a sterile diluent, such as water for injection,
saline solution, fixed oil, polyethylene glycol, glycerine, propylene glycol
or other synthetic solvent; antimicrobial agents, such as benzyl alcohol
20 and alkyl parabens such as methyl parabens; antioxidants, such as
ascorbic acid and sodium bisulfite; chelating agents, such as
ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid [EDTA]; buffers, such as acetates,
citrates and phosphates; and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such
as sodium chloride or dextrose. Liquid preparations can be enclosed in
25 ampules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass, plastic
or other suitable material. Suitable carriers may include physiological
saline or phosphate buffered saline [PBS], and the suspensions and
solutions may contain thickening and solubilizing agents, such as glucose,
polyethylene glycol, and polypropylene glycol and mixtures thereof.
30 Liposomal suspensions, may also be suitable as pharmaceutically
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-108-
acceptable carriers. These may be prepared according to methods known
to those skilled in the art.
These compositions that are formulated as solutions or suspensions
may be applied to the skin, or, may be formulated as an aerosol or foam
5 and applied to the skin as a spray-on. The aerosol compositions typically
contain [by weight] from 25% to 80%, preferably from 30% to 50%, of a
suitable propellant. Examples of such propellants are the chlorinated,
fluorinated and chlorofluorinated lower molecular weight hydrocarbons.
Nitrous oxide, carbon dioxide, butane, and propane are also used as pro-
10 pellant gases. These propellants are used as understood in the art in a
quantity and under a pressure suitable to expel the contents of the
container.
Suitably prepared solutions and suspensions may also be topically
applied to the eyes and mucosa. Solutions, particularly those intended for
15 ophthalmic use, may be formulated as 0.01 %-10% isotonic solutions, pH
about 5-7, with appropriate salts, and preferably containing one or more
of the compounds herein at a concentration of about 0.1 %, preferably
greater than 1 %, up to 50% or more. Suitable ophthalmic solutions are
known [see, e.g. . U.S. Patent No. 5,1 16,868, which describes typical
20 compositions of ophthalmic irrigation solutions and solutions for topical
application]. Such solutions, which have a pH adjusted to about 7.4,
contain, for example, 90-100 mM sodium chloride, 4-6 mM dibasic
potassium phosphate, 4-6 mM dibasic sodium phosphate, 8-12 mM
sodium citrate, 0.5-1.5 mM magnesium chloride, 1.5-2.5 mM calcium
25 chloride, 15-25 mM sodium acetate, 10-20 mM D. L. -sodium 0-
hydroxybutyrate and 5-5.5 mM glucose.
The active materials can also be mixed with other active materials,
that do not impair the desired action, or with materials that supplement
the desired action, including viscoelastic materials, such as hyaluronic
30 acid, which is sold under the trademark HEALON [solution of a high
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-109-
molecular weight (MW of about 3 millions) fraction of sodium
hyaluronate; manufactured by Pharmacia, Inc. see, e^, U.S. Patent Nos.
5,292,362, 5,282,851, 5,273,056, 5,229,127, 4,517,295 and
4,328,803], VISCOAT [fluorine-containing (meth)acrylates, such as,
5 1H,1H,2H,2H-heptadecafluorodecylmethacrylate; see, e.g. . U.S. Patent
Nos. 5,278,126, 5,273,751 and 5,214,080; commercially available from
Alcon Surgical, Inc.], ORCOLON [see, e^, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,273,056;
commercially available from Optical Radiation Corporation], methyl-
cellulose, methyl hyaluronate, polyacrylamide and polymethacrylamide
10 [see, e^L, U.S. Patent No. 5,273,751]. The viscoelastic materials are
present generally in amounts ranging from about 0.5 to 5.0%, preferably
1 to 3% by weight of the conjugate material and serve to coat and
protect the treated tissues. The compositions may also include a dye,
such as methylene blue or other inert dye, so that the composition can be
15 seen when injected into the eye or contacted with the surgical site during
surgery.
4. Gels
Gel compositions can be formulated by simply admixing a suitable
thickening agent to the previously described solution or suspension
20 compositions. Examples of suitable thickening agents have been
previously described with respect to the lotions.
The gelled compositions contain an effective amount of one or
more an anti-hyperalgesic amount, typically at a concentration of between
about 0.1 - 50% by weight or more of one or more of the compounds
25 provided herein.; from 5% to 75%, preferably from 10% to 50%, of an
organic solvent as previously described; from 0.5% to 20%, preferably
from 1 % to 10% of the thickening agent; the balance being water or
other aqueous or non-aqueous carrier, such as, for example, an organic
liquid, or a mixture of carriers.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-110-
5. Solids
Compositions of solid forms may be formulated as stick-type
compositions intended for application to the lips or other parts of the
body. Such compositions contain an effective amount of one or more of
5 the compounds provided herein. The amount is typically an amount
effective to deliver an anti-hyperyperalgesic amount, typically at a
concentration of between about 0.1 - 50% or more of one or more of the
compounds provided herein. The solids also contain from about 40% to
98%, preferably from about 50% to 90%, of the previously described
10 emollients. This composition can further contain from 1 % to 20%,
preferably from 5% to 15%, of a suitable thickening agent, and, if desired
or needed, emulsifiers and water or buffers. Thickening agents previously
described with respect to lotions are suitably employed in the
compositions in solid form.
15 Other ingredients, such as preservatives, including alkyl parabens
such as methyl paraben and ethyl-paraben, perfumes, dyes or the like,
that are known in the art to provide desirable stability, fragrance or color,
or other desirable properties, such as shielding from actinic rays from the
sun, to compositions for application to the skin may also be employed in
20 a composition for such topical application.
6. Additional ingredients
Other active ingredients, include, but are not limited to antibiotics,
antivirals, antifungals, anti-inflammatories, including steroidal and non-
steroidal anti-inflammatories, vasoconstrictors such as epinephrine,
25 anesthetics and mixtures thereof. Such additional ingredient include any
of the following, further including salts thereof:
a. Antibacterial agents
Aminoglycosides, such as Amikacin, Apramycin, Arbekacin, Bam-
bermycins, Butirosin, Dibekacin, Dihdrostreptomycin, Fortimicin(s),
30 Fradiomycin, Gentamicin, Ispamicin, Kanamycin, Micronomicin,
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
Neomycin, Neomycin Undecylenate, Netilmicin, Paromomycin,
Ribostamycin, Sisomicin, Spectinomycin, Streptomycin, Streptonicozid,
and Tobramycin;
Amphenicols, such as Azidamfenicol, Chloramphenicol,
5 Chloramphenicol Palmirate, Chloramphenicol Pantothenate, Florfenicol,
Thiamphenicol;
Ansamycins, such as Rifamide, Rifabutin, Rifampin, Rifamycin, and
Rifaximin;
/S-Lactams;
10 Carbapenems, such as Imipenem;
Cephalosporins, such as 1-Carba (dethia) Cephalosporin, Cefaclor,
Cefactor, Cefadroxil, Cefamandole, Cefatrizine, Cefazedone, Cefazolin,
Cefrxime, Cefmenoxime, Cefmetazole, Cefodizime, Cefonicid, Cefopera-
zone, Ceforanide, Cefotaxime, Cefotetan, Cefotiam, Cefoxitin, Cefpimi-
15 zole, Cefpirimide, Cefpodoxime Proxetil, Cefprozil, Cefroxadine, Cefsulo-
din, Ceftazidime, Cefteram, Ceftezole, Ceftibuten, Ceftizoxime, Ceftri-
axone, Cefuroxime, Cefuzonam, Cephacetrile Sodium, Cephalexin, Ceph-
aloglycin, Cephaloridine, Cephalosporin, Cephalothin, Cephapirin Sodium,
Cephradine and Pivcefalexin;
20 Cephamycins such as Cefbuperazone, Cefmetazole, Cefminox,
Cefetan and Cefoxitin;
Monobactams such as Aztreonam, Carumonam and Tigemonam;
Oxacephems such as Flomoxef and Moxolactam;
Penicillins such as Amidinocillin, Amdinocillin Pivoxil, Amoxicillin,
25 Ampicillan, Apalcillin, Aspoxiciilin, Azidocillan, Azlocillan, Bacampicillin,
Benzylpenicillinic Acid, Benzylpenicillin, Carbenicillin, Carfecillin,
Carindacillin, Clometocillin, Cloxacillin, Cyclacillin, Dicloxacillin,
Diphenicillin, Epicillin, Fenbenicillin, Floxicillin, Hetacillin, Lenampicillin,
Metampicillin, Methicillin, Mezlocillin, Nafcillin, Oxacillin, Penamecillin,
30 Penethamate Hydriodide, Penicillin G Benethamine, Penicillin G Benza-
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-112-
thine. Penicillin G Benzhydrylamine, Penicillin G Calcium, Penicillin G
Hydrabamine, Penicillin G Potassium, Penicillin G Procaine, Penicillin N r
Penicillin O, Penicillin V, Penicillin V Benzathine, Penicillin V Hydrabamine,
Penimepicycline, Phenethicillin, Piperacillin, Pivapicillin, Propicillin,
5 Quinacillin, Sulbenicillin, Talampicillin, Temocillin and Ticarcillin;
Lincosamides such as Clindamycin and Lincomycin;
Macrolides such as Azithromycin, Carbomycin, Clarithromycin,
Dirithromycin, Erythromycin(s) and Derivatives, Josamycin, Leucomycins,
Midecamycins, Miokamycin, Oleandomycin, Primycin, Rokitamycin,
10 Rosaramicin, Roxithromycin, Spiramycin and Troleandomycin;
Polypeptides such as Amphomycin, Bacitracin, Capreomycin,
Colistin, Enduracidin, Enviomycin, Fusafungine, Gramicidin(s), Gramicidin
S, Mikamycin, Polymyxin, Polymyxin ^-Methanesulfonic Acid, Pristina-
mycin, Ristocetin, Teicoplanin, Thiostrepton, Tuberactinomycin, Tyroci-
15 dine, Tyrothricin, Vancomycin, Viomycin(s), Virginiamycin and Zinc
Bacitracin;
Tetracyclines such as Apicycline, Aztreonam, Chlortetracycline,
Clomocycline, Colistimethate, Demeclocycline, Doxycycline, Elindamycin,
lindamycin, Guamecycline, Linccomycin, Loracarbef, Lymecycline,
20 Meclocycline, Methacycline, Minocycline, Novobiocin, Oxytetracycline,
Penimepicycline, Pipacycline, Rolitetracycline, Sancycline, Senociclin and
Tetracycline; and
others such as Cycloserine, Mupirocin, Tuberin.
b. Synthetic antibacterials
25 2,4-Diaminopyrimidines such as Brodimoprim, Tetroxoprim and
Trimethoprim;
Nitrofurans such as Furaltadone, Furazolium, Nifuradene, Nifuratel,
Nifurfoline, Nifurpirinol, Nifurprazine, Nifurtoinol and Nitrofurantoin;
Quinolones and analogs thereof, such as Amifloxacin, Cinoxacin,
30 Ciprofloxacin, Difloxacin, Enoxacin, Fleroxacin, Flumequine, Lomefloxacin,
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-113-
Miloxacin, Nalidixic Acid, Norfloxacin, Ofloxacin, Oxolinic Acid,
Pefloxacin, Pipemidic Acid, Piromidic Acid, Rosoxacin, Temafloxacin and
Tosufloxacin;
Sulfonamides such as Acetyl Sulfamethoxypyrazine, Acetyl
5 Sulfisoxazole, Azosulfamide, Benzylsulfamide, Chloramine-B, Chlor-
amine-T, Dichloramine T,Formosulfathiazole, N 2 -Formyl-sulfisomidine,
N 4 -£-D-Glucosylsulfanilamide, Mafenide, 4'-(Methyl-sulfamoyl)sulfanilani-
lide, p-Nitrosulfathiazole, Noprylsulfamide, Phthalylsulfacetamide,
Phthalylsulfathiazole, Salazosulfadimidine, Succinylsulfathiazole,
10 Sulfabenzamide, Sulfacetamide, Sulfachlorpyridazine, Sulfachrysoidine,
Sulfacytine, Sulfadiazine, Sulfadicramide, Sulfadimethoxine, Sulfadoxine,
Sulfaethidole, Sulfaguanidine, Sulfaguanol, Sulfalene, Sulfaloxic Acid,
Sulfamerazine, Sulfameter, Sulfamethazine, Sulfamethizole, Sulfa-
methomidine. Sulfamethoxazole, Sulfamethoxypyridazine, Sulfametrole,
15 Sulfamidochrysoidine, Sulfamoxole, Sulfanilamide, Sulfanilamidomethane-
sulfonic Acid Triethanolamine Salt, 4-Sulfanilamidosalicylic Acid,
N 4 -Sulfanilylsulfanilamide, Sulfanilylurea, N-Sulfanilyl-3,4-xylamide,
Sulfanitran, Sulfaperine, Sulfaphenazole, Sulfaproxyline, Sulfapyrazine,
Sulfapyridine, Sulfasomizole, Sulfasymazine, Sulfathiazole, Sulfathiourea,
20 Sulfatolamide, Sulfisomidine and Sulfisoxazole;
Sulfones, such as Acedapsone, Acediasulfone, Acetosulfone,
Dapsone, Diathymosulfone, Glucosulfone, Solasulfone, Succisulfone,
Sulfanilic Acid,p-Sulfanilylbenzylamine, p,p'-Sulfonyldianiline-N,N'
digalactoside, Sulfoxone and Thiazolsulfone;
25 Others such as Benzoyl Peroxide, Clofoctol, Hexedine, Magainins,
Methenamine, Methenamine Anhydromethylene-citrate, Methenamine
Hippurate, Methenamine Mandelate, Methenamine Subsalicylate,
Nitroxoline, Silver Nitrate, Squalamine, and Xibornol.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
— 114 —
c. Antifungal (antibiotics)
Polyenes such as Amphotericin-B, Candicidin, Dermostatin, Filipin,
Fungichromin, Hachimycin, Hamycin, Lucensomycin, Mepartricin,
Natamycin, Nystatin, Pecilocin, Perimycin; and others, such as Azaserine,
5 Griseofulvin, Oligomycins, Pyrrolnitrin, Siccanin, Tubercidin and Viridin.
d. Antifungal (synthetic)
Allylamines such as Naftifine and Terbinafine;
Imidazoles such as Bifonazole, Butoconazole, Chlordantoin,
Chlormidazole, Cloconazole, Clotrimazole, Econazole, Enilconazole,
10 Fenticonazole, Isoconazole, Ketoconazole, Miconazole, Omoconazole,
Oxiconazole Nitrate, Sulconazole and Tioconazole;
Triazoles such as Fluconazole, Itraconazole, Terconazole
Others such as Acrisorcin, Amorolfine, Biphenamine,
Bromosalicylchloranilide, Buclosamide, Chlophenesin, Ciciopirox,
15 Cloxyquin, Coparaffinate, Diamthazole, Dihydrochloride, Exalamide,
Flucytosine, Halethazole, Hexetidine, Loflucarban, Nifuratel, Potassium
Iodide, Propionates, Propionic Acid, Pyrithione, Salicylanilide, Sulbentine,
Tenonitrozole, Tolciclate, Tolindate, Tolnaftate, Tricetin, Ujothion, and
Undecylenic Acid.
20 e. Antiglaucoma agents
Antiglaucoma agents, such as Dapiprazoke, Dichlorphenamide,
Dipivefrin and Pilocarpine.
f . Anti-inflammatory agents
Corticosteriods such as Alclometasone, Betamethasone,
25 Clobetasol, Clocortrolone, Desonide, Desoximetasone, Dexamethasone,
Diflorasone, Fluocinolone, Fluocinonide, Flurandrenolide, Fluticasone,
Floromethalone, Halcinonide, Halobetasol, Hydrocortisone, Loteprednol,
Mometasone, Prednicarbate, Prednisone, and Triamcinolone;
Aminoarylcarboxylic Acid Derivatives such as Etofenamate,
30 Meclofenamic Acid, Mefanamic Acid, Niflumic Acid;
WO 97/09973
PCT7US96/14727
-115-
Arylacetic Acid Derivatives such as Acemetacin, Amfenac, Cinme-
tacin, Clopirac, Diclofenac, Fenclofenac, Fenclorac, Fenclozic Acid, Fen-
tiazac, Glucametacin, Isoxepac, Lonazolac, Metiazinic Acid, Naproxin,
Oxametacine, Proglumetacin, Sulindac, Tiaramide and Tolmetin;
5 Arylbutyric Acid Derivatives such as Butibufen and Fenbufen;
Arylcarboxylic Acids such as Clidanac, Ketorolac and Tinoridine.
Arylpropionic Acid Derivatives such as Bucloxic Acid, Carprofen,
Fenoprofen, Flunoxaprofen, Ibuprofen, Ibuproxam, Oxaprozin,
Phenylalkanoic Acid derivatives such as Flurbiprofen, Piketoprofen,
10 Pirprofen, Pranoprofen, Protizinic Acid and Tiaprofenic Acid;
Pyranocarboxylic acids such as Etodolac;
Pyrazoles such as Mepirizole;
Pyrazolones such as Clofezone, Feprazone, Mofebutazone, Oxy-
phenbutazone, Phenylbutazone, Phenyl Pyrazolidininones, Suxibuzone and
15 Thiazoiinobutazone;
Salicylic Acid Derivatives such as Aspirin, Bromosaligenin,
Diflusinal, Fendosal, Glycol Salicylate, Mesalamine, 1-Naphthyl Salicylate,
Magnesium Salicylate, Olsalazine and Salicylamide, Salsalate, and
Sulfasalazine;
20 Thiazinecarboxamides such as Droxicam, Isoxicam and Piroxicam
Others such as e-Acetamidocaproic Acid, Acetaminophen,
S-Adenosylmethionine, 3-Amino-4-hydroxybutyric Acid, Amixetrine,
Bendazac, Bucolome, Carbazones, Cromolyn, Difenpiramide, Ditazol,
Hydroxychloroquine, Indomethacin, Ketoprofen and its active metabolite
25 6-methoxy-2-naphthylacetic acid; Guaiazulene, Heterocylic Aminoalkyl
Esters of Mycophenolic Acid and Derivatives, Nabumetone, Nimesulide,
Orgotein, Oxaceprol, Oxazole Derivatives, Paranyline, Pifoxime,
2-substituted-4, 6-di-tertiary-butyl-s-hydroxy-1 ,3-pyrimidines, Proquazone
and Tenidap.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-116-
g. Antiseptics
Guanidines such as Alexidine, Ambazone, Chlorhexidine and
Picloxydine;
Halogens/Halogen Compounds such as Bornyl Chloride, Calcium
5 lodate, Iodine, Iodine Monochloride, Iodine Trichloride, Iodoform,
Povidone-lodine, Sodium Hypochlorite, Sodium lodate, Symclosene,
Thymol Iodide, Triclocarban, Triclosan and Troclosene Potassium;
Nitrofurans such as Furazolidone, 2-(Methoxymethyl)-5-Nitrofuran,
Nidroxyzone, Nifuroxime, Nifurzide and Nitrof urazone;
10 Phenols such as Acetomeroctol, Chloroxylenol, Hexachlorophene,
1-Napthyl Salicylate, 2,4,6-Tribromo-m-cresol and 3',4',5— Trichloro-
salicylanilide;
Quinolines such as Aminoquinuride, Chloroxine, Chlorquinaldol,
Cloxyquin, Ethylhydrocupreine, Halquinol, Hydrastine, 8-Hydroxquinoline
15 and Sulfate; and
others, such as Boric Acid, Chloroazodin, m-Cresyl Acetate, Cupric
Sulfate and Ichthammol.
h. Antivirals
Purines/Pyrimidinones, such as 2-Acetyl-pyridine 5-((2-pyridyl-
20 amino)thiocarbonyl) Thiocarbonohydrazone, Acyclovir, Dideoxyadenosine,
Dideoxycytidine, Dideoxyinosine, Edoxudine, Famiciciovir, Floxuridine,
Ganciclovir, Idoxuridine, MADU, Pyridinone, Trifluridine, Valacyclovir,
Vidrarbine and Zidovudine;
Others such as Acetylleucine Monoethanolamine, Acridinamine,
25 Alkylisooxazoles, Amantadine, Amidinomycin, Cuminaldehyde Thiosemi-
carbzone, Foscarnet Sodium, Interferon o-N3, Kethoxal, Lysozyme,
Methisazone, Moroxydine, Podophyllotoxin, Ribavirin, Rimantadine,
Stallimycin, Statolon, Thymosins, Tromantadine and Xenazoic Acid.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-117-
i. Antihistamines
Antihistamines such as chlorcycliaine, and doxepin
j. Vasoconstrictors
Vasoconstrictors, preferably such as the o-agonists, including but
5 not limited to, epinephrine, norepinephrine, pseudoephedrine,
phenylephrine, oxymetazoline, propylhexedrine, naphazoline,
tetrahydrolozine, xylometazonline, ethylnorepinephrine, methoxamine,
phenylhexedrine, mephentermine, metaraminol, dopamine, dipivefrin,
norphedrine and ciraxzoline may be advantageously used in the
10 compositions and methods herein. Use of such should aid in reducing
systemic delivery of the active antihyperalgesic agent.
k. Local anesthetics
Dyclonine, lidocaine and Prilocaine, singly or in admixture;
Benzocaine, Tretracaine, Bupiracaine, Mepivacine and Etidocaine.
15 Exemplary compositions are set forth in the Examples herein. It is
understood that suitable combinations of any of the above additional
ingredients with the compounds provided herein are also contemplated.
D. Combinations and kits
The compounds or compositions containing the compounds may
20 also be coated on bandages, mixed with bioadhesives or included in
dressings. Thus, combinations of bandages, bioadhesives, dressings and
other such materials and the compositions formulated as described herein
are provided. Kits containing these combinations, which may also include
compositions containing the above listed agents, are also provided.
25 E. Articles of manufacture
The compounds and compositions provided herein may be
packaged as articles of manufacture containing packaging material, one or
more of the compounds provided herein, which is effective for ameliora-
ting peripheral hyperalgesia, within the packaging material, and a label
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-118-
that indicates that the compound, N-oxide, acid, salt or other derivative
thereof is used for treating and/or preventing hyperalgesic conditions.
F. Indications and Methods of treatment
The compositions and methods herein are intended for the
5 preventions and treatment of hyperalgesia association with numerous
inflamatory conditions and injuries. The compositions and methods
provided herein may be used to treat a variety of hyperalgesic conditions
associated with burns, including, but not limited to, thermal, radiation,
chemical, sun and wind burns, abrasions, including, for example, corneal
10 abrasions, bruises, contusions, frostbite, rashes, including, for example,
allergic, heat and contact dermatitis, such as, for example, poison ivy and
diaper rashes, acne, insect bites/stings, skin ulcers, including, but not
limited to, diabetic and decubitus ulcers, mucositis, inflammation, for
example, periodontal inflammation, orthodontic inflammation,
15 inflammatory conjunctivitis, hemorrhoids and venereal inflammations,
gingivitis, bronchitis, laryngitis, sore throat, shingles, fungal irritation, for
example, athlete's foot and jock itch, fever blisters, boils, Plantar's warts
or vaginal lesions, including, for example, mycotic and sexually
transmitted vaginal lesions. Hyperalgesic conditions associated with skin
20 surfaces include burns, including but not limited to, thermal, radiation,
chemical, sun and wind burns, abrasions such as, for example, corneal
abrasions, bruises, contusions, frostbite, rashes including allergic, heat,
contact dermatitis (for example, poison ivy) and diaper rashes), acne,
insect bites/stings and skin ulcers (including diabetic and decubitus
25 ulcers). Hyperalgesic conditions of the mouth, larynx and bronchium
include mucositis, post-tooth extraction, periodontal inflammation,
gingivitis, orthodontic inflammation, bronchitis, laryngitis and sore throat.
Hyperalgesic conditions of the eyes include corneal abrasions, post-radial
keratectomy and inflammatory conjunctivitis. Hyperalgesic conditions of
30 the rectum/anus include hemorrhoids and venereal inflammations.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-119-
Hyperalgesic conditions associated with infectious agents include
shingles, fungal irritations (including athlete's foot and jock itch), fever
blisters, boils, Plantar's warts and vaginal lesions (including lesions
associated with mycosis and sexually transmitted diseases). Hyperalgesic
5 conditions may also be associated with recovery following surgery, such
as recovery following lumpectomy, episiotomy, laparoscopy, arthroscopy,
radial keratectomy and tooth extraction.
Compositions for use with human skin and muscosa preferably may
be applied at least once per day or, if necessary to achieve the desired
10 result, more often, to the areas of the skin for which treatment is sought.
It is understood that the precise treatment regimen depends upon the
individual treated and may be ascertained empirically depending upon the
formulation and, particularly, the age of the treated individual. Any
regimen is acceptable as long as the desired anti-hyperalgesic effects are
15 achieved without substantial deleterious or sustained undesirable side
effects.
The methods for treating human skin are practiced by applying to
the skin, preferably at least daily, a composition suitable for human skin
treatment or treatment of mucosal membranes and other body surface
20 tissues, including the vagina, rectum, mouth, eyes and other such tissues.
The compositions may be injected into joints or other inflamed areas.
Compositions may be combined with bandages, bioadhesives and
other dressings and applied to the body in combination therewith.
G. Preparation of compounds useful as peripheral anti-
25 hyperaigestcs
Compounds useful as peripheral anti-hyperalgesics in the methods
and compositions provided herein may be prepared using standard organic
synthetic techniques that which would be apparent to one of skill in the
art in light of the present disclosure. Compounds of formula (I), and
30 especially compounds where M is
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-120-
5 \ A*
(CH2) m
10 in which m is 2, R is hydrogen, Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R 4 is
— C( = 0) — NR 5 R 6 , R 2 is substituted or unsubstituted alkylene of about 2
carbons, R 3 is Ar and R 7 is hydroxy (which are referred to hereinafter as
compounds of formula (IA)), may be prepared, for example, by using
methodology exemplified in the following exemplary reaction Schemes I
15 and II.
Scheme I
IA
Ph
4 5
20
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
Scheme II
-121 —
10
Ph-
Ph
6a, X - Br
b, X = l
CONMeg
PhaCCH^HgOH
7
15
20
25
30
35
Ph-
Ph
9a, R
b. R
H
Me
CON-R,
PhnCCH2CH->Cl
8a, Rf- R2- H
b, R.,- Me; R2= H
c, R-i - R2- Me
IA
With particular reference to Scheme I, the synthesis of the compounds of
formula (IA) may involve ring opening of 2,2-diphenyl-4-
hydroxybutyric acid Hactone (1) with HBr in AcOH to afford 4-bromo-
2,2-diphenylbutyric acid (2). Subsequent treatment of (2) with SOCI 2 and
reaction of the intermediate acid chloride with a secondary amine yields
the corresponding tetrahydro-3,3-diphenyl-2-furylidene ammonium salt
(4). The compound of formula (3) rearranges to (4) spontaneously under
the reaction conditions . The structure of the ammonium salt (4) may be
evident from spectral data and from its reactivity. Compound (4) reacts
extremely fast with 4-aryl-4-piperidinols (5) to provide the compounds of
formula (IA).
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-122-
With particular reference to Scheme II, treatment of
dimethyl(tetrahydro-3,3-diphenyl-2-furylidene)ammonium bromide (6a)
with aqueous base affords 4-hydroxy-N,N-dimethyl-2,2-
diphenylbutyramide (7). Compound (7) may be converted with SOCI 2 to
5 the compound (8c). Upon warming in an inert solvent, compound (8c)
rearranges slowly to the corresponding ammonium salt (4). Reaction of
compound (8c) with compound (5) affords the compounds of formula
(IA).
10 Primary and secondary butyramide compounds of formula (IA) may
be prepared by a substitution reaction of compounds (8a) and (8b) with a
4-aryl-4-piperidinol of formula (5). Compounds (8a) and (8b) may be
synthesized by ring opening of the corresponding 3,3-diphenyl-2-
iminotetrahydrofuran (9a) and (9b) with HCI. Quaternization of (9b) with
15 Mel affords ammonium iodide (6b) and alkylation of (9a) with LiNH 2 and
Mel yields the monomethylated compound (9b).
The /?- and K-methyl-substituted compounds of formula (IA) may be
prepared by condensation of the substituted (tetrahydro-3,3-diphenyl-2-
furylidene)ammonium salts (13) and (16) with the 4-aryl-4-piperidinol
20 compounds of formula (5). The synthesis of compounds (12) and (16) is
outlined in the following exemplary reaction Schemes III and IV.
25
30
35
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-123-
Scheme
10
15
CN
I
Ph2CCH(CH3)a>,H
10
CN
Ph 2 CCH(CH 3 >CH 2 OH
11
IA
Me 2
Ph-
I
Ph Me
13
1
HN
Ph-
Ph Me
12
20
25
30
Scheme IV
Ph 2 CHCON
14 '
CON
I ^
Ph 2 CCH 2 CH=CH 2
15
IA
\+ Br"
.Me
Ph-
Ph
16
35
Treatment of 3-cyano-3,3-diphenylisobutyric acid (10) with SOCI 2 ,
followed by reduction of the intermediate acid chloride with NaBH 4 in
DMF, affords the corresponding alcohol (11). Acid cyclization of (11)
40 provides tetrahydro-4-methyl-3,3-diphenyl-2-furanimine (12). Alkylation
of (12), followed by quaternization, yields ammonium iodide (13).
Allylation of the N,N-disubstituted 2,2-diphenylacetamide (14) with
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-124-
NaNH 2 in xylene affords the corresponding 2,2-diphenyl-4-pentenamide
(15). Cyclization of (15) with HBr in AcOH provides the 5-methyl
substituted ammonium bromide (16).
Methods for preparing compounds employed in the methods and
5 compositions provided herein, including the compounds of formula (I), and
especially the compounds of formula (IA), are known [see, e.g. ,
Stokbroekx et aL (1973) J. Med. Chem. 16:782-786; see also, e.g. , U.S.
Patent No. 3,714,159 and U.S. Patent No. 3,884,916]. Other methods
for preparing compounds that may be employed in the methods and
10 compositions provided herein would be apparent to one skilled in the art
in light of instant disclosure.
The following examples are included for illustrative purposes only
and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention.
EXAMPLE 1
15 Peripherally-mediated antinociceptive effects observed during
inflammation appear to be mediated by /u and k opioids
A. Materials and methods
This study was performed with approval from the Institutional
Animal Care and Use Committee of the University of California, San
20 Diego.
1 . Preparation
To induce inflammation, each rat [male Sprague-Dawley, 300-
340 g] was anesthetized in a Plexiglas acrylic plastic induction chamber
with 2% halothane in oxygen-enriched room air. During halothane
25 anesthesia, 0.2 ml of a mixture of 4% kaolin and 4% carrageenan [Sigma
Chemical Co.] was slowly injected into the right knee joint cavity through
the patellar ligament using a 21 gauge needle. After induction of the
inflammation, the rat was allowed to recover from anesthesia. Three and
one-half hours after induction of the inflammation, the rat was
30 anesthetized again with halothane [2.0%1 in a 50% 0 2 /air mixture
delivered through a face mask. The tail artery was cannulated for
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-125-
monitoring BP. When surgical preparation was completed, halothane
anesthesia was continued at 1 .0% inspired halothane. BP was recorded
continuously [Grass model 7 polygraph]. Body temperature [rectal] was
monitored and maintained at 37° C by a servo-controlled heating blanket.
5 For intrathecal [IT] injection, rats were prepared with chronic lumbar
intrathecal catheters [ Yaksh et aL ( 1 976) Phvsiol. Behav. 1_7 : 1 03 1 - 1 036] .
After 5-7 days, they were entered into the study.
To produce a reliable compression of the knee joint, a pediatric
blood pressure cuff was placed around the inflamed knee. For
10 stimulation, the cuff was rapidly elevated to 200 mm Hg by a syringe
pump. Each inflation was sustained for 2 minutes. Typically, testing was
carried out at -5 minutes, and 15, 30, 60, 90 and 120 minutes.
2. Measure of joint volume and circumference
To assure a standard state of inflammation, at three and one-half
15 hours after kaolin and carrageenan injection, the volume and
circumference of the inflamed and non-inflamed knee joint were
measured. Volume was assessed by displacement of fluid after the
hindquarter of the rat was immersed to the groin. Circumference was
measured by a flexible cord placed around the knee joint at the level of
20 the knee joint flexure. After the first 85 rats, it was found that the
inflammation was sufficiently reliable so that further screening in this
fashion was not required.
3. Drug delivery
The route of drug injection was intramuscularly [IM] into the left
25 hamstring muscle, intrathecal^ [IT] through the chronic catheter, or intra-
articular^ [IA] into the right knee joint using a 30 gauge needle. It was
also found that simple IA injection of saline [vehicle] into the already
inflamed knee joint at 4 hours would result in an additional facilitated
response. Thus, to compare the potency of the IT and IM routes of
30 delivery with the IA route, all IT and IM treatments employed a concurrent
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-126-
IA injection of saline, in addition to the IT or IM injection. IT and IM
vehicle injection had no effect upon the response and, thus, it was not
necessary to give parallel IT or IM vehicle injection with IA drugs. The
volume of all IM and IA drug injections was 0.2 ml, except for IM
5 injection of U50488H 10 mg, which was in 0.6 ml. All IT administered
drugs were injected in a volume of 10 j/l followed by 10/t/l of physiologic
saline to clear the catheter.
4. Drugs
The drugs used for injection were:
10 mu lp] agonists: morphine sulfate [MW: 334; Merck, Sharpe
and Dohme, West Point, PA]; Sufentanil citrate, [MW: 571 Janssen
Pharmaceutical, Belgium];
kappa [ir] agonists: PD1 17302 [( + /-)trans-N-methyl-N[2-(1-
pyrrolidinyl)-cyclohexyl-]benzo-[b]-thiophene-4-acetamide] [MW - 412;
15 Parke Davis] and U50488H (trans-3,4-dichloro-N-methyl-N-[2-(1-
pyrrolidinyD-cyclohexylj-benzeneacetamide) [MW: 465; Upjohn,
Kalamazoo, Ml]; Spiradoline mesylate [MW: 522; Research Biochemicals
Inc.];
delta [J] agonists: DADL [D-ala 2 D-leu 5 -enkephalin; MW: 556;
20 courtesy Dr. Murray Goodman, UCSD]; DPDPE: [D-Pen 2 , D-
Pen 5 ]enkephaiin [MW: 646, courtesy Dr. Victor Hruby, University of
Arizona Health Science Center, Tucson, AZ]; and
naloxone HCI [MW = 364; Endo Labs, Garden City, NJ].
5. Naloxone antagonism
25 To define the potency of naloxone to reverse the effects of IA
morphine and U50488H, rats received an injection of naloxone
[intraperitoneal injection, mg/kg] given at -10 minutes before IA morphine
[1 mg] IA U50488H [1 mg]. This time interval was based on preliminary
observations. If the naloxone dose completely reversed the effects of the
30 agonist, it was scored as an antagonism. In sequential rats, the naloxone
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-127-
dose was increased or decreased by a factor of 3 [approximately one-half
log unit: 0.01, 0.03, 0.1, 0.3, 1.0, 3.0 or 10.0 mg/kg] if the preceding
naloxone dose was either ineffective or effective f e.q. . the Dixon up-
down method] for potency determination [Dixon, WJ (1965) Am. Stat.
5 Ass. J. 60:67-9781.
6. Statistics:
BP was evaluated as the mean BP: [(systolic BP - diastolic
BP)/3 + diastolic BP]. The response to a compression stimulus was
expressed as A mean BP [(maximum mean blood pressure response
10 observed during knee joing compression) -(mean blood pressure response
observed immediately prior to knee joint compression)]. For dose
response analysis, data are presented as the %ABP [maximium A mean
BP measured after drug)/maximum A mean BP measured before drug)] x
100. Statistical comparisons were carried out using a Student's t-test,
15 paired or unpaired as required. For statistical analysis and graphical
presentation, BP dose response curves were generated using the
maximum reduction in the evoked response [% ABP] observed within 60
minutes after drug injection. These dose response data were analyzed by
calculation of a least-squares linear regression. ED 50 and slopes with
20 95% confidence interval [CI] were calculated [Tallarida et aL(1986)
Manual of Pharma cologic Calculations with Computer Programs . 2nd ed.,
New York, Springer-Verlag].
B. Results
1. General observations
25 ' n all experiments, the injection of kaolin and carrageenan induced
inflammation, with swelling and edematous deformation of the joint. The
volume of the right injected hind-limb was measured in the first 85 rats
and found to be 6.6±0.1 versus 14.6±0.5 ml, respectively, before and
after kaolin and carrageenan injection [n = 85; A = +1.8 ± 0.1 ml,
30 p < 0.01, paired t-test]. Injection of saline alone resulted in a small, but
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-128-
not statistically significant, increase in the circumference of the injected
knee joint. The left, uninjected knee, was not different from the right
knee prior to kaolin and carrageenan and did not change during the study
[p > 0.10, paired t-test data, not shown]. Prior to blood pressure
5 response testing, it was observed that all rats displayed a tendency to
keep the injected limb from weight bearing. Unstimulated rats [n = 193],
maintained in an anesthetic state with inspired 1 .0% halothane, displayed
a stable resting BP [121 ±6 mm Hg]. Inflation of the cuff on the in-
flamed knee joint resulted in a reliable stimulation-dependent increase in
10 BP during the 2 minute interval of inflation [A = 14.6 ± 0.2 mmHg].
With knee joint compression, the time course of the increasing BP evoked
by compression was uniform, reaching the maximum response
approximately 20-30 seconds after the onset of stimulation. The BP
changes persisted throughout 2 minutes of stimulation and gradually
15 returned to the control level within 1-2 minutes after the end of the
stimulus.
In the absence of drug treatment, the response to compression was
stable over the 2 hour interval of testing.
2. Intrathecal opioid agonists
20 The IT administration of jj, 6 and k agonists at the doses employed
had no statistically significant effect upon resting blood pressure, but
resulted in an early blockade of the cuff-evoked increase in BP. The
antinociceptive effects were dose dependent. The order of drug activity
on the cuff-evoked BP responses was sufentanil > PD1 17302>
25 spiradoline, morphine > DADL, DPDPE > U-50,488H > naloxone = 0.
3. Intramuscular opioid agonist-cardiovascular response
To determine if the IA effects could be similarly achieved by a
"systemic" route of delivery, the intramuscular [IM] administration of
these agents was also examined. IM /J opioid agonists resulted in a
30 blockade of the compression-evoked increase in BP. The ordering of
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-129-
activity was sufentanil > PD1 17302, Spiradoline, morphine > DADL,
DPDPE > U-50,488H = naloxone = 0.
4. Naloxone antagonism
The effects of IM naloxone on the depressive effects of IA
5 morphine [1 mg] and IA U50488H were determined. Naloxone alone was
without effect upon a compression-evoked change in BP. To determine if
the effects of naloxone were local, within the articular space, naloxone
[30 /jg] was co-administered with morphine in 4 rats. This injection was
adequate to attenuate the anti-hyperalgesic effects of morphine otherwise
10 observed at 30 minutes after agonist injection.
C. Discussion
1 . Spinal opioid agonists and antinociceptton
The compression evoked increase in BP was effectively blocked by
the intrathecal delivery of morphine, sufentanil l/j] and DPDPE and DADL
15 [6], PD1 17304, spiradoline and U50488 [*]. Spinally delivered opioid (j
and 6 agonists have been shown to depress the behavioral and electro-
physiological responses evoked by noxious stimulation. In contrast, k
agonists frequently appear to have modest effects in behavioral models of
acute nociception [such as the tail flick or hot plate models], but typically
20 appear to be more efficacious in models of protracted pain [typically
induced by inflammatory stimuli as in the present model]. Given the lack
of significant changes in resting blood pressure with the spinal agent, it
appears that these agents are blocking the response by a blockade of
small afferent input generated by the compression of the inflamed knee.
25 2 - Intra-articular opioid agonists and antinociception
The experiments demonstrated that IA administered /y and k, but
not 6, preferring agonists result in a dose dependent blockade of the
hyperalgesia produced by the inflammation of the knee. Importantly, as
defined by the dose response curves, the effects produced by injection at
30 the site is more robust and potent than when the respective agent is
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-130-
delivered intramuscularly. This observation indicates that the effect of IA
y and k agonists appear to be mediated by a local action at the site of
injection. This local action is further supported by the observation that
local naloxone was able at a very low dose to attenuate the effects of IA
5 morphine. The local dose required to induce this blockade considerably
exceeds that dose required after spinal delivery. This difference in
potency by the two "local" routes may reflect the accessibility of the joint
to the drug. Alternately, the high dose may reflect upon the fact that a
high level of occupancy is required to block the transduction.
10 Antagonism of the effect of IA morphine and U50488H is con-
sistent with the known lower affinity of naloxone for the k receptor than
for the fj receptor and indicates that both classes of receptors appear to
be involved in this action. The failure of DPDPE and DADL to induce a
comparable action may be due to the absence of delta receptors at this
15 site or to a difference in bio-availability.
EXAMPLE 2
The effects of intra-articular loperamide were compared with those of
morphine delivered into the inflamed knee joints of rats
A. Model
20 In joint inflammation, the peripheral nerve innervating inflamed
tissue evokes an exagerated behavior response to otherwise innocuous
stimuli ( i.e. a state of hyperalgesia). This scenario has been well-
documented in the knee joint. It has been shown that inflammation of the
knee joint results in, among other responses, signs of a pain-associated
25 autonomic reaction, including increased BP.
B. Methods
1 . Induction of inflammation
Male rats [Sprague-Dawley, 300—340 g] were anesthetized with
2% halothane in oxygen-enriched room air. To induce inflammation,
30 during halothane anesthesia 0.2 ml of a mixture of 4% kaolin and 4%
carrageenan [Sigma Chemical Co.] was injected into the right knee joint
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/I4727
-131-
cavity through the patellar ligament using a 21 gauge needle. This
induces an experimental arthritis and model of hyperalgesia.
After induction of the inflammation, the rat was allowed to recover
from anesthesia. Three and half hours after induction of the
5 inflammation, the rat was anesthetized again with halothane [2.0%] in
oxygen-enriched air. The tail artery was cannulated for monitoring BP.
When surgical preparation was completed, halothane anesthesia was
continued at 1.0% inspired halothane. BP was recorded continuously
[Grass model 7 polygraph]. Body temperature [rectal] was monitored and
10 maintained at 37° C by a servo-controlled heating blanket. To produce a
reliable compression of the knee joint, a pediatric blood pressure cuff was
placed around the inflamed knee. For stimulation, the cuff was rapidly
elevated to 22 mm Hg by a syringe pump. Each inflation was sustained
for 2 minutes. It has been demonstrated that such compression results
15 in a reliable stimulus dependent hypertension [a = 13 mm Hg].
2. Drugs and drug delivery
Drugs were delivered either intramuscularly [IM] into the left
hamstring muscle, or intra-articularly [IA] into the right knee joint using a
30 gauge needle. The volume of all IM and IA drug injections was 0.2
20 ml. Drugs used for injection were: morphine sulfate [Merck, Sharpe and
Dohme, West Point, PA], and loperamide HCI [Research Biochemicals,
Natick, MA]. All drugs were dissolved in dimethylsulfoxide [DMS,
spectral grade] and diluted with 5% methyl-cellulose [Sigma]. Naloxone
HCI [Dupont] was prepared in saline for intraperitoneal [IP] delivery.
25 C. Results
The following reflects experiments targeted to define i) the effect
of the IM versus IA loperamide and morphine in blocking the compression
evoked change in blood pressure in the inflamed knee joint, and ii) the
supraspinal effects.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-132-
1 . Effects upon resting and compression evoked blood
pressure
The IA administration of morphine [3 mg], and loperamide [0.3 mg]
had no effect upon resting blood pressure. IA morphine and IA
5 loperamide, however, resulted in a dose dependent blockage of the cuff-
evoked increase in BP [Table below]. In contrast to the effects of IA
injection, the injection of the same doses in the contralateral leg had
minimal suppressive effect upon the compression evoked response. The
effects of IA loperamide were reversed by pretreatment with naloxone.
10 IA morphine is similarly reversed in this model [data not shown).
TABLE
Summary of effect of intra-articular (IA) and intramuscular (IM) loperamide or
morphine on the resting blood pressure and the pressure change evoked by
compression of the inflamed knee joint.
15
Resting BP (mm Hg)
Compression evoked BP
Pre Drug
Post Drug
UPost Drug/% APre Drug)x100*
IA Vehicle (control)
Rat 1
121
113
110
Rat 2
110
121
98
20
Rat 3
109
109
89
Rat 4
89
91
114
x ± SE
107 ±13
1 09 ± 1 3
103±1 1
IA Morphine'
Rat 5
86
91
3
25
Rat 6
112
102
12
Rat 7
92
105
15
Rat 8
86
92
7
x ± SE
94 ± 12
98 ±7
9±5
IA Loperamide t
30
Rat 9
69
73
18
Rat 10
103
109
21
Rat 11
115
109
26
Rat 12
102
115
29
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-133-
5
10
20
TABLE
Summary of effect of intra-articular (IA) and intramuscular (IM) loperamide or
morphine on the resting blood pressure and the pressure change evoked by
compression of the inflamed knee joint.
Rest
ng BP (mm Hg)
Compression evoked BP
Pre Drug
Post Drug
UPost Drug/%APre Drug>x100*
x ± SE
97 ± 19
1 02 ± 1 9
24±5
IM Morphinet
Rat 13
115
119
63
Rat 14
93
103
79
Rat 15
89
111
58
Rat 16
101
89
67
x ± SE
100±1 1
1 06 ± 1 3
67 ±9
IM Loperamide"!" t
Rat 17
112
119
110
Rat 18
128
106
101
Rat 19
121
112
89
Rat 20
105
100
91
x ± SE
117±10
109 ±8
98 ±10
IA Loperamide +
Naloxone"'
Rat 21
89
110
115
Rat 22
93
121
121
Rat 23
119
123
118
Rat 24
107
110
92
x ± SE
1 02 ± 1 4
116±7
1 12±13
% a Post Drug: Percent change in blood pressure evoked by knee joint
compression [(Post knee joint compression - pre knee joint precompression) x 100]
measured after delivery
% *Pre Drug: Percent change in blood pressure evoked by knee joint
25 compression before drug delivery [(Post knee joint compression - pre knee joint
compression) x 100] measured before drug delivery.
f 3 mg
Tt 0.3 mg
trt (1 mg/kg, IP)
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-134
2. Side effects of IM loperamide and morphine
Separate groups of unanesthetized rats were injected with IM
morphine [3 mg] and/or loperamide [0.5 mg]. The time the animal would
stand poised in front of a 4 cm high bar was measured and defined as
catalepsy. As shown in the Table below, morphine, but not loperamide
treated rats, were significantly more cataleptic. Loperamide animals
showed no sign of catalepsy.
TABLE
Incidence of catalepsy after IM Loperamide and Morphine
Time to Dismount from Bar (sec)
Before Drug
After Drug Treatment
(15 min)
IM Morphine {3 mg)
Rat A
1
29
Rat B
2
52
Rat C
1
37
Rat D
1
31
x ± SE
1 ± 1
37±11
IM Loperamide (0.5 mg)
Rat E
1
1
Rat F
1
1
Rat G
1
3
Rat H
1
2
x ± SE
1 ±0
2± 1
10
15
20
25
D. Conclusions
These data indicate the following:
i) Loperamide and morphine given into the inflamed knee joint
will reduce the pain response evoked by knee joint compression.
ii) The effects are mediated by a local action as the same
30 injection into the contralateral leg had no effect [ e.g. . the effects were not
mediated by drug levels that were achieved by parenteral delivery].
iii) The effects of loperamide even at the maximal systemic
concentration [achieved by the IM injection in the unanesthetized rat] was
without effects on centrally mediated behavior [catalepsy].
WO 97/09973
PCT7US96/14727
-135-
iv) The effects of loperamide at this dose were reversed by the
opiate receptor antagonist naloxone suggesting that loperamide was
acting via an opiate receptor.
EXAMPLE 3
5 Preparation of petrolatum based water-washable ointment
A petrolatum based water-washable ointment is prepared by
melting inert ingredients together, adding loperamide hydrochloride and
mixing well until the resulting ointment congeals.
Weight (%)
10 Loperamide hydrochloride 0.5
Lanolin alcohol 0.1
Emulsifying wax NF 7.5
Peg-20 corn glycerides 5.0
Petrolatum 86.0
15
EXAMPLE 4
Preparation of oil-in-water creams
A. An oil-in-water cream is prepared from components (1) by heating
water, propylene glycol, and Tween 20 [polysorbate 20] to 70-80° C, and
20 then dissolving methylparaben and loperamide hydrochloride. The
ingredients in (2) are then melted together at 70-80° C, and mixture (1) is
added to mixture (2). The resulting composition is mixed until the cream
congeals.
Weight (%)
25 (1)
Loperamide hydrochloride 1.75
Propylene glycol 38.5
Methyl paraben 0.30
Tween 20 (Polysorbate) 3.50
30 Water 29.95
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-136-
10
15
20
25
(2)
White petrolatum
Stearyl alcohol
Isopropyl myristate
Liposorb S (sorbitan stearate)
Liposorb S 20 <polysorbate 60)
18.20
5.00
2.50
1.20
3.10
B. Alternatively, oil-in-water creams are prepared by heating water,
propylene glycol and polyethylene glycol 400 to 70-80° C and adding a
mixture of white petrolatum, stearyl alcohol and surfactant [also mixed at
70-80° C]. Then loperamide hydrochloride in benzyl alcohol is added and
finally hydroxyethyl cellulose [optional] is added and the pH is adjusted to
7.5 with an appropriate buffer.
30
(1)
Loperamide hydrochloride
Benzyl alcohol
Propylene glycol
Polyethylene glycol 400
White Petrolatum
Stearyl alcohol
Hydroxyethyl cellulose
Surfactant*
Water
Buffer to pH
(2)
Loperamide hydrochloride
Benzyl alcohol
Propylene glycol
Polyethylene glycol 400
White Petrolatum
Weight %
5.0
2.0
5.0
5.0
10.0
5.0
5.0
qs 100
7.5
Weight %
5.0
2.0
5.0
5.0
10.0
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-137-
Stearyl alcohol 5.0
Hydroxyethyl cellulose
Surfactant* 5.0
Water qs iqo
5 Buffer to adjust pH 7.5
Surfactant may be selected from, but not limited to, the following
three systems: Steareth 2 plus steareth 21, or sorbitan monooleate
plus polyoxyl 40 stearate, or poloxamer.
EXAMPLE 5
10 Prepararation of water washable gels
A water-washable gel is prepared by adding Transcutol [diethylene
glycol monoethyl ether] to propylene glycol, then dissolving the parabens
and loperamide hydrochloride. Then water and Natrosol are added and
mixed well until the mixture gels.
15 Weight %
Loperamide hydrochloride 4.00
Propylene glycol 55.00
Transcutol (diethylene glycol monoethyl ether) 5.00
Natrosol 250 HHX (hydroxyethyl cellulose) 2.00
20 Methyl paraben 0.18
Propyl paraben 0.02
Water 33.80
EXAMPLE 6
25 Preparation of aqueous gels
Aqueous gels are prepared by mixing loperamide hydrochloride,
benzyl alcohol [and optionally propylene glycol and polyethylene glycol
400 as indicated in the ingredients list], adding to buffered water, and
then adding hydroxyethyl cellulose with stirring until the mixture gels.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-138-
A. Weight %
Loperamide hydrochloride 5.0
Benzyl alcohol 2.0
Propylene glycol
5 Polyethylene glycol 400
Hydroxyethyl cellulose 1.5
Water qs 100
Buffer to pH 6.5
10 B. Weight %
Loperamide hydrochloride 5.0
Benzyl alcohol 2.0
Propylene glycol
Polyethylene glycol 400
15 Hydroxyethyl cellulose 1.5
Water qs 100
Buffer to pH 7.5
C. Weight %
20 Loperamide hydrochloride 5.0
Benzyl alcohol 2.0
Propylene glycol
Polyethylene glycol 400
Hydroxyethyl cellulose 1.5
25 Water qs 100
Buffer to pH 8.5
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-139-
D - Weight %
Loperamide hydrochloride 5.0
Benzyl alcohol 2.0
Propylene glycol 5.0
5 Polyethylene glycol 400
Hydroxyethyl cellulose 1.5
Water qs too
Buffer to pH 7 5
E - Weight %
10 Loperamide hydrochloride 5.0
Benzyl alcohol 2.0
Propylene glycol 5.0
Polyethylene glycol 400 5.0
Hydroxyethyl cellulose 1.5
15 Water qs 10 0
Buffer to pH 7.5
EXAMPLE 7
Preparation of polyethylene glycol water-washable ointments
Polyethylene glycol water-washable ointments are prepared by
mixing loperamide hydrochloride in benzyl alcohol and propylene glycol,
adding polyethylene glycol 400 and 3350 and adjusting to pH 7.5 with
buffer.
Example 7A Weight %
25 Loperamide hydrochloride 5.0
Benzyl alcohol 5.0
Propylene glycol 5.0
Polyethylene glycol 3350 40.0
Polyethylene glycol 400 qs 100
30 Buffer to pH 7.5
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
— 140-
Exampte 7B Weight %
Loperamide hydrochloride 2.5
Benzyl alcohol 5.0
Propylene glycol 5.0
5 Polyethylene glycol 3350 40.0
Polyethylene glycol 400 qs 100
Buffer to pH 7.5
Example 7C Weight %
10 Loperamide hydrochloride 1.0
Benzyl alcohol 5.0
Propylene glycol 5.0
Polyethylene glycol 3350 40.0
Polyethylene glycol 400 qs 100
15 Buffer to pH 7.5
EXAMPLE 7D
INGREDIENTS
7D1
7D2
7D3
7D4
7D5
White Petroleum,
USP
85.00
86.00
Mineral Oil, USP
10.00
Benzyl Alcohol,
NF
10.00
5.00
2.00
3.00
Propylene
Glycol, USP
20.00
15.00
15.00
5.00
PEG 400, NF
35.00
47.50
52.00
PEG 3350, USP
30.00
30.00
30.00
Loperamide
hydrochloride
(Micronized)
5.00
Loperamide
hydrochloride
(non-micronized)
5.00
2.5
1.0
1.00
WO 97/09973
PCT7US96/14727
— 141-
10
15
20
25
30
| INGREDIENTS
7D1
7D2
7D3 7D4
7D5
Gly carol
Monostearate,
!*
" 1
5.00
EXAMPLE 7E
WO 97/09973
PCT7US96/14727
-142-
EXAMPLE 7E
inuncuicii ■ w
# C 1
/ CO
/ C*r
PEG 20 Corn
Glycerides
5.00
Loperamide
hydrochloride
(Non-Micronized)
1.75
1 .50
4.00
Loperamide
hydrochloride
(Micronized)
0.50
Triethanolamine
0.1 5
0.10
10
EXAMPLE 7F
INGREDIENTS
7F1
7F2
7F3
7F4
7F5
7F6
7F7
Stearyl Alcohol,
NF
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
15
White
Petrolatum, (JSP
10.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
Polyoxye thylene
21 Stearyl Ether
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1 .00
1.00
1.00
20
Polyoxyethylene
2 Stearyl Ether
1 .20
1.20
1 .20
1.20
1.20
1.20
1.20
Purified Water,
Part 1 USP
54.75
54.60
54.60
64.80
69.30
68.80
67.30
25
Sodium
Phosphate
Monobasic, USP
0.85
0.36
0.50
Sodium
Phosphate
Dibasic, ACS
0.20
0.74
30
Sodium
Phosphate
Tribasic, ACS
0.60
Propylene
Glycol, USP
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-143-
EXAMPLE 7F
INGREDIENTS
\ 7F1
7F2
7F3
7F4
7F5
7F6
7F7
Benzyl Alcohol,
NF
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
Hydroxy e thyl
Cellulose 250
HHX
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
Polyethylene
Glycol 400, NF
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
Loperamide
hydrochloride
(Micronized)
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
0.50
1.00
2.50
Purified Water II
USP
5.00
5.00
5.00
Sodium
Hydroxide, 10 %
Solution, NF
4.00
4.10
4.10
pH
-6 !
-1
~8
EXAMPLE 7G
INGREDIENTS
7G1
7G2
7G3
7G4
7G5
7G6
Stearyl Alcohol, NF
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
White Petrolatum,
USP
10.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
Polyoxyethylene 2 1
Stearyl Ether
1 .00
1.00
1.00
1.00
Polyoxyethylene 2
Stearyl Ether
1 .20
1.20
1.20
1.20
Purified Water, Part 1
USP
54.60
60.55
38.00
51.20
44.70
36.95
Sodium Phosphate
Monobasic, USP
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.85
Sodium Phosphate
Dibasic, USP
0.20
Sodium Phosphate
Tribasic, USP
0.60
0.60
0.60
WO 97/09973 PCT/US96/14727
-144-
EXAMPLE 7G
INGREDIENTS
7G1
7G2
7G3
7G4
7G5
7G6
Borax
—
—
—
0.50
—
—
0.1 M HCI
4.00
Propylene Glycol,
USP
5.00
5.00
45.00
5.00
5.00
45.00
5
Benzyl Alcohol, NF
2.00
2.00
10.00
2.00
2.00
10.00
Hydroxyethyl
Cellulose 250 HHX
1.00
1.00
2.00
1.00
0.50
2.00
Transcutol
...
10. OO
...
10
Polyethylene Glycol
400, NF
5.00
5.00
—
5.00
5.00
—
Loperamide
h xiflm f*hifi riflt*
11 Y%J¥ \J\*I UlUt rw
(Micronized)
5.00
1.75
—
5.00
5.00
—
15
Loperamide
hydrochloride (Non-
Micronized)
5.00
5.00
Purified Water, Part
II USP
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.50
20
Sodium Hydroxide,
10% Solution, NF
4.10
1.40
4.10
4.00
pH(neat)
8.20
8.13
4.33
9.27
7.98
6.02
EXAMPLE 7H
INGREDIENTS
7H1
7H2
7H3
Loperamide
h ydrochloride
(Non-Micronized)
1.75
3.00
1.75
Propylene Glycol,
USP
38.50
38.50
38.50
Mothylparaben, NF
0.30
0.30
0.30
Polysorbate 20
3.50
3.50
3.50
Purified Water
25.80
24.55
1 5.00
Petrolatum, USP
18.20
18.20
18.20
WO 97/09973
PCTYUS96/14727
-145-
EXAMPLE 7H
INGREDIENTS
7H1
7H2
7H3
Stearyl Alcohol, NF
5.00
5.00
5.00
Isopropyl Myristate
2.50
2.50
2.50
Sorb/tan Stearate
1.20
1.20
1 .20
rolysorbate 60
3.10
3.10
3.10
Purified Water
Sodium Phosphate
Monobasic, ACS
0.50
Sodium Phosphate
Tribasic, ACS
0.60
Triethanolamine
0.15
0.15
50%
Triethanolamine
3.00
pH(neat)
5.45
5.45
8.10
1 5 EXAMPLE 71
INGREDIENTS
711
712
713
714
715
Stearyl Alcohol,
NF
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
White Petrolatum,
USP
10.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
Polyoxyethylene
2 1 Stearyl Ether
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
Polyoxyethylene 2
Stearyl Ether
1.20
1 .20
1.20
1.20
Purified Water,
Part 1 USP
38.50
66.80
65.00
59.60
59.50
Sodium
Phosphate
Monobasic, USP
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.20
Sodium
Phosphate
Dibasic, USP
0.90
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
— 146-
EXAMPLE 71
INGREDIENTS
711
712
713
714
7I5
Sodium
Phosphate
Trihn c/r f /CP
# rlDBSIC, W3r
0.60
0.60
0.60
5
Propylene Glycol,
USP
45.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
Benzyl Alcohol,
NF
10.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
10
Hydroxyeth yl
Cellulose 250
HHX
2.00
1.00
1 .00
1 .00
1.00
Polyethylene
Glycol 400, NF
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
15
Loperamide
hydrochloride
(Micronized)
1.00
2.00
5.00
5.00
Loperamide
hydrochloride
(Non-Micronized)
4.5
20
Sodium
Hydroxide, 10%
Solution, NF
0.90
1 .70
4.10
4.20
pH(neat)
4.16
8.55
8.53
8.69
7.45
25 EXAMPLE 7J
INGREDIENTS
7J1
7J2
7J3
7J4
7J5
Glyceryl
Monostearate,
NF
5.0
Stearyl Alcohol,
NF
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
White
Petrolatum, USP
10.0
10.0
85.0
10.0
10.0
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-147-
EXAMPLE 7J
INGREDIENTS
7J1
7J2
7 1^
/ JO
*7 1/1
TIC
/Jo
Polyoxyethylene
21 Stearyl Ether
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
(HLB - 15)
5
Polyoxyethylene
2 Stearyl Ether
(HLB ~ 5)
1.2
1.2
—
1.2
1.2
Purified Water,
USP
59.56
59.2
— -
68.12
64.2
10
Sodium
Phosphate
Monobasic, NF
0.2
0.2
1 O
Sodium
Phosphate
Dibasic
(Anhydrous),
USP
0.5
1.3
—
1.3
1.3
20
Sodium
Phosphate
Tribasic, USP
0.64
—
—
—
—
Propylene
Glycol, USP
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
1 .0
10% Sodium
Hydroxide, NF
4.1
4.1
—
0.16
4.1
Polyethylene
Glycol 400, NF
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
Hydroxyethyl
Cellulose
2S0HHX, NF
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
30
Benzyl Alcohol,
NF
2.0
2.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
Loperamide
hydrochloride
(Micronized)
5.0
5.0
2.0
0.2
5.0
35
pH
8.42
7.70
7.54
7.58
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-148-
EXAMPLE 7K
INGREDIENTS
7K1
7K2
7K3
7K4
7K5
7K6
Stearyl Alcohol, NF
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
White Petrolatum,
USP
10.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
Polyoxyethylane 21
Stearyl Ether
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
Polyoxyethylene 2
Stearyl Ether
1 .20
1.20
1 .20
1.20
1.20
1.20
Sodium Phosphate
Monobasic, USP
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
Sodium Phosphate
Dibasic, USP
1.30
1.30
1 .30
1.30
1.30
1.30
Sodium Hydroxide,
NF, 10% Solution
♦
*
0.16
*
4.10
*
Propylene Glycol,
USP
1 .00
1.00
1 .00
1.00
1 .00
1.00
Benzyl Alcohol, NF
1 .00
1.00
1 .00
1.00
1.00
1 .00
Hydroxyethyl
Cellulose 250 HHX
1.00
1.00
1 .00
1.00
1 .00
1.00
th is/a J? A
400, NF
r nn
r nn
r nn
r nn
r nn
r nn
Loperamide
h ydrochloride
(Micronized)
0.008
0.04
0.20
1.00
5.00
20.00
Purified Water, USP
* *
• *
72.94
* *
64.20
* *
Hydrochloric Acid,
NF, 3M
TOTAL
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
00.0
30
* Sodium hydroxide was added as required to adjust pH to 7.5.
** Purified water, USP, was added as required to bring total to 100.0%.
WO 97/09973
PCTYUS96/14727
-149-
EXAMPLE 7L
INGREDIENTS
7L1
7L2
7L3
7L4
7L5
| 7L6
7L7
Glyceryl
Monostearate, NF
—
—
—
—
—
5.0
—
5
Stearyl Alcohol,
USP
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
White Petrolatum,
USP
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
87.0
10.0
10
Polyoxyethylene
21 Stearyl Ether
(HLB -15)
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Polyoxyeth ylene
2 Stearyl Ether
(HLB ~ 5)
—
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
—
1 .2
15
Purified Water,
USP
40.0
59.85
60.66
60.80
60.50
—
65.50
Sodium
Phosphate
Monobasic, USP
—
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.2
—
0.2
20
Sodium
Phosphate
Dibasic
(Anhydrous), USP
1.3
1 .3
25
Sodium
Phosphate
Tribasic, USP
—
0.65
0.64
0.6
—
—
—
Propylene Glycol,
USP
46.80
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
1.0
30
10% Sodium
Hydroxide, NF
4.7
4.3
4.1
4.1
4.1
Polye th ylene
Glycol 400, NF
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
3M Hydrochloric
Acid
4.1
3.8
3.8
3.7
3.7
35
0.05 M
Hydrochloric Acid
0.7
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-150-
EXAMPLE 7L
INGREDIENTS
7L1
7L2
7L3
7L4
7L5
7L6
7L7
Hydroxyethyl
Cellulose
250HHX, NF
2.1
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Benzyl Alcohol,
NF
10.4
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
1.0
pH
4.24
8.98
8.54
7.96
7.65
7.59
Example 7M
10 This example is directed to the preparation of the compositions
described in Examples 7J5 and 7L.
i. Into a vessel were weighed purified water, sodium phosphate
monobasic and sodium phosphate dibasic. To this mixture were added
propylene glycol and sodium hydroxide. The resulting mixture was mixed
15 with a high speed propeller mixer until a clear solution was obtained.
With continuous mixing, hydroxyethyl cellulose was added. Mixing was
continued until a gel was formed.
ii. Into a separate vessel were weighed stearyl alcohol, white
petrolatum and polyoxyethylene stearyl ether. The mixtures from Steps i
20 and ii were each heated to approximately 70°C.
iii. While mixing, the mixture from Step ii was added to the
mixture from Step A. The resulting mixture was homogenized for
approximately 10 minutes. With continuous mixing, benzyl alcohol was
added, and the resulting mixture was homogenized for approximately 5
25 minutes.
iv. Into a separate container was weighed polyethylene glycol 400
and loperamide. This mixture was mixed until a smooth paste was
achieved. With continuous mixing using a Silverson mixer, the mixture
from Step iii was added to the loperamide/PEG mixture. The resulting
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
— 151 —
mixture was mixed for approximately 10 minutes. Water bath cooling,
during which time Silverson mixing and side scraping were performed,
provided the compositions of Examples 7J5 and 7L.
EXAMPLE 8
5 Yeast-Induced Inflammation
A Randall-Selitto assay [see, Randall et ah (1957) Arch. Int.
Pharmacodvn. 111:409-419] was performed to determine the effect of
loperamide upon the pain threshold of the yeast-injected left hind paw of
male Sprague-Dawley rats.
10 Each rat was injected with 100 /vl of a 20% yeast solution into the
plantar surface of the left hind paw. Four hours later loperamide was
administered at 10, 50 or 250 //g/1 00 ^l/rat in a vehicle of 10% DMSO
[n = 10/dose group]. Control rats were treated with 10% DMSO alone
[n = 20]. The pain thresholds of the inflamed and non-inflamed paws
15 were measured by application of a pressure stimulus to the paw and the
paw pressure threshold in gram [g] was recorded.
As shown in the following table, loperamide produced a dose-
dependent increase in the paw pressure threshold.
Dose, fig Paw Pressure Threshold, g
20 10 66 ± 15
50 124 ± 29
250 153 ± 25
EXAMPLE 9
This example includes a description of experiments which were
25 conducted to measure the in vitro penetration of the five compositions
prepared in Example 7J in "stripped" and intact human cadaver skin. The
study determined cumulative penetration over 24 hrs and skin tissue
distribution at 24 hrs.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-152-
Example
No. *
LDpeianiiue
Concentration
{%)
Composition
Description
Skin Type
7J4 (5)
0.2
Cream
Intact
7J4 (5) !
0.2
Cream
Stripped
7J5 (5)
5.0
Cream
Intact
7J5 (5)
5.0
Cream
Stripped
7J1 (6)
5.0
Cream
Intact
7J1 (6)
5.0
Cream
Stripped
7J1 (6)
5.0
Cream
Intact
7J2 (6)
5.0
Cream
Stripped
7J3 (5)
2.0
Pet. Ointment
Intact
7J3 (5)
2.0
Pet. Ointment
Stripped
15 *Number of replicates in parentheses.
14 C-Loperamide (s.a. 13.20 mCi/mmol) was provided by New England
Nuclear (Billerica, MA).
Compositions were spiked with 14 C-loperamide and mixed
20 thoroughly with a spatula. Compositions were prepared and spiked
immediately prior to application to the skin chamber. Compositions were
tested for uniform specific activity by liquid scintillation counting.
Set up
Franz static diffusion chambers were filled with a 4% BSA isotonic
25 buffered saline solution (6-10 ml_ reservoir volume) and equilibrated to a
temperature of 37°C by a circulating water pump. Excised human
cadaver skin (approximately 200 micron split thickness) was placed onto
each chamber. The skin surface area for each chamber was
approximately 1.77 cm 2 . Five or six replicates were run for each group,
30 as indicated in the Table above. Skin from a single human donor was
used for the study.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-153-
Design of Experiment
Samples were obtained for cumulative penetration at 0, 1, 3,6, and
24 hours. Tissue recovery was measured at 24 hours.
Composition Application
5 A Gilson Microman positive displacement pipet was used to apply
30 mg (16.9 mg/cm 2 ) of test formulation to each chamber.
Time Points
Samples of 1 .0 mL were taken with a Gilson Pipetman at time
points of 0, 1,3,6 and 24 hours. The samples were placed in a vial
10 containing Ecoscint scintillation fluor. At each time point, the 1 .0 mL
volume was replaced with the BSA saline solution.
Washes and Gauze Swipes
To recover excess formulation from the skin surface, the skin was
first washed with three 1.0 mL volumes of 2% Oleth-20 in water and
15 retained for counting. The skin was then gently wiped with 3 separate
cotton gauzes which were saved and counted.
Skin Compartment Determinations
The skin removed from the chamber was tape-stripped with
cellophane tape until "glistening" (approximately 22 strips). The first two
20 strips that removed the excess loperamide adhering to the outer surface
of the stratum corneum were counted separately. These counts were
included in total recovery, but excluded from stratum corneum
compartment recovery. Four groups each consisting of five consecutive
tape strips were placed in a scintillation vial containing Scintilene. Dermis
25 and epidermis were separated by microwave technique and placed in vials
containing ReadyProt cocktail for tissue digestion. All sample were
counted in a Beckman LSC counter and corrected for quenching.
Recovery in the reservoir, washes, gauze wipes, and the respective skin
compartments was calculated by determining the percentage of the total
30 scintillation counts (SO applied that were recovered. The microgram
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-154-
recovery was calculated based on the specific activity (SA) of each test
composition. The mean % of microgram recovery was calculated,
discarding those values in each group that exceeded the mean ± three
standard deviations.
5 The overall effectiveness of the test formulations is summarized in
Tables A - D, which show: the percent (Tables A and B) and micrograms
{jjg) (Tables C and D); combined recovery in the reservoir, dermis and
epidermis (Tables A and C); and reservoir, dermis, epidermis and stratum
corneum (Tables B and D). The cumulative penetration into the lower
10 reservoir is presented as percent (Table E) and micrograms (/yg) (Table F).
TABLE A
Relative
Effectiveness
Composition
Example
No. (Skin type)
Composition
Description
Loperamide
Concentration {%)
Total SC
(Reservoir,
Epidermis
and
Dermis)
(%)
1
7J3 (Stripped)
Ointment
2.0
9.4
2
7J4 (Stripped)
Cream
0.2
5.8
3
7J1 (Stripped)
Cream
5.0
5.5
4
7J4 (Intact)
Cream
0.2
4.4
5
7J2 (Stripped)
Cream
5.0
4.3
6
7J5 (Stripped)
Cream
5.0
3.6
7
7J5 (Intact)
Cream
5.0
3.4
8
7J3 (Intact)
Ointment
2.0
3.2
9
7J1 (Intact)
Cream
5.0
3.0
10
7J2 (Intact)
Cream
5.0
2.3
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-155-
TABLE B
10
15
Relative
Effectiveness
Example
No. (Skin type)
Composition
Description
Loperamide
Concentration
(%)
T n . B | CP
i oxai ad
(Reservoir,
Epidermis,
Dermis and
Stratum
Corneum) (%)
1
7J3 (Stripped)
Ointment
2.0
9.4
2
7J4 (Intact)
Cream
0.2
3
7J4 (Stripped)
Cream
0.2
5.8
4
7J1 (Stripped)
Cream
5.0
5.5
5
7J3 (Intact)
Ointment
2.0
4.7
6
7J2 (Stripped)
Cream
5.0
4.3
7
7J5 (Intact)
Cream
5.0
4.1
8
7J5 (Stripped)
Cream
5.0
3.6
9
7J1 (Intact)
Cream
5.0
3.6
10
7J2 (Intact)
Cream
5.0
2.7
TABLE C
20
25
Relative
Effectiveness
Example No.
(Skin type)
Composition
Description
Loperamide
Concentration
(%)
Total 5C
(Reservoir,
Epidermis and
Dermis)
(Micrograms)
1
7J1 Stripped
Cream
5.0
82.8
2
7J2 Stripped
Cream
5.0
65.2
3
7J3 Stripped
Ointment
2.0
56.5
4
7J5 Stripped
Cream
5.0
54.7
5
7J5 Intact
Cream
5.0
50.6
6
7J1 Intact
Cream
5.0
44.8
7
7J2 Intact
Cream
5.0
33.8
8
7J3 Intact
Ointment
2.0
19.3
9
7J4 Stripped
Cream
0.2
3.5
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-156-
TABLE C
Relative
Effectiveness
Example No.
(Skin type)
Composition
Description
Loperamide
Concentration
(%)
Total 5C
(Reservoir,
Epidermis and
Dermis)
(Micrograms)
10
7J4 Intact
Cream
0.2
2.6
TABLE D
Relative
Effectiveness
Example No.
(Skin type)
Composition
Description
Loperamide
Concentration
<%)
Total SC
(Reservoir,
Epidermis,
Dermis and
Stratum
Corneum) {fig)
1
7J1 Stripped
Cream
5.0
82.8
2
7J2 Stripped
Cream
5.0
65.2
3
7J5 Intact
Cream
5.0
61 .7 j
4
7J3 Stripped
Ointment
2.0
56.5
5
7J5 Stripped
Cream
5.0
54.7
6
7J1 Intact
Cream
5.0
53.5
7
7J2 Intact
Cream
5.0
41 .2
8
7J3 Intact
Ointment
2.0
28.4
9
7J4 Intact
Cream
0.2
3.5
10
7J4 Stripped
Cream
0.2
3.5
20 TABLE E
Time (hr)
Composition Example No.
(Skin type)
0
1
3
6
24
7J4 (Intact)
0.00
±
0.00
0.22
±
0.1 1
0.66
±
0.31
0.85
±
0.40
1.36
±
0.61
WO 97/09973
PCI7US96/14727
-157-
TABLE E
5
Time (hr)
Composition Example No.
(Skin type)
0
1
3
6
24
7J4 (Stripped)
0.00
±
0.00
0.24
±
0.21
0.71
±
0.55
1.00
±
0.70
1.90
±
0.98
7J5 (Intact)
0.00
±
0.00
0.14
±
0.10
0.42
±
0.27
0.63
±
0.44
1.10
±
0.89
7J5 (Stripped)
0.00
±
0.00
0.31
±
0.27
0.78
±
0.56
1.04
±
0.70
1.84
±
1.17
7J1 (Intact)
0.00
±
0.00
0.15
±
0.12
0.49
±
0.33
0.69
±
0.48
1.05
±
0.64
7J1 (Stripped)
0.00
±
0.00
0.23
±
0.14
0.90
±
0.59
1.39
±
0.98
2.63
±
1.55
7J2 (Intact)
0.00
±
0.00
0.1 1
±
0.06
0.29
+
0.17
0.37
±
0.21
0.69
±
0.38
7J2 (Stripped)
0.00
±
0.00
0.33
±
0.19
1.07
±
0.89
1.65
±
0.98
2.61
±
1.10
7J3 (Intact)
0.00
±
0.00
0.01
±
0.00
0.05
±
0.03
0.12
±
0.08
0.76
±
0.42
7J3 (Stripped)
0.00
±
0.00
0.04
±
0.01
0.26
±
0.15
0.64
±
0.33
3.18
±
0.89
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-158-
TABLE F
Time (hr)
Example No. (Skin type)
0
1
3
6
24
7J4 (Intact)
U.U
0. 1
0.4
0.5
0.8
±
±
±
±
±
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.4
7J4 (Stripped)
0.0
0.1
0.4
0.6
1.1
±
±
±
±
0.0
0.1
0.3
0.4
0.6
7J5 (Intact)
0.0
2.1
6.3
9.4
1 6.5
+
+
4-
+
0.0
1 R
4 1
1 T "3
i o . o
7J5 (Stripped)
0.0
4.7
1 1 .6
1 5.6
27.5
+
+
■+-
-f-
o o
4 o
R
17 K
I / ,%J
7J1 (Intact)
0.0
2.2
7.3
1 0.3
1 5.8
+
+
o o
1 9
/ • o
Q fi
7J1 (Stripped)
0.0
3.4
1 3.4
20.8
39.5
±
±
+
+
o o
2 1
R R
14 7
7J2 (Intact)
0.0
1 6
4 "3
1 O 4
±
±
±
±
±
0.0
0.8
2.6
3.2
5.7
7J2 (Stripped)
0.0
5.0
16.0
24.7
39.1
±
±
±
±
±
0.0
2.8
13.3
14.7
16.5
7J3 (Intact)
0.0
0.0
0.3
0.7
4.6
±
±
±
±
±
0.0
0.0
0.2
0.5
2.5
7J3 (Stripped)
0.0
0.2
1.5
3.8
19.1
±
±
±
±
±
0.0
0.1
0.9
2.0
5.4
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-159-
EXAMPLE 10
This example includes a description of in vitro studies that were
conducted to evaluate the inhibition by loperamide and morphine of
[ 3 H]diprenorphine binding to human mu (//) opiate receptors.
5 Membranes of CHO cells expressing human jj opiate receptors were
incubated with [ 3 H]diprenorphine (1.0 nM) for 60 min at room
temperature in the presence of increasing concentrations of agonist in
50 mM Tris-HCI, pH 7.8, containing protease inhibitors. After incubation,
the mixtures were passed through GF/B filters that had been pretreated
10 with polyethylenimine and bovine serum albumin. The filters were washed
with cold Tris-HCI buffer and radioactivity was determined by scintillation
spectroscopy.
Three experiments were conducted (n = 3). As measured by
displacement of specific [ 3 H]diprenorphine binding, loperamide has a high
15 affinity for the human /j opiate receptor, (average is 3 nM); whereas,
the average Ki of morphine was 1 9 nM. Loperamide also has a lower
affinity for both the human 6 receptor (average K t of 48 nM) and the
human k receptor (average K ; of 1 160 nM). Binding experiments with
1 5 nonopiate receptors confirmed that loperamide is highly selective for
20 the // opiate receptor. Results of one of the experiments involving the fj
opitate receptor are set forth in Figure 1 .
EXAMPLE 11
Assessment of the effect of loperamide administered into the paw on
formalin-induced nociception
25 A. Model
Administration of formalin into the paw results in a localized
inflammation and in spontaneous flinching behavior. This response is
indicative of pain. Flinching responses include paw lifting and paw
shaking, and are characterized by a rapid vibration of the paw after
30 drawing it under the body. The flinching response can be reliably
quantitated and exhibits two peaks of activity which are indicative of
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-160-
acute and tonic pain. The early or acute phase lasts from 0-5 minutes
post-formalin and is followed by a quiescent period lasting approximately
15 minutes. The tonic phase occurs form 20-35 minutes following
formalin injection and is the interval where the number of flinching
5 responses is maximal. This model has been characterized in several
species and is sensitive to the analgesic effects of opiates administered
by a variety of routes, including local administration directly into the paw.
B. Methods
1. Induction of inflammation
10 Male Sprague-Dawley rats weighing 70-90 g were used.
Inflammation was induced by subcutaneous injection of 50 fj\ of a 5%
formalin solution into the dorsal surface of the right hind paw.
Flinching behavior was quantitated by counting the number of
responses that occurred during the tonic phase of pain, lasting from 20-
15 35 minutes after formalin injection. Results are expressed as the mean
percent antagonism of formalin-induced flinching calculated for individual
drug-treated, formalin-injected rats using the following formula:
(mean formalin response - mea n saline re spon se)- individual response x 100
mean formalin response-mean saline response
in which the mean formalin response is the mean behavioral score of
20 vehicle-treated and formalin-injected rats. The mean saline response is
the pooled behavior score from rats injected with 50 fj\ of saline into the
paw.
2. Drugs and drug delivery
Loperamide [Research Biochemicals Inc., Natick, MAI was
25 administered at doses of 1 , 3, 10, 30, 100 or 300 yyg/50 //I of a 20%
cremophor EF vehicle [BASF, Rahway, NJ] to groups of rats [7-9 per dose
group]. Injections of drug were given into the dorsal surface of the paw
at 10 minutes prior to formalin injection, and were counterbalanced
across treatment groups.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-161-
C. Results
As shown in the following table, when inflammation-induced tonic
pain was produced by formalin injection into the paw, loperamide
produced a dose-dependent antinociception, as measured by a decrease
5 in flinching behaviors. At the highest dose of 300 fjg, practically no
flinching behavior was observed.
Summary of the effect of loperamide or formalin-induced inflammation
Dose, fjg
% Antagonism of Late Phase Flinching
1
20 ±7
3
53 ± 10
10
55 ± 15
30
74 ± 10
100 |
75 ± 1 1
300 !
97 ± 2
Data are the mean ± SEM
D. Conclusions
These data indicate the following:
20 1 ) Loperamide administered directly into the paw reduces
the pain associated with formalin-induced inflammation.
2) The effect of loperamide is dose-dependent, with
greater antinociception occurring at higher doses.
EXAMPLE 12
25 This example describes in vivo studies that were conducted to
evaluate the antagonism by loperamide and morphine of late phase
formalin-induced flinching.
Inflammation was induced in rats by subcutaneous injection of 50
jjL of a 5% formalin solution into the dorsal surface of the right hind paw.
30 Loperamide and morphine were injected s.c. into the dorsal surface of the
right hind paw, hereinafter referred to as an intrapaw (i.paw) injection.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-162-
Loperamide was administered at various doses in a 20% cremophor EL
vehicle. Loperamide was injected i.paw at 10 min prior to formalin
injection. Flinching behavior was quantitated by counting the number of
flinching responses that occurred during the tonic phase of pain, lasting
5 from 20 to 35 min, respectively, after formalin injection. Results are
expressed graphically in Figure 2 as the mean percent antagonism (% A)
of formalin-induced flinching calculated for individually treated, formalin-
injected rats.
When inflammation-induced tonic pain was produced by formalin
10 injection into the paw, loperamide produced a dose-dependent
antinociception in the second phase of flinching, as measured by a
decrease in flinching responses, with an A 50 of 6 fig, as compared to an
A 50 of 72 /vg for morphine. Full efficacy was achieved at the highest dose
of 300 jjg, where practically no flinching behavior was observed. In
15 Figure 2, each data point is the mean± SEM of the average number of
flinches per 5 min observation interval.
Administration of loperamide i.paw at a dose of 100 /jg resulted in
long-lasting antinociception (see Figure 3). In this study, loperamide was
injected at various times prior to (negative times in Figure 3) or 10 min
20 after i.paw injection of 50 />L of 5% formalin. The antinociception
produced by loperamide was substantially immediate when administered
at 10 min after formalin injection and 10 min before observation.
Loperamide was efficacious when administered up to 6 hours prior to
formalin injection. Also as shown in Figure 3, control rats were injected
25 with vehicle. Each data point is the mean ± SEM of the average number
of flinches per 5 min observation interval.
The effects of loperamide at doses of 0.3, 3, 30 and 300 pg on
early phase flinching were studied to evaluate possible local anesthetic
effects and to confirm the peripheral nature of the antihyperalgesia
30 produced by the compound. This study is depicted graphically in
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-163-
Figure 4. Inspection of Figure 4 reveals that no significant effects of
loperamide on early phase flinching were observed at any of the doses
tested. Also shown in Figure 4 is injection of control rats with formalin in
vehicle (veh-form) and vehicle alone (veh-veh). Each data point in Figure
5 4 is the mean ± SEM of the average number of flinches per 5 min
observation interval.
The peripheral selectivity of the antihyperalgesia produced by
loperamide in the formalin assay was demonstrated also in a study in
which ipsilateral injection of loperamide was performed into the same paw
10 as formalin and contralateral injection was performed in the paw opposite
to formalin. This is depicted in Figure 5 which shows that loperamide at
a dose of 100/;g i.paw exhibited antihyperalgesia activity when injected
ipsilateral to formalin, but failed to produce antinociception when injected
into the paw contralateral to formalin. If loperamide possessed central or
15 systemic analgesic activity as a result of i.paw injection, antinociception
would be observed also when loperamide was injected into the paw
opposite to the one injected with formalin. Each data point in Figure 5 is
the mean ± SEM of the average number of flinches per 5 min observation
interval.
20 The studies which are described above and depicted graphically in
Figures 2 to 5 demonstrate that loperamide administered directly into the
paw reduces the pain associated with formalin-induced hyperalgesia.
Loperamide has no action on early phase flinching and does not produce
antinociception when injected into the contralateral paw, confirming the
25 peripheral antihyperalgesic selectivity of the compound.
EXAMPLE 13
This example includes a description of Freund's complete adjuvant
(FCA)-induced hyperalgesia tests.
Hyperalgesia in response to inflammation was measured by
30 determining the paw pressure threshold (PPT), measured in grams, of
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-164-
inflamed and non-inflamed paws of rats. Loperamide was injected
intraplantar (i.pl.) 24 hours after i.pl. injection of 150/vL modified FCA,
which corresponds to the time that inflammation and hyperalgesia due to
FCA injection have reached a maximum. Loperamide at a dose of 100pg
5 produced an attenuation of the hyperalgesia induced by FCA which lasted
from 15 min to 4 hours after a single injection (see Figure 6). In Figure 6,
each data point is the mean ± SEM PPT in grams at the respective time
interval. Basal PPT values prior to drug administration were 46 ± 2 g,
inflamed paw, and 91 ± 5 g uninflamed paw (n = 5 to 1 1). The ED 50 for
10 loperamide in this model was 20 jjg when evaluated at 2 hours following
injection, which is the peak time for antihyperalgesia induced by
loperamide (see Figure 7). No antinociception was observed in the
uninflamed paw at up to 300 //g. With respect to the data graphed in
Figure 7, loperamide was administered at doses of 1, 10, 30, 100 and
15 300 /jg (n = 4 to 1 1), injected i.pl 24 hours following FCA injection. PPT
in grams was measured 2 hours after drug injection. Control rats were
injected with the appropriate vehicles. Data are expressed in Figure 7 as
the percent increase over basal PPT values.
In separate tests, loperamide also demonstrated antihyperalgesic
20 activity in studies using carrageenan or yeast as the inflammatory
stimulus.
EXAMPLE 14
This example includes a description of studies that demonstrate the
antihyperalgesic effect of loperamide on tape stripping induced
25 hyperalgesia.
The right hind paws of anesthetized rats were treated by depilation
with commercial hair remover followed by application and removal of
Scotch Brand 810 tape a total of 20 times to remove the stratum
corneum and to produce hyperalgesia. At 24 hours following tape
30 stripping, hyperalgesia was quantitated by measuring paw pressure
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-165-
thresholds (PPT) prior to and following injection of loperamide in
conscious rats. Loperamide at a dose of 100/yg was injected i.paw and
PPTs were measured at various times following injection. Antinociception
was observed at 15 min, 30 min, and 1 hour following injection (see
5 Figure 8). In Figure 8, each data point is the mean ± SEM PPT. Basal
PPT values prior to loperamide administration were 35 ± 5 g for the
inflamed paw, and 88 ± 5 g for the uninflamed paw.
A dose response relationship for the antagonism by loperamide of
the tape stripping induced is depicted in Figure 9. Loperamide at doses of
10 10, 30, 100 and 300 yug were injected i.paw 24 hours following tape
stripping, and PPTs were measured 15 min after each injection. Data are
expressed as the mean ± SEM of the % maximal possible effect (%MPE).
The ED 50 for loperamide was 72 jjq when measured at 1 5 min after
intrapaw injection (see Figure 9).
15 EXAMPLE 15
The procedures described in Examples 1 5 to 18 correspond
substantially to the methods set forth in Stokbroekx et aL (1973) J. Med.
Chem. 16:782-786 [see also e.g. . U.S. Patent No. 3,714,159].
Demonstratrations of clinical efficacy for the treatment of hyperalgesia
20 This example includes a description of human in vivo studies which
demonstrate the antihyperalgesic activity of the compositions.
A. Treatment of abrasions
In separate experiments, two white males, ages 54 and 52,
generated an abrasion by the following procedure: a piece of 100 grit
25 sandpaper was folded over an index finger or a small block of wood so
that a rectangular surface of the sand paper approximately 50 x 15 mm or
130 x 40 mm, respectively, could be placed in contact with the skin. The
subjects drew the sandpaper back and forth a total of 60 times (30 times
in each direction) during a period of approximately 30 seconds over an
30 area of skin on the inside of the forearm, approximately midway between
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-166-
the wrist and the elbow. Sufficient downward pressure on the sand
paper was applied to produce a moderate stinging sensation throughout
the process. The treatment produced a reddened abraded area, but no
bleeding was observed. The stinging pain induced by the abrading
5 process subsided within an hour or two, but was replaced after 8 to 12
hours by hyperalgesia of the abraded area which was assessed by each
of the subjects running a finger lightly over the area, which continued to
be red and which also appeared inflamed.
Approximately 1 2 hours after the abrasion was induced, the
10 abraded area was divided into approximately two equal areas, separated
by an area approximately 1 cm wide. To one area was applied
approximately 0.2 grams of placebo cream and to the other area was
applied approximately 0.2 grams of a 5% cream formulation of
loperamide HCI. The 1 cm area separating the two equal areas of
15 application received nothing. The applications were done "double blind"
in that (1) a first individual weighed the placebo cream and the loperamide
cream, coded them by letter, and gave them to a second individual who
was unaware of the meaning of the letter coding; and (2) the second
individual applied the creams to the subject, who was also unaware of
20 the meaning of the letter coding.
The treated areas were separately covered with gauze bandages.
This method of occlusion, in conjunction with the untreated area
separating the two treated areas, effectively prevented the creams from
mixing with each other. Three hours after creams were applied, the
25 occlusive coverings were removed, excess cream was removed, and the
two areas were tested for hyperalgesia by tactile and/or thermal
stimulation. The subjects were able to distinguish clearly the degree of
hyperalgesia in the two areas. When the code was broken, the area that
had been selected as having less hyperalgesia was the area which had
30 received the loperamide cream.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-167-
B. Treatment of sunburn
A white, 49 year old female subject generated a controlled sunburn
by the following procedure: two adhesive bandages (2 inch x 3 inch)
were placed on the subject's abdomen separated by a 1 inch wide area of
5 exposed skin. The bandages were placed such that the long dimension (3
in) ran parallel to the longitudinal axis of the body. The exposed areas on
the abdomen (including the 1 in wide area between the two patches)
were then liberally covered with a commercial "sun block" cream and
then the excess cream was removed. The effect of this application was
10 to block exposure to sun in the entire area except for the two rectangular
areas protected by the adhesive bandages. The adhesive bandages were
then removed and the subject laid on her back with full exposure to the
sun for approximately 2 hours.
The two areas which were not protected by the sun block
15 developed typical sunburn-induced erythema and hyperalgesia. The
hyperalgesia was quite pronounced from hour 12 onward. At hour 18,
approximately 0.8 grams of placebo cream and 0.8 grams of a 5% cream
formulation of loperamide HCI were applied separately to the two
hyperalgesic areas. The application was performed "double blind" in that:
20 (1)a first individual weighed the placebo and loperamide-containing
creams, letter-coded them and gave them to a second individual who did
not know the meaning of the codes, (2) the second individual delivered
the coded samples to a third individual who also did not know the
meaning of the codes. Finally, the creams were applied to the
25 experimental subject who also did not know the meaning of the codes.
The codes were not broken until 24 hours after the experiment had been
completed.
Following application of the two creams, the two 2 in x 3 in test
sites were occluded by covering them with separate pieces of plastic
30 wrap and sealing the edges of the plastic wrap with adhesive tape. This
WO 97/09973
PCT7US96/14727
-168-
method of occlusion effectively prevented the creams from mixing with
each other. Three hours after the creams were applied, the occlusive
coverings were removed, the excess creams removed, and the two areas
tested for the degree of hyperalgesia by tactile stimulation. The
5 experimental subject was able to clearly distinguish the degrees of
hyperalgesia in the two adjacent areas. When the code was broken the
following day, the area that had been selected as having less hyperalgesia
was determined to have been the area which received the loperamide
cream.
10 C. Treatment of frostbite
A male of Asian origin, age 49, generated a frost bite-like condition
by the following procedure: a pellet of dry ice of approximately 1 0 to 15
mm of diameter was placed on the tip of each of two fingers of the right
hand of the subject for approximately 30 to 35 seconds. This treatment
15 resulted in the whitening of the skin over an area of approximately 50
mm 2 with stinging sensations and pain.
After approximately 1 8 to 20 hours, the tips of the fingers were
visually red and a stinging pain was produced when light pressure was
applied. To one of the fingers was applied approximately 0.1 grams of
20 placebo cream and to the other finger was applied approximately 0.1
grams of a 5% cream formulation of loperamide HCI. The applications
were done "double blind" in that: (1) a first individual weighed the
placebo and loperamide-containing creams, letter-coded them and gave
them to a second individual who did not know the meaning of the codes;
25 and (2) the second person applied the creams to the subject, who also did
not know the meaning of the codes.
The treatment areas were covered with bandages. After
approximately 2 hours of treatment, the subject was able to distinguish
clearly the degree of hyperalgesia in the two finger tips, especially when
30 the area was subjected to light pressure. When the code was broken, the
97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-169-
finger tip having less hyperalgesia was the one which received the
loperamide cream.
EXAMPLE 16
This Example is directed to the preparation of loperamide (4-(p-
chlorophenyl)-4-hydroxy-N,N-dimethyl-a,a-diphenyl-1-piperidinebutyramide
hydrochloride).
A. Preparation of 4-bromo-2,2-diphenylbutyric acid.
A mixture of 2 r 2-diphenyl-4-hydroxybutyric acid Hactone (600 g,
2.5 mol) and 48% HBr in AcOH (1200 ml) was stirred for 48 hrs. The
precipitate was collected by filtration, washed with H 2 0 and toluene and
crystallized from /-Pr 2 0 to give 4-bromo-2,2-diphenylbutyric acid (670 g,
84%), mp 135-137°C.
B. Preparation of dimethyl(tetrahydro-3,3-diphenyl-2-
furylidene)ammonium bromide
To a suspension of 4-bromo-2,2-diphenylbutyric acid from Step A
(227 g, 0.70 mol) in CHCI 3 (1500 ml) was added dropwise S0CI 2 (160
ml). This mixture was refluxed for 4 hrs and allowed to cool, and the
solvent was removed in vacuo. The crude 4-bromo-2,2-diphenylbutyroyl
chloride (227 g, 93%) was used without further purification. To a
solution of dimethylamine (54 g, 0.12 mol) and Na 2 C0 3 (25.4 g, 0.24
mol) in H 2 0 (100 ml) was added dropwise a solution of 4-bromo-2,2-
diphenylbutyroyl chloride (33.8 g, 0.1 mol) in toluene (100 ml), while the
temperature was maintained between 0 and 5°C. The mixture was stirred
for an additional 2 hrs and extracted with CHCI 3 . The organic layer was
dried (MgS0 4 ) and the solvent was removed in vacuo. The residue was
crystallized from /'- BuCOMc to give pure dimethyl-(tetrahydro-3,3-
diphenyl-2-furylidene)ammonium bromide. (17.3 g, 50%): mp 181-182°:
UV max (95% EtOH) 255 nm (540) and 261 (425); IR (KBr) 1675-1680
cm 1 (C = N>; nmr (CDCI 3 ) 6 3.03 (s, 3), 3.50 (t, 2), 3.8 (s, 3), 4.89 (t, 2),
and 7.51 ppm (s, 10).
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-170-
C. Preparation of 4-(p-chlorophenyl)-4-hydroxy-N,N-dimethyl-o,a-
diphenyl-1 -piperidinebutyramide hydrochloride
From a suspension of p-chlorophenyl-4-piperidinol (4.2 g, 0.02 mol)
and Na 2 C0 3 (8 g, 0.075 mol) in /'-BuCOMe (250 ml), the H 2 0 was
5 removed with the aid of a Dean-Stark trap. Then dimethyl(tetrahydro-3,3-
diphenyl-2-furylidene)ammonium bromide from Step B (7.6 g, 0.022 mol)
was added, and the mixture was refluxed for 2 hrs and filtered, and the
solvent was removed in vacuo. The residue was dissolved into /-PrOH
and neutralized with HCI gas. Crystallization from APrOH afforded pure 4-
10 (p-chlorophenyl)-4-hydroxy-N,N-dimethyl-o,a-dipehnyl-1 -
piperidinebutyramide hydrochloride (6 g, 58%); mp 222-223° C.
EXAMPLE 17
Compounds in the following Table were prepared using the
procedure described in Example 16 with the following changes:
15 dimethylamine was replaced with methylethylamine (compound 17A);
dimethylamine was replaced with pyrrolidine (compound 17B); and
dimethylamine was replaced with piperidine and p-chlorophenyl-4-
piperidinol was replaced with 4-phenyl-4-piperidinol (compound 17C):
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-171-
/
\
o
V R
6 Q
X
Compounds
1
R
17A
CI
/CH 3
N
V C2H 5
17B
CI
/
N
\
17C
H
O
EXAMPLE 18
This example is directed to the preparation of 4-(p-chlorophenyl)-4-
hydroxy-N-methyl-a,ar-diphenyl- 1 -piperidinebutyramide hydrochloride,
10 which has the following formula:
15
WO 97/09973
PCT7US96/14727
-172-
\\^NHCH
10
15
20
25
30
HCI
A. Preparation of N-(tetrahydro-3,3-diphenyl-2-furylidene)methylamine
hydrobromide.
To a mixture of 35% aqueous methylamine (100 g, 1.13 mol) and
Na 2 C0 3 (106 g, 1 mol) in H 2 0 (1000 ml) and toluene (800 ml) was added
dropwise 4-bromo-2,2-diphenylbutyroyl chloride (337.5 g, 1.13 mol) in
toluene (200 ml}, while the temperature was maintained between 0 and
5°C. The mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and the
precipitate was collected by filtration. The solid precipitate was then
taken up into CHCI 3 , the solution was dried (MgS0 4 ), and the solvent was
removed in vacuo. The residue was crystallized from /-BuCOMe (iso-
butylmethylketone) to afford pure N-(tetrahydro-3,3-diphenyl-2-
furylidene)methylamine hydrobromide (223 g, 67%), mp 159-1 61 °C.
B. Preparation of 4-chloro-N-methyl-2,2-diphenylbutyramide.
N-(Tetrahydro-3,3-diphenyl-2-furtylidene)methylamine hydrobromide
from Step A (33.2 g, 01 . mol) was converted to base using standard
methodology and dissolved in /-BuCOMe. This mixture was refluxed
while dry HCI gas was bubbled through for 30 min. The solvent was
removed in vacuo and the resulting residue was crystallized from /-Pr 2 0 to
give pure 4-chloro-N-methyl-2,2-diphenylbutyramide (20.2 g, 70%), mp
150-152°C.
C. Preparation of 4-(p-chlorophenyl)-4-hydroxy-N-methyl-a,o-diphenyl-
1 -piperidinebutyramide hydrochloride.
A suspension of 4-chloro-N-methyl-2,2-diphenylbutyramide (1.4 g,
0.005 mol), 4-p-chlorophenyl-4-piperidinol (2.12 g, 0.01 mol), and trace
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-173-
Kl in /-BuCOMe (50 ml) was refiuxed for 12 hrs. The reaction mixture
was worked-up as described in Example 16 to provide 4-fp-chlorophenyl)-
4-hydroxy-N-methyl-a,a-diphenyl-1-piperidinebutyramide hydrochloride
(0.8 g f 35%), mp 236-238°C.
5 EXAMPLE 19
This example is directed to the preparation of the methyl p-
toluenesulfonate salt of loperamide (4-(4-chlorophenyl)-4-hydroxy-N,N-
dimethyl-ff,ar-diphenyl-1 -piperidinebutanamide methyl p-toluenesulfonate) .
To a suspension of the free base of loperamide (prepared from the
10 corresponding hydrochloride salt and aqueous potassium carbonate, 0.95
g, 2 mmol) in acetone (20 mL) under a nitrogen atmosphere was added
methyl p-toluenesulfonate (1.8 g, 9.94 mmol). The reaction mixture was
then stirred at 25°C for 24 hrs and heated to reflux with stirring for 48
hrs. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and the
15 solvent was removed under reduced pressure to provide a gum. The gum
was triturated with 4-methyl-2-pentanone (/-BuCOMe) to furnish a white
solid which was recrystallized from 4-methyl-2-pentanone to provide the
loperamide methyl p-toluenesulfonate (0.75 g, 56%), mp 213-215°C.
EXAMPLE 20
20 This example includes a summary of comparative in vitro and in
vivo studies that were conducted using compounds that may be
employed in the methods and compositions provided herein and
compounds of the prior art.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-174-
.£ o
b. -a v
a. o> a
* 3 E
co u £
a = ■
°- c
a >•
P u
to ic
o
CO
in
in
u
<
10
a)
a
a
c
<
I
.5
•a e
« O
3 O
II
<£ ID
U
3
0)
O) CO
C 5
= 1°-
CO 1=
£ u. «
«
a>
c
c
CO
I
.5
a.
«
0)
a
'a
O
c
a
E
3
° 2
a*
a.
CO
CD
0«
oi a>
SS >- =
£ > IS
"OS
.E to
CO
o
CM
ui P>
CO
CN
*l J
en
cr>
CD
CO
00
oo
oo
CO
CD
i
CD
O
CD
C
"D
C
3
O
Q.
E
o
o
00
CN
CO
05
TO
E
TO
a>
a.
o
oo
O
CM
"1-
CO
CN
<
a.
E
CO
x
o
CO
CN
CN
CO
CD
CN
IN
m
r-
a.
E
CO
X
o
00
CD
in
cn
U
_a>
a.
E
eo
X
CN
CO
o
o
o
o
o
CM
CO
CO
o
o
o
o
A
o
o
o
o
00
a.
E
CD
X
UJ
CD
JE
a.
E
cc
X
00
in
o
o
o
If)
X
o
c
.e
a.
b
o
en
CO
CO
o
o
o
CD
in
CO
c
"x
o
c
CO
00
CN
o
co
CN
CO
CN
en
co
c
1c
o
2
o
to
>-
X
o
w
to
CJ
V
c
a.
'a.
c
a>
.rz
D.
4
~>-
Q.
O
Jl
>
a.
t5
CO
CO
6
c
(0
>.
o
c
'x
o
c
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-175-
Since modifications will be apparent to those of skill in this art, it h
intended that this invention be limited only by the scope of the appended
claims.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-176-
CLAIMS:
1. A composition, comprising an anti-hyperalgesically effective
amount of one or more compound(s) in a vehicle formulated for topical or
local administration, wherein: the compound exerts anti-hyperalgesic
5 activity via peripheral opiate receptors without causing central nervous
system (CNS) opiate receptor — mediated effects; and the composition is
effective for the prevention or treatment of hyperalgesia.
2. The composition of claim 1 that is formulated for topical
administration.
10 3. The composition of claim 2, wherein the compound is an
anti-diarrheal.
4. A composition, comprising an anti-hyperalgesically effective
amount of one or more compound(s) in a vehicle formulated for topical or
local administration, wherein the compound:
15 (a) has activity as a peripheral anti-hyperalgesic; and
(b) a B/A ratio greater than or equal to diphenoxylate, wherein:
B is the ED 50 of the compound in an assay that measures central
nervous system [CNS] activity of the compound;
the assay in which B is determined is a tail clip, tail flick or hot
20 plate assay;
A is the ED 50 of the compound in an assay the measures anti-
diarrheal activity of the compound;
the assay in which anti-diarrheal activity is measured is a Castor oil
test or an assay that measures antagonism by the compound of
25 prostaglandin E 2 (PGE 2 ) — induced diarrhea;
the relative activities of the compound are compared to the
activities of diphenoxylate in the same assays; and
the composition is effective for the prevention or treatment of
hyperalgesia.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-177-
5. The composition of claim 4 that is formulated for topical
administration.
6. The composition of claim 4, wherein the compound has
either:
5 (i) a B/A ratio greater than or equal to diphenoxylate and a B value
approximately more than about 2-fold greater than diphenoxylate, or
(ii) has a B/A ratio at least about 2-fold greater than diphenoxylate.
7. The composition of claim 4, wherein the compound has
either:
10 (i) a B/A ratio greater than diphenoxylate;
(ii) a B value approximately 2-fold or greater than diphenoxylate, or
(iii) has a B/A ratio at least about 2-fold greater than diphenoxylate.
8. The composition of claim 2, wherein the compounds are
either:
15 (i) selected from the group consisting of 3 — hydroxy— 7 — oxo-
morphinans and 3 — hydroxy — 7— oxoisomorphinans;
(ii) selected from the group consisting of
Tyr-D-Ala-Gly-Phe-N(Me)Met-NH 2 ; [D-Thr 2 ,A 3 Pro 5 ] -enkephalin-
amide, H — Tyr — D — Nva — Phe — Orn — NH 2 ,
20 H-Tyr-D-Nle-Phe-Om-NH 2 , H-Tyr-D-Arg- Phe- A 2 bu-NH 2 ,
H — Tyr — D — Arg — Phe — Lys — NH 2 , and
H — Lys— Tyr— D — Arg-Phe-Lys — NH 2 ; or
(iii) selected from the group consisting of loperamide and analogs
thereof.
25 9. A composition, comprising an anti-hyperalgesically effective
amount of one or more compound(s) in a vehicle formulated for topical or
local administration, wherein:
at least one of the compounds has the following formula (I):
30
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-178—
R*
5
Ar
R 2 — M
Ar 2
10
wherein:
R 2 is a direct bond, straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 12
carbon atoms, or is alkenylene or alkynylene of 2 to 6 carbon atoms and
one or two double bonds or triple bonds, R 2 is optionally substituted with
one or more hydroxy groups or halo;
system, preferably a 6— to 10-membered aryl ring system or a 5— to 10-
membered heteroaryl ring system containing one or more heteroatoms,
wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are each optionally
20 substituted with one or more aryl group substituents;
(ii) heterocyclic rings that contain one to three heteroatoms
and that are unsubstituted or substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or
lower alkyl;
(iii) alkyl of 1 to 8 carbons that is optionally substituted with
25 hydroxy or alkylcarbonyloxy; alkenyl of 3 to 6 carbons; cycloalkylalkyl in
which the cycloalkyl contains 3 to 8 carbons and the alkyl contains 1 to 3
carbons; cycloalkenylalkyl in which the cycloalkenyl contains 3 to 8
carbons and the alkyl contains 1 to 3 carbons;
15
R 4 is selected from among:
(i) a 6 to 10-membered ring or heteroatom-containing ring
(iv)
5
X
/
N
\
R
6
30
X 5 is O or S;
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-179-
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(a) hydrogen, straight or branched chain alkyl of 1 to
12 carbon atoms, straight or branched chain alkenyl of 2 to 12 carbon
atoms and one or two double bonds, a 6— to 10-membered ring system,
5 preferably an aryl ring system that is optionally substituted with one or
more aryl group substituents, or arylalkyl; and
(b) carbon chains, heteroatoms, and carbon chains
containing one or more heteroatoms, so that, together with the nitrogen
atom to which they are attached, form a 3— to 10-membered
10 heterocyclic ring containing one or more heteroatoms that is
unsubstituted or substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl;
(v) cyano, formyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl,
alkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl;
(vi) -NR 5 COR 5 ; and
15 (vii) -S(0) r alkyl or -S(0) r aryl, where r is 1 or 2;
each of Ar 1 and Ar 2 are independently selected from (i) or (ii) as follows:
(i) a 6— to 10-membered ring systems, preferably an aryl
ring system or a 5— to 10-membered heteroatom-containing ring system,
preferably a heteroaryl ring system containing one or more heteroatoms,
20 wherein the ring systems are each optionally substituted with one or more
aryl group substituents, or
(ii) phenyl or pyridyl groups which, together with the carbon
atoms to which they are attached, form a fused ring system whereby the
compounds of formula (I) have the structure:
25
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-180-
in which A and B independently represent fused phenyl or pyridyl rings,
which are each independently unsubstituted or substituted with one or
more aryl group substituents;
X 4 is a direct bond, -<CH 2 ) n -, -CH=CH-,
5 -CH = CHCH 2 -, -(CH 2 ) p O(CH 2 ) q -, -(CH 2 ) p S(0) r (CH 2 ) q - ,
-{CH 2 LNR 21 (CH 2 ) q - or
Ft is hydrogen or lower alkyl;
n is an integer from 0 to 3;
10 r is an integer from 0 to 2;
each of p and q is 0 or 1, and the sum of p and q is no
greater than 2;
M is
-N
\
(OhJm
R7
R3
R7
NR5r6
or
m is an integer from 1 to 3;
15 f<ZD is an azabicycloalkyl containing from 6 to 10
carbon atoms with at least 5 atoms in each ring and is
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-181 -
optionally substituted with OR 18 in which R 18 is hydrogen or lower
alkanoyl containing 2 to 7 carbons and OR 18 is at the 5 position in 5-
membered rings or the 5 or 6 position in 6-membered rings and R 3 , R 7 an
R are attached in the endo or exo configuration;
5 X 1 , X 2 and X 3 are each independently selected from — C(R 24 )(R 25 ) —
-C(R 24 } = C(R 25 )-, -C(R 24 )=N-, -N = C(R 24 )-, -C( = 0)-, -0-,
— S— or — N(R 24 ) — , with the proviso that only one of X 1 , X 2 and X 3 is O,
S or NR 24 ;
R 24 and R 26 are independently hydrogen or lower alkyl;
10 R 3 is selected from Ar 3 , — Y — Ar 3 where Y is alkylene of 1 to 3
carbon atoms, alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl of 3 to 8
carbons, heterocycle, alkenyl, alkanoyl, alkenoyl of 3 to 10 carbons and
1 to 3 double bonds, aroyl, heteroaroyl, alkoxycarbonyl,
alkenyloxycarbonyl of 3 to 10 carbons and 1 to 3 double bonds,
15 aryloxycarbonyl, formyl ( — CHO), cyano, aminocarbonyl (-C0NH 2 ),
alkylaminocarbonyl, dialkylaminocarbonyl, arylaminocarbonyl,
diarylaminocarbonyl, arylalkylaminocarbonyl, or
O
N — C — Ar 4
R 8 ;
where any of the aryl groups are unsubstituted or substituted with
20 one or more aryl substitutents, and any other groups set forth for R 3 are
unsubstituted or substituted with halo, hydroxy or alkoxy; and
R 8 is hydrogen or straight or branched chain alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon
atoms, which is unsubstituted or substited with an alkyl group
substitutent;
25 Ar 3 is a 6— to 10-membered aryl ring system or a 5— to 10-
membered heteroaryl ring system containing one or more heteroatoms,
wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are each optionally
substituted with one or more aryl group substituents;
Ar 4 is
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
— 182 —
(i) a heterocycle containing 1 ring or 2 or more fused rings
containing a total of up to 50 member atoms in the ring system, wherein
each ring contains one or more heteroatoms and is optionally substituted
with one or more aryl group substituents;
5 (ii) a radical of the formula:
R 10 , R 11 and R 12 are each independently selected from hydrogen,
alkyl, alkyloxy, alkoxyalkyl, halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, cyano, nitro, amino,
alkylamino, di(alkyl)amino, aminocarbonyl, arylcarbonylamino,
10 alkylcarbonylamino, alkylcarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, aminosulfonyl,
alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl, alkylthio, mercapto, C 3 _ 6 alkenyloxy,
C 3 _ 6 alkynyloxy, arylalkyloxy or aryloxy, in which each group is
unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents selected from
halo, halo alkyl and alkyl, and the alkyl groups are straight or branched
15 chains that are lower alkyl; or
(iii) 1 — or 2 — naphthyl, dihydronaphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl,
indenyl or dihydroindenyl, each of which is optionally substitituted with
one or more aryl group substituents;
R is hydrogen, alkyl, halo, hydroxy, lower alkoxy, haloalkyl, OR 9 or
20 alkenyl;
R 9 is hydrogen, alkyl, arylalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, aminoalkyl, alkyl-
aminoalkyl or dialkylaminoalkyl, in which the alkyl groups are straight or
branched chains of 1 to 12 carbon atoms;
and
25 R 7 is selected from among:
hydrogen;
-OH;
— R 14 OR 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or alkanoyl
containing 2 to 5 carbon atoms, and R 14 is lower alkenyl or lower alkyl;
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-183-
— CH 2 NR 15 R 16 in which R 15 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower
alkanoyl, aryl or aroyl and R 16 is hydrogen or lower alkyl or, together with
the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, R 15 and R 16 form a 3 to 7-
membered ring which optionally contains an additional heteroatom
5 selected from oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur;
— OR 15 ;
-C(0)H;
-CN;
-C(=0)-NR 5 R 6 ;
10 alkyl;
aryl;
— C(0)OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 7 carbon
atoms, alkenyl of 3 to 7 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl ring
system, an optionally substituted heteroaryl ring system containing one or
15 more heteroatoms, arylalkyl, or a pharmaceutically acceptable cation,
in which the optional aryl group substituents are selected from
halo, hydroxy, alkyl, cycioalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl,
heteroarylalkyl, alkenyl containing 1 to 2 double bonds, alkynyl containing
1 to 2 triple bonds, haloalkyl, polyhaloalkyl, formyl, alkylcarbonyl,
20 arylcarbonyl, heteroarylcarbonyl, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl,
aryloxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, alkylaminocarbonyl,
dialkylaminocarbonyl, arylaminocarbonyl, diarylaminocarbonyl,
arylalkylaminocarbonyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, perfluoroalkoxy, alkenyloxy,
alkynyloxy, arylalkoxy, aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl,
25 arylaminoalkyl, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino,
alkylarylamino, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, azido, nitro,
mercapto, alkylthio, arylthio, perfluoroalkylthio, thiocyano, isothiocyano,
alkylsulfinyl, alkylsufonyl, arylsulfinyl, arylsulfonyl, aminosulfonyl,
alkylaminosulfonyl, dialkylaminosulfonyl and arylaminosulfony;
30 or a salt, hydrate or N — oxide of the compound of formula (I).
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-184-
10. The composition of claim 9, wherein:
R 3 is Ar 3 ; — Y — Ar 3 , where Y is alkylene of 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbon atoms; cycioalkyl of 3 to 8 carbons;
heterocyclyl; alkenyl; alkanoyl that is optionally substituted with halo,
5 hydroxy or alkoxy; alkenoyl of 3 to 10 carbons and 1 to 3 double bonds;
optionally substituted aroyl; heteroaroyl; alkoxycarbonyl;
alkenyloxycarbonyl of 3 to 10 carbons and 1 to 3 double bonds;
aryloxycarbonyl; formyl ( — CHO); cyano; aminocarbonyl ( — CONH 2 );
alkylaminocarbonyl; dialkylaminocarbonyi; arylaminocarbonyl;
10 diarylaminocarbonyl or arylalkylaminocarbonyl.
1 1 . The composition of claim 9 that is formulated for topical
administration.
12. The composition of claim 10 that is formulated for topical
administration.
15 13. The composition of claim 12, wherein the aryl or heteroaryl
groups in Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 , R 4 and R 7 are each optionally substituted with one
to three aryl group substituents, and the ring systems are heteroaryl or
ary ring systems.
14. The composition of claim 12, wherein the heteroaryl and
20 heterocyclic groups in Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 , R 4 and R 7 each contain one to three
heteroatoms.
15. The composition of claim 12, wherein the compound
comprises a quaternary ammonium salt.
1 6. The composition of claim 9, wherein the compound is
25 selected with the provisos that:
(i) when Ar 3 is 1 — (3 — propionyl — 2 — imidazolinon)yl, then R 4 is
other than — CN;
(ii) when R 4 is — C( =X 5 ) — NR 5 R 6 , X 5 is O and R 5 and R 6 , together
with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form pyrrolidinyl, then
30 M is other than 4 — morpholtnyl;
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-185-
(iii) when M is — NR 5 R 6 and R 5 and R 6 are methyl, then R 4 is other
than 1 -hydroxypropyl (CH 3 CH 2 CH(OH) — ) or
ethylcarbonyl (CH 3 CH 2 C( = O) — );
(iv) when M is 4— morpholinyl or 1 — piperidinyl, then R 4 is other
5 than ethylcarbonyl (CH 3 CH 2 C( = O) — ); and
(v) when M is 4— morpholinyl, than R 4 is other than ethoxycarbonyl
(CH 3 CH 2 OC(=0)-).
17. The composition of claim 12, wherein:
m is 2;
10 R 2 is alkylene of 1 to 3 carbons, alkenylene or alkynylene of 2 to 3
carbons;
Ar\ Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each independently phenyl or pyridyl,
optionally substituted with up to three substituents selected from halo,
halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl;
15 R is hydrogen, lower alkyl, halo, halo lower alkyl or OR 9 , and is at
the 3 — position as follows:
R
25 R 9 is hydrogen, alkyl, arylalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, aminoalkyl,
alkyiaminoalkyl or dialkylaminoalkyl, in which the alkyl groups are straight
or branched chains of 1 to 6 carbons in the chain;
R 4 is selected from among:
(i) phenyl or pyridyl which are each optionally substituted
30 with lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl or halo,
(ii) pyrrolidinyl, oxadiazolyl or triazolyl radicals, each of which
is optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently selected
from halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl,
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
5 (a> hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, and aryl, each of
which is unsubstituted or substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or lower
alkyl, or
(b) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
attached, form a piperidinyl, morpholinyl or pyrrolidinyl radical that is
10 optionally substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl; and
R 7 is selected from:
hydrogen;
-OH;
-R 14 OR 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen or lower alkyl, and R 14 is
15 methylene or ethylene;
-CH 2 NR 15 R 16 in which R 15 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or lower
alkanoyl and R 16 is hydrogen or lower alkyl;
— OR 15 ;
— C(0)OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, alkenyl of
20 3 to 5 carbon atoms, pyridyl, phenyl, tolyl, ethylphenyl, butylphenyl or
halophenyl or a sodium, potassium, calcium or ammonium ion.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-187-
18. The composition of claim 12, wherein:
the azabicycloalkyl in M is
5
m is 2;
Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each independently phenyl or pyridyl,
optionally substituted with up to three substituents selected from halo,
10 halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl;
R 2 is -CH = CH-, -(CH 2 ) 2 - or -CH 2 CH(CH 3 )-;
R is hydrogen, lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl, halo or OR 9 , and is at
the 3— position as follows:
R 9 is selected from alkyl, arylalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, aminoalkyl,
alkylaminoalkyl or dialkylaminoalkyl, in which the alkyl groups are straight
or branched chain of 1 to 6 carbons;
R 4 is selected from among:
with lower alkyl, hydroxy, lower alkoxy, halo lower alkyl or halo,
(ii) pyrrolidinyl, oxadiazolyl or triazolyl radicals, each of which
is unsubstituted or substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently
selected from halo, halo lower alkyl, hydroxy, lower alkoxy or lower alkyl.
R
15
20
(i) phenyl or pyridyl which are each optionally substituted
25
(iii) lower alkyl of 1 to 6 carbons, or
(iv)
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-188-
-Lh' ;
R*
5
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(a) hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl or aryl, each of
which is unsubstituted or substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or lower
alkyl, or
10 (b) together with the nitrogen atom to which each is
attached, form a piperidinyl, morpholinyl or pyrrolidinyl radical that is
unsubstituted or substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl, hydroxy, lower
alkoxy or lower alkyl; and
R 7 is selected from:
15 hydrogen;
-OH;
— R 14 OR 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen or lower alkyl, and R 14 is
methylene or ethylene;
— CH 2 NR 15 R 16 in which R 15 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or lower
20 alkanoyl and R 16 is hydrogen or lower alkyl;
— OR 15 ;
— C(0)OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, alkenyl of
3 to 5 carbon atoms, pyridyl, phenyl, tolyl, ethylphenyl, butylphenyl or
halophenyl, or a sodium, potassium, calcium or ammonium ion.
25 19. The composition of claim 1 2 in which the compounds of
formula (I) are of the formula (II):
R
wherein:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-189-
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from a 6— to 10-
membered aryl ring system and a 5— to 10-membered heteroaryl ring
system, wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are each optionally
substituted with up to three aryl group substituents;
5 R 3 is Ar 3 ;
Ar 3 is a 6— to 10-membered aryl ring system or a 5— to 10-
membered heteroaryl ring system, wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring
systems are each optionally substituted with up to three substituents
selected from halo, lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl;
0 Ft 2 is straight or branched chain alkyl of 1 to 12 carbons;
R is hydrogen, alkyl or OR 9 ;
R 9 is alkyl, arylalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl or
dialkylaminoalkyl, in which the alkyl groups are straight or branched chain
of 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
5 R 4 is phenyl, pyridyl, cyano or:
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(i) hydrogen, straight or branched chain alkyl of 1 to 3
carbons or alkenyl of 2 to 4 carbons and 1 double bond; or
(ii) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
25 attached, form a heterocycle selected from pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl,
alkylpiperidinyl, morpholinyl, oxadiazolyl and triazolyl radicals, each of
which is optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected
from halo, halo lower alkyl, hydroxy, lower alkoxy and lower alkyl; and
R 7 is — H, —OH, -C(0>0R 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen or lower
30 alkyl, -C(0)H or -R 14 0R 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 4
carbons, or alkanoyl of 2 or 3 carbon atoms, and R 14 is methylene or
ethylene.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
20
-190-
20. The composition of claim 12 in which the compounds of
formula (I) are of the formula (II):
R
Ar 1 -
■ R 1 — N X 11
wherein:
10 Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from a 6— to 10-
membered aryl ring system and a 5— to 10-membered heteroaryl ring
system, wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are each optionally
substituted with up to three aryl group substituents;
Ar 3 is a 6— to 10-membered aryl ring system or a 5— to 10-
15 membered heteroaryl ring system, wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring
systems are each optionally substituted with up to three substituents
selected from halo, lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl;
R 4 is phenyl, pyridyl, cyano or
O R 5
;
\
R*
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
25 (i) hydrogen, lower alkyl, phenyl, phenylalkyl or lower
alkenyl, or
(ii) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are each
attached form a heterocycle selected from 1 ,3,4 — oxadiazolyl,
4— morpholinyl, or di(C,— C 6 alkyl) — morpholinyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl,
30 Ct — C 6 alkylpiperidinyl; and
R 2 is lower alkylene;
R 7 is —OH, — C{0)OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen, methyl or ethyl,
or -C(0)H; and
R is hydrogen, lower alkyl, — C(0)H, or — C(0)OH and is at the
35 3 — position as follows:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-191 -
R
and
R 3 is phenyl optionally substituted with alkyl, alkoxyalkyl, halo or
5 trifluoroalkyl.
21. The composition of claim 20, wherein:
R 7 is -OH, -C{0)OH or -C(0)OCH 2 CH 3 ;
R 3 is phenyl optionally substituted with alkoxyalkyl, halo or
trifluoroalkyl;
10 R is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
R 2 is alkylene containing from 1 to 4 carbons;
R 4 is phenyl, pyridyl, cyano or:
15
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
20 (i) hydrogen, alkyl, phenyl, phenylalkyl or 2 — propenyl, in
which the alkyl groups are lower alkyl; or
(ii) together with the nitrogen to which they are attached
form pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, C,— C 6 alkylpiperidinyl, 4— morpholinyl or
2,6 — difC, — C 6 alkyDmorpholinyl; and
25 Ar 1 and Ar 2 are independently selected from phenyl or pyridyl.
22. The composition of claim 21, wherein:
R is hydrogen or methyl;
R 3 is phenyl optionally substituted with alkyl, alkoxyalkyl, halo or
trifluoroalkyl;
WO 97/09973
PCT7US96/14727
-192-
R 2 is -(CH 2 ) 2 - or -CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) -;
R 4 is cyano or:
5
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(i) hydrogen, lower alkyl, phenyl, phenyl lower alkyl or
10 2 — propenyl; or
(ti) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
attached, form pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, C,— C 6 alkylpiperidinyl,
4 — morpholinyl or 2,6— difC, — C 6 alkyl) morpholinyl;
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are independently phenyl, which is unsubstituted or
15 substituted with lower alkyl, alkoxy lower alkyl, halo or halo lower alkyl;
23. The composition of claim 22, comprising 1 -(3-cyano-3,3-
diphenylpropyl)-4 — phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxylic acid ethyl ester that has
the following formula:
20
or a salt or N — oxide thereof.
24. The composition of claim 22, comprising
1 — (3 — cyano — 3,3— diphenylpropyl) — 4 — phenyl — 4— piperidinecarboxylic
25 acid that has the following formula
WO 97/09973 PCT/US96/14727
-193-
O
or a salt or N — oxide thereof.
25. The composition of claim 19, wherein:
5 Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl,
R is hydrogen or methyl,
R 2 is -(CH 2 ) 2 - or -CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) -,
R 5 and R 6 are independently methyl or ethyl or, together with the
nitrogen to which they are attached, form pyrrolidinyl or piperidinyl;
10 R 3 is unsubstituted phenyl, 4 — chlorophenyl, 4 — bromophenyl,
4— fluorophenyl, 3,4,— di — halophenyl, 4— trifluoromethylphenyl or
3 — trifluoromethylphenyl; and
R 7 is -OH.
26. A composition of claim 12, wherein the compounds of
15 formula (I) have formula (III):
wherein:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently a 6— to 10-membered aryl ring
system or a 5— to 10-membered heteroaryl ring system in which the aryl
25 and heteroaryl ring systems are optionally substituted with up to three
substituents selected from halo, alkyl and haloalkyl in which the alkyl
groups are straight or branched chains of 1 to 12 carbons;
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
10
-194-
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkyiene of 1 to 1 2 carbon atoms,
or straight or branched chain alkenylene of 2 to 12 carbon atoms
containing one double bond;
R is hydrogen, alkyl, halo lower alkyl, hdroxy, lower alkoxy or halo;
R 4 is:
O R 5
" — N
\
R 6
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(i) hydrogen, straight or branched chain alkyl or straight or
branched chain alkenylene containing up to 12 carbons, or
15 (ii) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
attached, they form a 3— to 10-membered heterocyclic ring containing
one or two heteroatoms; and
Ar 3 is a 6— to 10-membered aryl ring system or a 5— to 10-
membered heteroaryl ring system containing one or more heteroatoms, in
20 which the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are optionally substituted with
one or more aryl group substituents.
27. The composition of claim 26, wherein:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from phenyl, which is
optionally substituted with up to three substituents selected from halo,
25 halo alkyl or alkyl in which the alkyl groups are straight or branched
chains of 1 to 6 carbons;
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkyiene of 1 to 3 carbons or
alkenylene of 2 to 3 carbons containing one double bond;
R is hydrogen, lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl, hydroxy, lower alkoxy
30 or halo, and is in the 3 — position;
R 4 is:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
- 195 —
U N
5
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(i) hydrogen, alkyl or alkenyl, in which the carbon chains are
straight or branched chain of 1 to 6 carbons, or
10 (») together, with the nitrogen atom to which each is
attached, form pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, aikylpiperidinyl, morpholinyl, or
di(C!— C 6 alkyl) — morpholinyl; and
Ar 3 is a 6— to 1 0-membered aryl ring system, which is
unsubstituted or substituted with up to three substituents selected from
15 halo, halo lower alkyl and lower alkyl.
28. The composition of claim 1 2 in which the compounds of
formula (I) have formula (IV):
R 5
wherein:
Ar 3 is phenyl, which is optionally substituted with halo; and
30 R 2 is alkylene containing 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
29. The composition of claim 25, wherein the compound is
selected from compounds in which:
(i) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R is hydrogen, R 2 is — (CH 2 ) 2 — , R 5 and
R 6 , together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form
35 pyrrolidine, and R 3 is 4— chlorophenyl or 3,4, — dichlorophenyl:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-196-
(ii) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R is hydrogen, R 2 is — (CH 2 ) 2 — , R 5 and
R 6 , together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form
piperidinyl, and R 3 is phenyl;
(iii) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R 2 is — (CH 2 ) 2 — , R is hydrogen, R 5 and
5 R 6 are methyl and R 3 is 4 — bromophenyl;
(iv) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R 2 is — (CH 2 ) 2 — , R is hydrogen, R 5 is
methyl, R 6 is ethyl and R 3 is 4— chlorophenyl;
<v) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R 2 is — CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) — , R is hydrogen, R 5
and R 6 are methyl and R 3 is 4— fluorophenyl; and
10 (vi) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R 2 is — (CH 2 } 2 — , R is 4— methyl, R 5 and
R 6 are methyl and R 3 is 3— trifluoromethylphenyl or phenyl.
30. The composition of claim 12, wherein the compound is
selected from among: 1 -[4-(4-hydroxy-4-phenyl-1 -piperidino)-2,2-
diphenylbutyryl]piperidine; 4-{4-[4-hydroxy-4-(3-trifluoromethylphenyl)-1-
1 5 piperidino]-2,2-diphenylbutyryl}morpholine; 1 -{4-[4-hydroxy-4-(3-
trifluoromethylphenyl)-1 -piperidino]-2,2-diphenylbutyl}piperidine; 4-(/?-
chlorophenyl)-4-hydroxy-N-N-,K-trimethyl-a,a-dipheny 1-1 -piperidine-1 -
butyramide; 4-(p-chlorophenyl)-4-hydroxy-N-N-dimethyl-or,ar-diphenyl-1 -
piperidine-1 -butyramide (loperamide); 4-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-N,N-diethyl-
20 4-hydroxy-a,a-diphenyl-1 -piperidine-1 -butyramide; 4-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-
4-hydroxy-N,N-dimethyl-a,a-diphenyl-1 -piperidine-1 -butyramide; 4-(4-
chloro-3-trifluoromethylphenyl)-4-hydroxy-N,N-dimethyl-<7,ar-diphenyl-1 -
piperidine-1 -butyramide; 4-(/?-fluorophenyl)-4-hydroxy-N-N,K-trimethyl-a,a'-
diphenyl-1 -piperidine-1 -butyramide; 4-(p-bromophenyl)-4-hydroxy-N-N-
25 dimethyl-a,a-diphenyl-1 -piperidine- 1 -butyramide; 1 -{4-[4-(3,4-
dichlorophenyl)-4-hydroxypiperidino]-2,2-diphenylbutyryl}pyrrolidine; and
4-(p-chlorophenyl)-N-ethyl-4-hydroxy-N-methyl-a,a-diphenyl-1 -piperidine-
1 -butyramide.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-197-
31. The composition of claim 19, comprising 4-(p-chlorophenyl}-
4-hydroxy-N-N-dimethyl-a,a-diphenyl-1-piperidinebutvramide that has the
formula:
ci
32. The composition of claim 19, wherein the compound is a salt
15 of 4— [p — chlorophenyl) — 4 — hydroxy — N — N —dimethyl — a,a— di-
phenyl— 1 — piperidinebutyramide.
33. The composition of claim 32, wherein the salt is the
hydrochloride salt.
34. The composition of claim 32, wherein the salt comprises a
20 quaternary ammonium salt.
35. The composition of claim 19, comprising
4— (p — chlorophenyl) — 4— hydroxy — N — N— dimethyl — a,a— diphenyl-1 -
piperidinebutyramide, N— oxide that has the formula:
10
5
25
o
30
ci
35
36. The composition of claim 9 in which the compounds of
formula (I) are of the formula:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/I4727
-198-
o
II
N-C-Ar' V
wherein:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from a 6— to 10-
5 membered aryl ring system and a 5— to 10-membered heteroaryl ring
system containing one or more heteroatoms, wherein the aryl and
heteroaryl ring systems are each optionally substituted with up to three
aryl group substituents;
Ar 4 is thienyl, furanyl, pyridinyl, thiazolyl or imidazolyl, each of
10 which is optionally substituted with halo, or Ar 4 is a radical of the
formula:
R 10 , R 11 and R 12 are each independently selected from hydrogen,
15 alkyl, alkyloxy, halide, hydroxy, cyano, nitro, amino, alkylamino,
di(alkyl)amino, aminocarbonyl, arylcarbonylamino, alkylcarbonylamino,
alkylcarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, aminosulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl,
alkylthio, mercapto, C 3 _ 6 alkenyloxy, C 3 _ 6 alkynyloxy, arylalkyloxy, aryioxy
or alkyl, in which each group is unsubstituted or substituted with up to 4
20 halo atoms, and the alkyl groups are straight or branched chains of 1 to 6
carbon atoms;
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
R 9 is alkyl, arylalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl or
dialkylaminoalkyl in which the alkyl groups are straight or branched chains
25 of 1 to 6 carbon atoms in the chain:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-199-
in which R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(i) from hydrogen, aryl containing 6 to 10 members in the
5 ring, straight or branched chain alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or straight
or branched chain alkenyl of 2 to 6 carbons and 1 or 2 double bonds, or
(ii) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
attached, R 5 and R 6 form a 3 — to 7-membered heterocyclic ring containing
one or two heteroatoms selected from O and N;
10 R 8 is hydrogen or straight or branched chain alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon
atoms.
37. The composition of claim 36, wherein: Ar 4 is phenyl; R 10 is
aryl, lower alkyloxy, C 3 . 6 alkyenyloxy, C 36 alkynyloxy, or alkyl
substituted with 1 to 4 halo atoms, and R 11 and R 12 are each indepen-
15 dently selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkyoxy, halo, hydroxy,
cyano, nitro, amino, mono and di(alkyl)amino, aminocarbonyl, aryl-
carbonylamino, alkylcarbonylamino, alkylcarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy,
aminosulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl, alkylthio or mercapto in which
each group is unsubstituted or substituted with up to 4 halo atoms, and
20 the alkyl groups are straight or branched chains that contain 1 to 4
carbons; and R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from hydrogen,
C,. 4 alkyl, phenyl, phenylmethyl or 2-propenyl.
38. The composition of claim 36, wherein:
the substituents in the 3- and 4-positions on the piperidine ring
25 have the trans configuration;
R 10 is trifluoromethyl substituted on the meta positions, and R 11 and
R 12 are each independently selected from hydrogen, methyl, methoxy,
halo, hydroxy, nitro, amino trifluoromethyl, phenylmethyoxy, phenyloxy,
and propenyloxy.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
10
-200-
39. The composition of claim 36, comprising trans- 3- hydro xy-
N,N,K-trimethyl-a,o-diphenyl-4-[[3-<trifluoromethyl>-benzoyl]amino]-1-
piperidinebutanamide.
40. The composition of claim 1 2 in which the compounds of
formula (I) are of the formula (VI):
15
wherein:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from a 6— to 10-
membered aryl ring system and a 5— to 10-membered heteroaryl ring
system containing 1 to 3 oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur atoms, wherein the
20 aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are optionally substituted with up to
three aryl group substituents;
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 1 2 carbon atoms
or alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbon atoms;
R 7 is — R 14 OR 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, or alkanoyl
25 containing 2 to 5 carbon atoms, and R 14 is lower alkylene or lower
alkenylene;
R 19 is hydrogen or lower alkyl; and
R 20 is hydrogen, halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl.
41. The composition of claim 40, wherein one of Ar 1 and Ar 2 is
30 phenyl and the other of Ar' and Ar 2 is phenyl optionally substituted with
alkyl or halo, or pyridyl.
42. The composition of claim 12 in which the compounds of
formula (I) are of the formula:
WO 97/09973
PCTYUS96/I4727
-201-
VII
wherein:
R 19 is lower alkyl; the configuration of the double bond is trans :
and
5
is a tertiary amine selected from azabicycloalkyl containing from 6 to 9
carbon atoms with at least 5 atoms in each ring.
43. The composition of claim 42, wherein:
each ring in the azabicycloalkyl is selected from pyrrolidine,
10 piperidino and hexamethyleneimino.
44. The composition of claim 1 2 in which the compounds of
formula (I) are of the formula:
(CH 2 )
wherein:
15 R 19 is lower alkyl; n is an integer from 1 to 3, and
— f*d^ is a tert 'ary amine selected from azabicycloalkyl
containing from 6 to 9 carbon atoms with at least 5 atoms in each ring.
WO 97/09973
PCTYUS96/14727
-202-
10
15
20
45. The composition of claim 44, wherein:
n is 2 or 3; R 19 is ethyl or methyl; and
each ring in the azabicycloalkyl is selected from pyrrolidine
piperidino and hexamethyleneimino.
46. The composition of claim 45, wherein the azabicycloalkyl is
selected from 7-azabicyclo[2.2.1]hept-7-yl, 2-azabicyclo[2.2.2]oct-2-yl, 2-
azabicyclo[3.2. 1 ]oct-2-yl, 3-azabicyclo[3.2. 1 ]oct-3-yl, 6-azabicy-
clo[3.2. 1 ]oct-6-yl, 3-azabicyclo[3.2.2]non-3-yl, 8-azabicyclo[4.3.0]-non-8-
yl, 2-azabicyclo[3.2.2]non-2-yl, 2-azabicyclo[3.3. 1 ]non-2-yl, 3-azabicy-
clo[3.3. 1 ]non-3-yl, 2-azabicyclo[4.3.0]non-3-yl, 7-azabicyclo[4.3.0]non-7-
yl, 8-azabicyclo[4.3.1 ]dec-8-yl, 2-azabicyclo[4.4.0]-dec-2-yl, 7-azabicy-
clo[4.2.2]dec-7-yl, or — n -—-^ .
47. The composition of claim 12, comprising 2-{5-[2-{2-azabi-
cyclo[2.2.2]oct-2-yl)ethyl]-1 0.1 1 -dihydro-5H-dibenzo[a,d]cyclohepten-5-
yl}-5-methyl-1 ,3,4-oxadiazole or 2-{1 2-[2-(2-azabicyclo[2.2.2]oct-2-
yl)ethyl}-5,6,7, 1 2-tet-rahydrodibenzo[a,d]cycloocten- 1 2-yl}-5-methyl-
1 ,3,4-oxadiazole.
48. The composition of claim 1 2 in which the compounds of
formula (I) have formula (IX):
R
o
30
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-203-
wherein: R 19 is lower alkyl; R 18 is hydrogen or lower alkanoyl containing 2
to 7 carbon atoms and is attached at the 5 or 6 position in either the
endo or exo configuration.
49. The composition of claim 12 in which the compounds of
5 formula (I) are of the formula:
wherein:
Ar 1 Ar 2 , and Ar 3 are each independently selected from a 6 to 10-
membered aryl ring system optionally substituted with up to three
10 substituents selected from halo, halo lower alkyl and lower alkyl;
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 6 carbons or
alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbons;
R 4 is a 6 to 10-membered aryl ring system or a 5 to 10-membered
heteroaryl ring system containing 1 to 3 oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur atoms,
15 wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are optionally substituted
with one or more substituents selected from halo, halo lower alkyl and
lower alkyl; and
R 7 is selected from:
— CH 2 NR 15 R 16 in which R 15 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or lower
20 alkanoyl and R 16 is hydrogen or lower alkyl; or
— C(0)OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 7 carbons,
alkenyl of 3 to 7 carbon atoms, aryl or heteroaryl, or an alkali metal or
alkaline earth metal salt; and
— R 14 0R n in which R 13 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 4 carbons
25 or alkanoyl of 2 to 5 carbon atoms, and R 14 is alkylene of 1 to 4 carbons.
50. The composition of claim 49, wherein Ar 1 Ar 2 , and Ar 3 are
each independently phenyl, which is optionally substituted with one or
two substituents selected from halo, halo lower alkyl and lower alkyl and
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-204-
R 4 is phenyl, which is optionally substituted with one or two substituents
selected from halo, halo lower alkyl and lower alkyl, or pyridyl.
51. The composition of claim 50, wherein R 7 is — CH 2 NR 15 R 16 in
which R 15 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or lower alkanoyl and R 16 is hydrogen
5 or lower alkyl.
52. The composition of claim 51, wherein: Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are
each phenyl, R 2 is — (CH 2 > 2 — or — CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) — ; and R 4 is phenyl or
pyridyl.
53. The composition of claim 51, comprising 4-amino-methyl-4-
10 phenyl-1 -(3,3,3-triphenylpropyDpiperidine or N-{[4-phenyl-1 -{3,3,3-tri-
phenylpropyl)piperidine-4-yl)methyl)acetamide}.
54. The composition of claim 50, wherein R 7 is — C(0)OR 17 in
which R 17 is hydrogen, alkyl containing from 1 to 7 carbons, alkenyl
having 3 to 7 carbon atoms, aryl or heteroaryl, or is an alkali metal or
15 alkaline earth metal salt.
55. The composition of claim 54, wherein:
Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each independently selected from phenyl,
which is optionally substituted with one or two substituents selected from
halo, lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl;
20 R 2 is straight or branched chain alkylene containing from 1 to 6
carbons or alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbons;
R 4 is phenyl or pyridyl, each of which is optionally substituted with
up to three substituents selected from halo, halo lower alky or lower alkyl.
56. The composition of claim 54, wherein:
25 R 2 is a straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 3 carbons or
alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbons; and
R 17 is pyridyl, phenyl, tolyl, ethylphenyl, butylphenyl, halophenyl or
alkenyl.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-205-
57. The composition of claim 54, comprising 1 -(3,3,3-triphenyl-
propyl)-4-phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxylic acid hydrochloride; ethyl 1 -(3,3,3-
triphenylpropyl)-4-phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxylate; potassium 1 -(3,3,3-tri-
phenylpropyl)-4-phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxylate; sodium 1 -{3,3,3-triphenyl-
5 propyl)-4-phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxylate; 1 -[3,3-diphenyl-3-(2-
pyridyl)propyl]4-phenyl-4-piperidine carboxylic acid hydrochloride; sodium
1-[3,3-diphenyl-3-(2-pyridyl)propyl]-4-phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxylate;
ethyl 1-[3,3-diphenyl-3-(2-pyridyl)propyl]-4-phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxyl-
ate; or potassium 1 -[3,3-diphenyl-3-(2-pyridyl)propyl]-4-phenyl-4-piperi-
10 dinecarboxylate.
58. The composition of claim 49, wherein R 7 is — R 14 OR 13 in
which R 13 is hydrogen, straight or branched chain alkyl of 1 to 8 carbons,
and alkanoyl of 2 to 5 carbons, and R 14 is alkylene of 1 to 4 carbons or
alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbons.
15 59. The composition of claim 58, wherein:
Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each independently selected from among
phenyl, which is optionally substituted with one or two substituents
selected from halo, lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbons or halo lower alkyl of 1
to 4 carbons;
20 R 2 is straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or
alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbon atoms; and
R 4 is phenyl or pyridyl, each of which is optionally substituted with
up to three substituents selected from halo, halo lower alkyl of 1 to 4
carbons or lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbons.
25 60. The composition of claim 58, wherein:
R 2 is-(CH 2 ) 2 - or -CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) - ;
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl;
R 14 is -CH 2 - or -<CH 2 ) 2 -;
R 13 is alkyl containing 1 to 7 carbon atoms; and
30 R 4 is phenyl or 2-, 3- or 4-pyridyl.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-206-
61. The composition of claim 58, comprising a compound
selected from 1-{3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-phenyl-4-piperidinemethanol; 1-
[3,3-diphenyl-3-(2-pyridyl)propyl]-4-phenyl-4-piperidinemethanol; 1 -(3,3,3-
triphenylpropyl)-4-phenyl-4-acetoxymethyl-piperidine; 1-(3,3,3-triphenyl-
5 propyl)-4-phenyl-4-methoxymethyl-piperidine; 1 -(3,3,3-triphenylpropyl>-4-
{4-chlorophenyl)-4-piperidinemethanol; 1-[3-p-chlorophenyl-3,3-diphenyl-
propyl]-4-(phenyl)-4-piperidinemethanol; 1-[3-(p-tolyl)-3,3-diphenylpropyl]-
4-(phenyl)-4-piperidinemethanol; 1 -[3-(p-bromophenyl)-3,3-diphenyl-
propyl]-4-(phenyl)-4-piperidinemethanol; 1-[3,3-diphenyl-3-(4-pyridyl)-
10 propyl]-4-phenyl-4-piperidinemethanol; 1 -[3,3-diphenyl-3-(3-
pyridyl)propyl]-4-phenyl-4-piperidinemethanol; 1-{3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-
phenyl-4-hexoxymethyl-piperidine; 1 -(3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-(p-tolyl)-4-
piperidinemethanol; 1 -<3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-(p-trifluoromethyl)-4-piperi-
dinemethanol; 1 -{3,3,3-triphenylbutyl)-4-(phenyl)-4-piperidinemethanol; 1 -
15 (3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-(phenyl)-4-piperidinemethanol; 1 -(3,3,3-triphenyl-
propyl}-4-phenyl-4-methoxyethylpiperidine; 1-[3,3-diphenyl-3-(2-pyridyl)-
propyl]-4-phenyl-4-methoxyethylpiperidine; 1 -(3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-
phenyl-4-piperidinemethanol; 1 -[3,3-diphenyl-3-(2-pyridyl)propyl]-4-
phenyl-4-piperidinemethanol; 1 -(3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-phenyl-4-
20 acetoxymethyipiperidine; 1-(3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-phenyl-4-methoxy-
methylpiperidine; or 1-{3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-(chlorophenyl)-4-piperi-
dinemethanol.
62. The composition of claim 1 2 in which the compounds of
formula (I) are of the formula:
Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each independently selected from a 6— to 10-
membered ring system, which is optionally substituted with up to three
substituents selected from halo, lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl;
25
XI
wherein:
WO 97/09973
PCTYUS96/14727
-207-
R 2 is straight or branched alkylene of 1 to 6 carbon atoms or
alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbons;
R 4 is a 6 to 10-membered aryl ring system or a 5 to 10-membered
heteroaryl ring system, optionally substituted with up to three
5 substituents selected from halo, lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl;
R' 5 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 1 2 carbons or alkanoyl of 2 to 12
carbons; and
Y is alkylene of 1 to 3 carbons.
62. The composition of claim 61 wherein:
10 Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each independently selected from phenyl,
which is optionally substituted with one or two substituents selected from
halo, lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl; and
R 4 is phenyl, which is optionally substituted with one or two
substituents selected from halo, lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl.
15 63. The composition of claim 62, wherein:
R 2 is -(CH 2 ) 2 - or -CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) -;
R 15 is alkyl or alkanoyl in which the carbon chains contain 1 to 8
carbons; and
Y is -CH 2 -.
20 64. The composition of claim 62, comprising a compound
selected from 1-(3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)4-hydroxy-4-benzylpiperidine and
1 -(3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-hydroxy-4-benzylpiperidine hydrochloride; 1 -
(3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-hydroxy-4-p-chlorobenzylpiperidine; 1-(3,3,3-tri-
phenylpropyl)-4-hydroxy-4-p-methylbenzylpiperidine; or 1 -[3,3,3(2-
25 pyridyl)propyl]-4-benzyl-4-hydroxypiperidine.
65. The composition of claim 12 in which the compounds of
formula (I) are amidinoureas or 2 — [(aminophenyl and
amidophenyUamino] — 1 — azacycloalkanes of the formula:
30
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-208-
R3 R2
1
15
wherein:
(i) when W is Xll(a) or Xll(c), then R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 , which are
20 the same or different, are each independently selected from: hydrogen,
halo, lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl, nitro, lower alkoxy, hydroxy, aryl lower
alkoxy, acyloxy, cyano, halo lower alkoxy or lower alkyl sulfonyl; R is
hydrogen or lower alkyl; R' and R" are hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl or
arylalkyl; R' and R" together form a 5 to 7 membered ring which includes
25 0 to 2 heteroatoms selected from N f O or S; R n is hydrogen or lower alkyl,
provided that at least one of R, R' and R" is other than hydrogen; and
,{ii) when W is Xll(b), n is 1 to 3;
R 2 , R 3 and R 6 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl of 1
to 6 carbon atoms, or halogen; with the proviso that R 2 and R 6 are not
30 hydrogen at the same time; and one of R 4 and R 5 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1
to 6 carbon atoms, or halogen and the other is of the formula — NR 8 R 7 in
which R 8 and R 7 , which are the same or different, are selected from
among hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, alkoxycarbonyl of 2 to 7
carbon atoms, aryloxycarbonyl of 6 to 12 carbon atoms, alkylcarbonyl of
35 2 to 7 carbon atoms, arylcarbonyl of 6 to 12 carbon atoms,
hydroxyalkoxycarbonyl of 3 to 7 carbon atoms, or haloalkylcarbonyl of 2
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-209-
to 7 carbon atoms, or R 8 and R 7 are taken together to form — (CH 2 ) B — ,
where p is 4 or 5, or -(CH 2 ) m CO-, and m is 3 or 4.
66. The composition of claim 65, wherein:
when W is Xll(a) or Xll(c), R 2 is hydrogen or lower alkyl; R 3 and R 5
5 are hydrogen, hydroxy or lower alkoxy; R 4 is hydrogen, lower alkyl,
hydroxy, lower alkoxy or halo; R 6 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, nitro, alkoxy or
halo; R and R n are hydrogen or lower alkyl; and R' and R" are hydrogen or
alkyl; provided that R, R' and R" are not all hydrogen at the same time.
67. The composition of claim 65, wherein:
10 when W is Xll(a) or Xll(c), then R 2 is hydrogen, methyl or ethyl; R 3
is hydrogen, hydroxy or methoxy; R 4 is hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, hydroxy,
methoxy, chloro or bromo; R 5 is hydrogen, hydroxy or methoxy; R s is
hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, nitro, methoxy, ethoxy, chloro, bromo or fluoro;
R and R n are hydrogen, methyl or ethyl; and R' and R" are hydrogen,
15 methyl, ethyl, propyl, i — propyl, butyl, i — butyl, sec — butyl, t-butyl,
pentyl, hexyl or heptyl; provided that R, R' and R" are not all hydrogen at
the same time.
68. The composition of claim 65, comprising a compound
selected from m-chlorophenylamidinourea; p-chlorophenylamidinourea;
20 3,4-dichlorophenylamidinourea; m-bromophenylamidinourea; p-
bromophenylamidinourea; 3,4-dibromo-phenylamidinourea; 3-chloro-4-
bromophenylamidinourea; 3-bromo-4-chlorophenylamidinourea; 3-chloro-
4-fluorophenylamidinourea; 3-bromo-4-fluorophenylamidinourea; 3-fluoro-
4-chiorophenylamidinourea; 2,6-dimethylphenylamidinourea; 2,6-diethyl-
25 phenylamidinourea; 2-methyl-6-ethylphenylamidinourea; 2-methyl-6-
methoxyphenylamidinourea; 2-methyl-6-ethoxyphenylamidinourea; 2-
ethyl-6-methoxyphenylamidinourea; 2-ethyl-6-ethoxyphenylamidinourea;
3,4-dimethoxyphenylamidinourea; 3,4-dihydroxyphenylamidinourea;
3,4,5-trimethoxyphenylamidinourea; 3,4,5-trihydroxyphenylamidinourea;
30 2-[{2-methyl-3-aminophenyl)amino]-1-pyrroline r dihydrochloride; 2-[{2-
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-210-
methyl-3-acetamidophenyl)amino]-1 -pyrroline, hydrochloride; or 2-[(2-
methyl-3-(ethoxycarbonylamino)phenyl-)amtno]-1 -pyrroline, hydrochloride.
69. The composition of claim 1 2 in which the compounds of
formula (I) are 2 — substituted — 1 — azabicyclo[2. 2.2. ]octanes of the
wherein:
R 2 is lower alkylene or lower alkenylene;
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from a 6— to 10-
10 membered aryl ring system or a 5— to 10-membered heteroaryl ring
system, wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are optionally
substituted with one or more aryl group substituents; and
R 4 is alkyl of 1 to 8 carbons, alkenyl of 3 to 6 carbon atoms,
cycloalkyl of 3 to 6 carbons, cycloalkyl alkyl in which the cycloalkyl
15 contains 3 to 6 carbons and the alkyl contains 1 to 3 carbons, or
cycloalkenyl of 4 to 7 carbons.
70. The composition of claim 69, wherein:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from phenyl that is
unsubstituted or substituted with up to three substituents selected from
20 halo, halo alkyl of 1 to 4 carbons or alkyl of 1 to 4 carbons;
R 2 is alkylene of 1 to 3 carbon atoms; and
R 4 is alkyl of 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
71. The composition of claim 69, comprising 2-(2,2-diphenyl-
pentyl)-1-azabicylo[2.2.2]octane, 2-(2,2-diphenylhexyl)-1-azabi-
25 cylo[2.2.2]octane, 2-(2,2-diphenylpropyl)-1 -azabicylo[2.2.2]octane, 2-
(2,2-diphenyloctyl)-1-azabicylot2.2.2loctane and 2-(2,2-diphenylheptyl)-1 -
azabicylo[2.2.2]octane.
72. The composition of claim 1 that is formulated as a cream.
5
formula:
XIII
WO 97/09973
PCT7US96/14727
-211-
73. The composition of claim 2 that is formulated as a cream.
74. The composition of claim 2 that is formulated as a lotion.
75. The composition of claim 2 that is formulated as a gel.
76. The composition of claim 2 that is formulated as a foam.
5 77. The composition of claim 1 that is formulated as a
suppository for rectal use and contains greater than about 1 % by weight
of the compound.
78. The composition of claim 2 that is formulated as a
suppository for rectal use and contains greater than about 1 % by weight
10 of the compound.
79. The composition of claim 1 that is formulated as a vaginal
suppository.
80. The composition of claim 2 that is formulated as a vaginal
suppository.
15 81 • The composition of claim 1 that is formulated as an oral or
nasal spray or aerosol that contains greater than about 1 % by weight of
the compound.
82. The composition of claim 1 that is formulated for topical or
local application to the eye.
20 83. The composition of claim 2 that is formulated as an aerosol
or spray for topical application to the surface of the skin.
84. The composition of claim 2 that is formulated as an aqueous
suspenion containing greater than about 1 % by weight of the compound.
85. The composition of claim 2 that is formulated as an
25 emulsion.
86. A combination, comprising 2 composition of claim 1 and a
patch, sterile bandage, a bioadhesive or sterile gauze.
87. The composition of claim 2 in combination with one or more
additional active ingredients selected from antibacterials, antivirals,
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-212-
antifungals, anti-inflammatories, anti-glaucoma agents, anesthetics and
mixtures thereof.
88. The composition of claim 87 in combination with an antiviral
agent.
5 89. The composition of claim 88, wherein the antiviral agent is
selected from the group consisting of purines and pyrimidinones,
Acetylleucine Monoethanolamine, Acridinamine, Alkylisooxazoles,
Amantadine, Amidinomycin, Cuminaldehyde Thiosemicarbzone, Foscarnet
Sodium, Kethoxal, Lysozyme, Methisazone, Moroxydine, Podophyllotoxin,
10 Ribavirin, Rimantadine, Stallimycin, Statolon, Thymosins, Tromantadine
and Xenazoic Acid.
90. The composition of claim 87 in combination with an
antifungal agent or antibacterial agent.
91. The composition of claim 90, wherein the agent is an
15 antibacterial selected from the group consisting of Aminoglycosides,
Amphenicols, Ansamycins, /ff-Lactams, Carbapenems, Cephalosporins,
Cephamycins, Monobactams, Oxacephems, Penicillins, Lincosamides,
Macrolides, Amphomycin, Bacitracin, Capreomycin, Colistin, Enduracidin,
Enviomycin, Fusafungine, Gramicidin(s), Mikamycin, Polymyxin,
20 Polymyxin /?-Methanesulfonic Acid, Pristinamycin, Ristocetin, Teicoplanin,
Thiostrepton, Tuberactinomycin, Tyrocidine, Tyrothricin, Vancomycin,
Viomycin(s), Virginiamycin Zinc Bacitracin, Tetracyclines, Cycloserine,
Mupirocin, Tuberin, 2,4-Diaminopyrimidines, Nitrofurans, Quinolones,
Sulfonamides, Sulfones, Clofoctol, Hexedine, Magainins, Methenamine,
25 Methenamine Anhydromethylene-citrate, Methenamine Hippurate,
Methenamine Mandelate, Methenamine Subsalicylate, Nitroxoline,
Squalamine, and Xibornol.
92. The composition of claim 90, wherein the agent is an
antifungal selected from the group consisting of Polyenes, Allylamines,
30 Imidazoles, Triazoles, Acrisorcin, Amorolfine, Btphenamine,
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-213-
Bromosalicylchloranilide, Buclosamide, Chlophenesin, Ciclopirox,
Cloxyquin, Coparaffinate, Diamthazole, Dihydrochloride, Exalamide,
Flucytosine, Halethazole, Hexetidine, Loflucarban, Nifuratel, Potassium
Iodide, Propionates, Propionic Acid, Pyrithione, Salicylanilide, Sulbentine,
5 Tenonitrozole, Tolciclate, Toiindate, Tolnaftate, Tricetin, Ujothion, and
Undecylenic Acid.
93. The composition of claim 87 in combination with an
antiinflammatory agent.
94. The composition of claim 93, wherein the agent is selected
10 from the group consisting of Corticosteriods, Aminoarylcarboxylic Acid
Derivatives, Arylacetic Acid Derivatives, Arylbutyric Acid Derivatives,
Arylcarboxylic Acids, Arylpropionic Acid Derivatives, Pyrazoles,
Pyrazolones, Salicylic Acid and derivatives thereof, Thiazinecarboxamides,
e-Acetamidocaproic Acid, S-Adenosylmethionine, 3-Amino-4-hydroxybuty-
15 ric Acid, Amixetrine, Bendazac, Bucolome, Carbazones, Difenpiramide,
Ditazol, Guaiazulene, Heterocylic Aminoalkyl Esters of Mycophenolic Acid
and derivatives thereof, Nabumetone, Nimesulide, Orgotein, Oxaceprol,
Oxazole derivatives, Paranyline, Pifoxime, 2-substituted-4,6-di-
tertiary-butyl-s-hydroxy-1 ,3-pyrimidines, Proquazone and Tenidap.
20 95. The composition of claim 87 in combination with an
antiseptic.
96. The composition of claim 95, wherein the antiseptic is
selected from the group consisting of Guanidines, Halogens/Halogen
Compounds, Nitrofurans, Phenols, Quinolines, Boric Acid, Chloroazodin,
25 m-Cresyl Acetate, Cupric Sulfate and Ichthammol.
97. The composition of claim 96 in combination with an antiviral
agent.
98. The composition of claim 97, wherein the agent is selected
from the group consisting of Purines/Pyrimidinones, Acetylleucine
30 Monoethanolamine, Acridinamine, Alkylisooxazoles, Amantadine,
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-214-
Amidinomycin, Cuminaldehyde Thiosemicarbzone, Foscarnet Sodium,
Kethoxal, Lysozyme, Methisazone, Moroxydine, Podophyllotoxin,
Ribavirin, Rimantadine, Stallimycin, Statolon, Thymosins, Tromantadine
and Xenazoic Acid.
5 99. The composition of claim 31 formulated for topical
administration to the skin.
100. The composition of claim 31 formulated for topical
administration to the mucosa and containing greater than about 1 % by
weight of the compound.
10 101. The composition of claim 31 formulated for local
administration and containing greater than about 1% by weight of the
compound.
102. The composition of claim 19 that contains the compound in
an amount of greater than about 1 to about 10%.
15 103. The composition of claim 102 that contains the compound
an amount of from about 2 to about 10%.
104. The composition of claim 103 that contains the compound
an amount of from about 2 to about 8%.
105. The composition of claim 104 that contains the compound
20 an amount of about 5%.
106. The composition of claim 105, wherein the compound is
4— (p — chloropheny I) — 4 — hydroxy — N — N — dimethyl — ar,o— diphenyl— 1
piperidinebutyramide hydrochloride.
107. The composition of claim 19, wherein the vehicle is
25 formulated for administration to a surface selected from the group
consisting of skin and mucosal surfaces.
108. The composition of claim 107, wherein the vehicle is
formulated for administration to a skin surface.
109. The composition of claim 107, wherein the vehicle is
30 formulated for administration to a mucosal surface.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-215-
1 10. The composition of claim 109, wherein the mucosal surface
is selected from the group consisting of the eyes, mouth, larynx,
esophagus, bronchial passages, nasal passages, vagina and rectum/anus.
111. The composition of claim 110, wherein the mucosal surface
5 comprises an eye.
1 12. The composition of claim 1 10, wherein the mucosal surface
comprises the mouth.
1 1 3. The composition of claim 1 1 2, wherein the mouth surface is
selected from the group consisting of the lips, tongue, gums, cheeks,
10 sublingual and roof of the mouth.
1 14. The composition of claim 1 10, wherein the mucosal surface
comprises the larynx.
115. The composition of claim 1 10, wherein the mucosal surface
comprises the esophagus.
15 116. The composition of claim 1 10, wherein the mucosal surface
comprises the bronchial passages.
1 17. The composition of claim 1 10, wherein the mucosal surface
comprises the nasal passages.
1 18. The composition of claim 1 10, wherein the mucosal surface
20 comprises the vagina.
119. The composition of claim 110, wherein the mucosal surface
comprises the rectum/anus.
120. The composition of claim 107, wherein the vehicle is
formulated for the prevention or treatment of a hyperalgesic condition
25 associated with burns, abrasions, bruises, contusions, frostbite, rashes,
acne, insect bites/stings, skin ulcers, mucositis, inflammation, gingivitis,
bronchitis, laryngitis, sore throat, shingles, fungal irritation, fever blisters,
boils, Piantar's warts or vaginal lesions.
121 . The composition of claim 120, wherein the vehicle is
30 formulated for the prevention or treatment of a hyperalgesic condition
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-216-
associated with burns, abrasions, bruises, contusions, frostbite, rashes,
acne, insect bites/stings, skin ulcers, mucositis, gingivitis, bronchitis,
laryngitis, sore throat, shingles, fungal irritation, fever blisters, boils,
Plantar's warts or vaginal lesions.
5 122. The composition of claim 120, wherein the vehicle is
formulated for the prevention or treatment of a hyperalgesic condition
associated with burns, abrasions, bruises, contusions, frostbite, rashes,
acne, insect bites/stings, skin ulcers, mucositis, inflammation, gingivitis,
shingles, fungal irritation, fever blisters, boils, Plantar's warts or vaginal
10 lesions.
123. The composition of claim 120, wherein the vehicle is
formulated for the prevention or treatment of a hyperalgesic condition
associated with a burn and the burn is selected from the group consisting
of thermal, radiation, chemical, sun and wind burns.
15 124. The composition of claim 123, wherein the burn comprises
sunburn.
125. The composition of claim 120, wherein the vehicle is
formulated for the prevention or treatment of a hyperalgesic condition
associated with a rash and the rash is selected from the group consisting
20 of allergic, heat, contact dermatitis and diaper rashes.
126. The composition of claim 125, wherein the contact
dermatitis comprises poison ivy.
127. The composition of claim 120, wherein the vehicle is
formulated for the prevention or treatment of a hyperalgesic condition
25 associated with a skin ulcer and the skin ulcer is selected from the group
consisting of diabetic and decubitus ulcers.
128. The composition of claim 120, wherein the vehicle is
formulated for the prevention or treatment of a hyperalgesic condition
associated with inflammation and the inflammation is selected from the
WO 97/09973
PCT7US96/14727
-217-
group consisting of periodontal inflammation, orthodontic inflammation,
inflammatory conjunctivitis, hemorrhoids and venereal inflammations.
129. The composition of claim 120, wherein the vehicle is
formulated for the prevention or treatment of a hyperalgesic condition
5 associated with an abrasion and the abrasion comprises a corneal
abrasion.
130. The composition of claim 120, wherein the vehicle is
formulated for the prevention or treatment of a hyperalgesic condition
associated with a fungal irritation and the fungal irritation is selected from
10 the group consisting of athlete's foot and jock itch.
131 . The composition of claim 120, wherein the vehicle is
formulated for the prevention or treatment of a hyperalgesic condition
associated with a vaginal lesion and the vaginal lesion is associated with
mycosis or sexually transmitted diseases.
15 132 - Tne composition of claim 19, wherein the vehicle is
formulated for the prevention or treatment of a hyperalgesic condition
associated with post— surgical recovery.
1 33. The composition of claim 1 32, wherein the surgery is
selected from the group consisting of radial keratectomy, tooth
20 extraction, lumpectomy, episiotomy, laparoscopy and arthroscopy.
134. The composition of claim 19, wherein the vehicle comprises
from greater than 0 to about 10 wt.% of a monobasic salt of phosphoric
acid and from greater than 0 to about 10 wt.% of a dibasic salt of
phosphoric acid.
25 135 - The composition of claim 134, wherein the vehicle further
comprises from greater than 0 to about 5 wt.% propylene glycol.
136. The composition of claim 135, wherein the vehicle comprises
from greater than 0 to about 5 wt.% of the monobasic salt.
137. The composition of claim 136, wherein the vehicle comprises
30 from about 0.1 to about 0.5 wt.% of the monobasic salt.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-218-
138. The composition of claim 137, wherein the vehicle comprises
about 0.2 wt.% of the monobasic salt.
139. The composition of claim 135, wherein the vehicle comprises
from about 0.1 to about 5 wt.% of the dibasic salt.
5 140. The composition of claim 139, wherein the vehicle comprises
from about 0.5 to about 2 wt.% of the dibasic salt.
141 . The composition of claim 140, wherein the vehicle comprises
from about 1 to about 2 wt.% of the dibasic salt.
142. The composition of claim 141, wherein the vehicle comprises
10 about 1.3 wt.% of the dibasic salt.
143. The composition of claim 135, wherein the vehicle further
comprises from greater than 0 to about 10 wt.% of a tribasic salt of
phosphoric acid.
144. The composition of claim 143, wherein the vehicle comprises
15 from greater than 0 to about 5 wt.% of the tribasic salt.
145. The composition of claim 144, wherein the vehicle comprises
from about 0.1 to about 1 wt.% of the tribasic salt.
146. The composition of claim 145, wherein the vehicle comprises
about 0.6 wt.% of the tribasic salt.
20 147. The composition of claim 135, wherein the vehicle comprises
from about 0.1 to less than about 5 wt.% propylene glycol.
148. The composition of claim 147, wherein the vehicle comprises
from about 0.5 to about 2 wt.% propylene glycol.
149. The composition of claim 148, wherein the vehicle comprises
25 about 1 wt.% propylene glycol.
1 50. The composition of claim 1 34 that comprises 4— (p — chloro-
phenyl) —4— hydroxy — N — N — dimethyl— diphenyl — 1 — piperidine-
butyramide hydrochloride.
WO 97/09973
PCTYUS96/14727
-219-
151. The composition of claim 135 that comprises 4 — (p — chloro-
phenyl)— 4— hydroxy- N-N-dimethyl -a,ff-diphenyl—1 -piperidine-
butyramide hydrochloride.
152. The composition of claim 134, wherein the vehicle comprises
5 two or more salts of phosphoric acid which are selected from the group
consisting of a monobasic salt of phosphoric acid, a dibasic salt of
phosphoric acid, and a tribasic salt of phosphoric acid.
153. The composition of claim 152, wherein the vehicle comprises
a monobasic salt of phosphoric acid and a dibasic salt of phosphoric acid.
10 154. The composition of claim 19, wherein the vehicle comprises
from greater than 0 to less than about 5 wt.% propylene glycol.
155. The composition of claim 135 that comprises
4 — (p — chlorophenyl) —4— hydroxy— N — N— dimethyl — a,<7—di-
phenyl— 1 — piperidinebutyramide hydrochloride in a vehicle comprising
15 about 0.2 wt.% of a monobasic salt of phosphoric acid, about 1.3 wt.%
of a dibasic salt of phosphoric acid, and about 1 wt.% of propylene
glycol.
156. The composition of claim 19 in combination with one or
more additional active ingredients selected from antibacterials, antivirals,
20 antifungals, anti-inflammatories, anti-glaucoma agents, anesthetics and
mixtures thereof.
157. A method of preventing or treating peripheral hyperalgesia,
comprising administering topically or locally to a mammal an effective
amount of a composition of claim 1.
25 158. A method of preventing or treating peripheral hyperalgesia,
comprising administering topically or locally to a mammal an effective
amount of a composition of claim 2.
159. A method of preventing or treating peripheral hyperalgesia,
comprising topically or locally administering to a mammal in need of such
30 prevention or treatment an effective amount of a composition of claim 3.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-220-
1 60. A method of preventing or treating peripheral hyperalgesia,
comprising topically or locally administering to a mammal in need of such
treatment an effective amount of a composition of claim 31 .
161. A method of preventing or treating peripheral hyperalgesia,
comprising administering topically or locally to a mammal in need of such
prevention or treatment an effective amount of a composition, comprising
in a vehicle formulated for topical or local administration, one or more
compounds of the following formula (I):
10
15
R 4
Ar 1
•M
Ar2
where M is:
R7
N
(CH^ RJ
97
NR 5 R 6
20
wherein:
or
NT }
is an azabicycloalkyl containing from 6 to 9 carbon atoms with at least 5
25 atoms in each ring and is optionally substituted with OR 18 in which R 18 is
hydrogen or lower alkanoyl containing 2 to 7 carbons and OR 18 is at the 5
WO 97/09973
PCT7US96/14727
-221-
position in 5-membered rings or the 5 or 6 position in 6-membered rings
and R 3 , R 7 and R are attached in the endo or exo configuration;
X 1 , X 2 and X 3 are -C(R 24 )(R 25 )-, - C(R 24 ) = C(R 25 > - ,
-C(R 24 ) = N- r -N = C(R 24 )-, -C( = 0)-, -O-, -S- or — N(R 24 ) — , in
5 which R 24 and R 25 are independently hydrogen or lower alkyl r with the
proviso that only one of X 1 , X 2 and X 3 is O, S or NR 24 ;
each of Ar 1 and Ar 2 are independently selected from (i) or (ii) as
10 membered heteroaryl ring system containing one or more heteroatoms,
wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are each optionally
substituted with one or more aryl group substituents, or
together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached, form a fused
15 ring system so that the compounds of formula (I) have the formula:
A and B independently represent fused phenyl or pyridyl rings;
X 4 is a direct bond, -(CH 2 ) n -, -CH = CH-, -CH = CHCH 2 -,
20 -(CH 2 ) p O(CH 2 ) q -, -(CH 2 ) p S(0> r (CH 2 ) q -, -<CH 2 ) p NR 21 <CH 2 ) q - or
follows:
(i) a 6— to 10-membered aryl ring system or a 5— to 10-
(ii) optionally substituted phenyl or pyridyl groups which,
R2
25
R 21 is hydrogen or lower alkyl;
m is an integer from 1 to 3;
n is an integer from 0 to 3;
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-222-
each of p and q is 0 or 1 , and the sum of p and q is no greater
than 2;
r is O to 2;
R 2 is a direct bond, straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 12
5 carbon atoms, which is optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy
groups, or alkenylene of 2 to 6 carbon atoms and one or two double
bonds;
R 3 is selected from Ar 3 , — Y — Ar 3 where Y is alkylene of 1 to 3
carbon atoms, alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl of 3 to 8
10 carbons, heterocycle, alkenyl, alkanoyl, alkenoyl of 3 to 10 carbons and
1 to 3 double bonds, aroyl, heteroaroyl, alkoxycarbonyl,
alkenyloxycarbonyl of 3 to 10 carbons and 1 to 3 double bonds,
aryloxycarbonyl, formyl ( — CHO), cyano, aminocarbonyl ( — CONH 2 ),
alkylaminocarbonyl, dialkylaminocarbonyl, arylaminocarbonyl,
15 diarylaminocarbonyl, arylalkylaminocarbonyi, or
O
N— C— AT*
R8 '*
where any of the aryt groups are unsubstituted or substituted with
one or more aryl substitutents, and any other groups set forth for R 3 are
unsubstituted or substituted with halo, hydroxy or alkoxy; and
20 R 8 is hydrogen or straight or branched chain alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon
atoms, which is unsubstituted or substituted with an alkyl group
substitutent;
Ar 3 is a 6— to 10-membered aryl ring system or a 5— to 10-
membered heteroaryl ring system containing one or more heteroatoms in
25 which the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are each optionally substituted
with one or more aryl group substituents;
Ar 4 is
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-223-
(i) heterocycle containing 1 ring or 2 or more fused rings,
wherein each ring contains one or more heteroatoms and is optionally
substituted with one or more aryl group substituents;
(ii) a radical of the formula:
where, R , R 11 and R 12 are each independently
selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkyloxy, alkoxyalkyl, halo, haloalkyl,
hydroxy, cyano, nitro, amino, alkylamino, di{alkyl)amino,
aminocarbonyl, arylcarbonylamino, alkylcarbonylamino,
10 alkylcarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, aminosulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl,
alkylsulfonyl, alkylthio, mercapto, C 3 _ 6 alkenyloxy, C 3 _ 6 alkynyloxy,
arylalkyloxy or aryloxy, in which each group is unsubstituted or
substituted with one or more substituents selected from halo, halo
alkyl and alkyl, and the alkyl groups are straight or branched chains
15 that are lower alkyl; or
(iii) 1 — or 2 — naphthyl, drhydronaphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl,
indenyl or dihydroindenyl, each of which is optionally substituted with
one or more aryl group substituents;
R is hydrogen, alkyl, halo, haloalkyl, OR 9 or alkenyl;
20 R 9 is hydrogen, alkyl, arylalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, aminoalkyl,
alkylaminoalkyl or dialkylaminoalkyl, in which the alkyl groups are straight
or branched chains of 1 to 12 carbon atoms;
R 4 is selected from among:
(i) a 6— to 10-membered aryl ring system or a 5— to 10-
25 membered heteroaryl ring system containing one or more heteroatoms,
wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are each optionally
substituted with one or more aryl group substituents;
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
10
-224-
(ii) heterocyclic rings which contain one to three heteroatoms
and which are unsubstituted or substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl,
hydroxy, lower alkoxy or lower alkyl;
(Hi) alkyl of 1 to 8 carbons, which is optionally substituted
with hydroxy or alkylcarbonyloxy; alkenyl of 3 to 6 carbons;
cycloalkylalkyl in which the cycloalkyl contains 3 to 8 carbons and the
alkyl contains 1 to 3 carbons; cycloalkenylalkyl in which the cycloalkenyl
contains 3 to 8 carbons and the alkyl contains 1 to 3 carbons;
(iv)
x 5
R 5
/
N
\
R 6
X 5 is O or S;
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(a) hydrogen, straight or branched chain alkyl of 1 to 1 2
carbon atoms, straight or branched chain alkenyl of 2 to 12 carbon atoms
15 and one or two double bonds, a 6— to 10-membered aryl ring system,
which is optionally substituted with one or more aryl group substituents,
or arylalkyl; and
(b) carbon chains, heteroatoms, and carbon chains
containing one or more heteroatoms, so that, together with the nitrogen
20 atom to which they are attached, form a 3— to 10-membered
heterocyclic ring containing one or more heteroatoms that is
unsubstituted or substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl,
hydroxy, lower alkoxy;
(v) cyano, formyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl,
25 alkylcarbonyl or arylcarbonyl;
(vi) -NR 5 COR 5 ; and
(vii) — S(0) r alkyl or — S(0) r aryl, where r is 1 or 2; and
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/I4727
-225-
R 7 is selected from among:
hydrogen;
-OH;
-R 14 OR 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or alkanoyl
5 containing 2 to 5 carbon atoms, and R 14 is lower alkenyl or lower alkyl;
— CH 2 NR 15 R 16 in which R 15 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower
alkanoyl, aryl or aroyl and R' 6 is hydrogen or lower alkyl or, together with
the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, R 15 and R 16 form a 3 to 7-
membered ring which optionally contains an additional heteroatom
10 selected from oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur;
-OR 15 ;
-C(0)H;
-CN;
-C( = 0)-NR 5 R 6 ;
15 alkyl;
aryl;
— C(0)OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 7 carbon
atoms, alkenyl of 3 to 7 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl ring
system, an optionally substituted heteroaryl ring system containing one or
20 more heteroatoms, arylalkyl, or a pharmaceutically acceptable cation;
wherein the optional aryl group substituents are selected from halo,
hydroxy, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl,
heteroarylalkyl, alkenyl containing 1 to 2 double bonds, alkynyl containing
1 to 2 triple bonds, haloalkyl, polyhaloalkyl, formyl, alkylcarbonyl,
25 arylcarbonyl, heteroarylcarbonyl, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl,
aryloxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, alkylaminocarbonyl, dialkylamino-
carbonyl, arylaminocarbonyl, diarylaminocarbonyl, arylalkylaminocarbonyl,
alkoxy, aryloxy, perfluoroalkoxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, arylalkoxy,
aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, arylaminoalkyl, amino,
30 alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, alkylarylamino, alkylcarbonylamino,
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-226-
arylcarbonylamino, azido, nitro, mercapto, alkylthio, arylthio,
perfluoroalkylthio, thiocyano, isothiocyano, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsufonyl,
arylsulfinyl, arylsulfonyl, aminosuifonyl, alkylaminosulfonyl,
dialkylaminosulfonyl and arylaminosulfony;
5 or a salt, hydrate or N — oxide thereof; and
the amount is effective to treat or prevent hyperalgesia.
162. The method of claim 161, wherein:
R 3 is selected from Ar 3 , — Y — Ar 3 where Y is alkylene of 1 to 3
carbon atoms, alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl of 3 to 8
10 carbons, heterocycle, alkenyl, alkanoyl, alkenoyl of 3 to 10 carbons and
1 to 3 double bonds, aroyl, heteroaroyl, alkoxycarbonyl,
alkenyloxycarbonyl of 3 to 10 carbons and 1 to 3 double bonds,
aryloxycarbonyl, formyl ( — CHO), cyano, aminocarbonyl ( — CONH 2 ),
alkylaminocarbonyl, dialkylaminocarbonyl, arylaminocarbonyt,
15 diarylaminocarbonyl or arylalkylaminocarbonyl.
163. The method of claim 161, wherein the composition is applied
topically.
1 64. The method of claim 1 63, wherein the aryl or heteroaryl
groups in Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 , Ar 4 , R 4 and R 7 are each optionally substituted with
20 one to three aryl group substituents.
165. The method of claim 164, wherein the heteroaryl and
heterocyclic groups in Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 , Ar 4 , R 4 and R 7 each contain one to
three heteroatoms.
166. The method of claim 161, wherein the compound is selected
25 with the provisos that:
(i) when Ar 3 is 1 — (3 — propionyl — 2 — imidazolinon)yl, then R 4 is
other than — CN;
(ii) when R 4 is — C( = X 5 ) — NR 5 R 6 , X 5 is O and R 5 and R 6 , together
with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form pyrrolidinyl, then
30 M is other than 4 — morpholinyl;
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-227-
(iii) when M is — NR 5 R 6 and R 5 and R 6 are methyl, then R 4 is other
than 1 — hydroxypropyl (CH 3 CH 2 CH(OH) -) or ethylcarbonyl
(CH 3 CH 2 C( = 0)-);
(iv) when M is 4 — morpholinyl or 1 — piperidinyl, then R 4 is other
5 than ethylcarbonyl (CH 3 CH 2 C( = 0) — ); and
(v) when M is 4— morpholinyl, than R 4 is other than ethoxycarbonyl
(CH 3 CH 2 OC{ = 0)-).
167. The method of claim 163, wherein:
m is 2;
10 R 2 is alkylene of 1 to 3 carbons or alkenylene of 2 to 3 carbons;
Ar\ Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each independently phenyl or pyridyl,
optionally substituted with up to three substituents selected from halo,
halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl;
R 8 is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
15 Ar 4 is indolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl, isoquinolinyl, quinolinyl,
benzimidazolyl, naphthyl, thienyl, furanyl, pyridinyl, thiazolyl or imidazolyl,
each of which is optionally substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or
lower alkyl; R is hydrogen, lower alkyl, halo, halo lower alkyl or OR 9 , and
is at the 3 — position as follows:
20
R 9 is hydrogen, alkyl, arylalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, aminoalkyl,
alkylaminoalkyl or dialkylaminoalkyl, in which the alkyl groups are straight
or branched chains of 1 to 6 carbons in the chain;
25 R 4 is selected from among:
(i) phenyl or pyridyl which are each optionally substituted
with lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl or halo,
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-228-
(ii) pyrrolidinyl, oxadtazolyl or triazolyl radicals, each of which
is optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently selected
from halo, halo lower alkyl, hydroxy, lower alkoxy or lower alkyl,
(iii) alkyl containing from 1 to 6 carbons, or
5 (iv)
X1
A CO • OX
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(a) hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, and aryl, each of
which are unsubstituted or substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl, lower
alkyl, hydroxy or lower alkoxy, or
10 (b) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
attached, form a piperidinyl, morpholinyl or pyrrolidinyl radical that is
optionally substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl; and
R 7 is selected from:
hydrogen;
15 -OH;
— R 14 0R 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen or lower alkyl, and R 14 is
methylene or ethylene;
— CH 2 NR 15 R 1S in which R 15 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or lower
alkanoyl and R 16 is hydrogen or lower alkyl;
20 -OR' 5 ;
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-229-
— C(0)OR 17 in which R' 7 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, alkenyl of
3 to 5 carbon atoms, pyridyl, phenyl, tolyl, ethylphenyl, butylphenyl or
halophenyl or a sodium, potassium, calcium or ammonium ion.
168. The method of claim 163, wherein:
5 the azabicycloalkyl in M is
m is 2;
Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each independently phenyl or pyridyl,
optionally substituted with up to three substituents selected from halo,
halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl;
10 R 8 is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
Ar 4 is indolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl, isoquinolinyl, quinolinyl,
benzimidazolyl, naphthyl, thienyl, furanyl, pyridinyl, thiazolyl or imidazolyl,
each of which is optionally substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or
lower alkyl;
15 R 2 is -CH = CH-, -(CH 2 ) 2 - or -CH 2 CH(CH 3 )-;
R is hydrogen, lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl, halo or OR 9 , and is at
the 3 — position as follows:
R
20 R 9 is selected from alkyl, arylalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, aminoalkyl,
alkylaminoalkyl or dialkylaminoalkyl, in which the alkyl groups are straight
or branched chain of 1 to 6 carbons;
R 4 is selected from among:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-230-
(i) phenyl, pyridyl, which are each optionally substituted with
lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl or halo, or
(ii) pyrrolidinyl, oxadiazolyl or triazolyl radicals, each of which
is unsubstituted or substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently
5 selected from halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl,
(iii) lower alkyl of 1 to 6 carbons, or
(iv)
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(a) hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl or aryl, each of
10 which is unsubstituted or substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or lower
alkyl, or
(b) together with the nitrogen atom to which each is
attached, form a piperidinyl, morpholinyl or pyrrolidinyl radical that is
unsubstituted or substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl; and
15 R 7 is selected from:
hydrogen;
-OH;
— R 14 "OR 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen or lower alkyl, and R 14 is
methylene or ethylene;
20 — CH 2 NR ,5 R 16 in which R 15 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or lower
alkanoyl and R 16 is hydrogen or lower alkyl;
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-231-
-OR 15 ;
-C(0)OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, alkenyl of
3 to 5 carbon atoms, pyridyl, phenyl, tolyl, ethylphenyl, butylphenyl or
halophenyl, or a sodium, potassium, calcium or ammonium ion.
169. The method of claim 163 in which the compounds of formula
(I) are of the formula:
R
10 wherein:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from a 6— to 10-
membered aryl ring system and a 5— to 10-membered heteroaryl ring
system, wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are each optionally
substituted with up to three aryl group substituents;
15 R 3 is
R 3 is Ar 3 or
O
II
N — C — Ar*
I
R"
Ar 3 is a 6— to 10-membered aryl ring system or a 5— to 10-
20 membered heteroaryl ring system, wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring
systems are each optionally substituted with up to three substituents
selected from halo, lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl;
Ar 4 is thienyl, furanyl, pyridinyl, thiazolyl or imidazolyl, each of
which is optionally substituted with halo, lower alkyl or halo lower alkyl,
25 or Ar 4 is a radical of the formula:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-232-
R 10 , R 11 and R 12 are each independently selected from hydrogen,
alkyl, alkyloxy, halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, cyano, nitro, amino, alkylamino,
di(alkyl)amino, aminocarbonyl, arylcarbonylamino, alkylcarbonylamino,
5 alkylcarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, aminosulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl,
alkylthio, mercapto, C 3 _ 6 alkenyloxy, C 3 _ 6 alkynyloxy, arylalkyloxy, aryloxy
or alkyl, in which each group is optionally substituted with up to four
substituents selected from halo, halo alkyl and alkyl, and the alkyl groups
are straight or branched chains of 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
10 R 2 is straight or branched chain alkyl of 1 to 1 2 carbons;
R is hydrogen, alkyl or OR 9 ;
R 9 is alkyl, arylalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl or
dialkylaminoalkyl, in which the alkyl groups are straight or branched chain
of 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
15 R 4 is phenyl, pyridyl, cyano or:
° R s
1 N
\
R*
20
R s and R 6 are independently selected from:
(i) hydrogen, straight or branched chain alkyl of 1 to 3
carbons or alkenyl of 2 to 4 carbons and 1 double bond; or
(ii) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
25 attached, form a heterocycle selected from pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl,
alkylpiperidinyl, morpholinyl, oxadiazolyl and triazolyl radicals, each of
which is optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected
from halo, halo lower alkyl, hydroxy, lower alkoxy and lower alkyl;
R 7 is — H, —OH. — C(0)0R 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen or lower
30 alkyl, — C(0)H or — R 14 OR 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 4
carbons, or alkanoyl of 2 or 3 carbon atoms, and R 14 is methylene or
ethylene; and
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-233-
R 8 is hydrogen or straight or branched chain alkyl containing from 1
to 3 carbon atoms.
170. The method of claim 169, wherein the vehicle comprises
from greater than 0 to about 10 wt.% of a monobasic salt of phosphoric
5 acid and from greater than 0 to about 10 wt.% of a dibasic salt of
phosphoric acid.
171. The method of claim 1 70, wherein the vehicle further
comprises from greater than 0 to about 5 wt.% propylene glycol.
172. A method of claim 171, wherein the vehicle comprises from
10 greater than 0 to about 5 wt.% of the monobasic salt.
173. The method of claim 172, wherein the vehicle comprises
from about 0.1 to about 0.5 wt.% of the monobasic salt.
174. The method of claim 173, wherein the vehicle comprises
about 0.2 wt.% of the monobasic salt.
1 5 175. The method of claim 170, wherein the vehicle comprises
from about 0.1 to about 5 wt.% of the dibasic salt.
176. The method of claim 175, wherein the vehicle comprises
from about 0.5 to about 2 wt.% of the dibasic salt.
177. The method of claim 176, wherein the vehicle comprises
20 from about 1 to about 2 wt.% of the dibasic salt.
178. The method of claim 177, wherein the vehicle comprises
about 1.3 wt.% of the dibasic salt.
179. The method of claim 170, wherein the vehicle further
comprises from greater than 0 to about 10 wt.% of a tribasic salt of
25 phosphoric acid.
180. The method of claim 179, wherein the vehicle comprises
from greater than 0 to about 5 wt.% of the tribasic salt.
181. The method of claim 180, wherein the vehicle comprises
from about 0.1 to about 1 wt.% of the tribasic salt.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-234-
182. The method of claim 181, wherein the vehicle comprises
about 0.6 wt.% of the tribasic salt.
183. The method of claim 171, wherein the vehicle comprises
from about 0.1 to less than about 5 wt.% propylene glycol.
5 184. The method of claim 183, wherein the vehicle comprises
from about 0.5 to about 2 wt.% propylene glycol.
185. The method of claim 184, wherein the vehicle comprises
about 1 wt.% propylene glycol.
186. The method of claim 170 which comprises topically
10 administering to the mammal a composition comprising
4 — (p — chlorophenyl) — 4 — hydroxy — N — N — dimethyl — a, a— di-
phenyl— 1 — piperidinebutyramide or a salt or N— oxide thereof.
187. The method of claim 186, wherein the salt comprises the
hydrochloride salt.
15 188. The method of claim 186, wherein the salt comprises a
quaternary ammonium salt.
189. The method of Claim 171, wherein the vehicle comprises
two or more salts of phosphoric acid which are selected from the group
consisting of a monobasic salt of phosphoric acid, a dibasic salt of
20 phosphoric acid, and a tribasic salt of phosphoric acid.
190. The method of claim 189, wherein the vehicle comprises a
monobasic salt of phosphoric acid and a dibasic salt of phosphoric acid.
191. The method of claim 171, wherein the vehicle comprises
from greater than 0 to less than about 5 wt.% propylene glycol.
25 192. The method of claim 171 which comprises topically
administering to the mammal a composition comprising 4— (p — chloro-
phenyl) — 4— hydroxy — N — N— dimethyl — o,ff—dipheny I — 1 —piperidine-
butyramide, or a salt or N — oxide thereof, in a vehicle which comprises
about 0.2 wt.% of a monobasic salt of phosphoric acid, about 1.3 wt.%
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-235-
of a dibasic salt of phosphoric acid, and about 1 wt.% of propylene
glycol.
1 93. The method of claim 1 69 in which the compounds of formula
(I) are of the formula:
5
R
R 4
Ar-
R N Y II
» 2 \ J c 3
Ar R
wherein:
»4
R is phenyl, pyridyl, cyano or
10 ° R 1
o
■N
\
15
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(i> hydrogen, lower alkyl, phenyl or lower alkenyl, or
(ii) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
attached form a heterocycle selected from 1 ,3,4-oxadiazolyl,
4-morpholinyl, or di(C,-C 6 alkyl) -morpholinyl;
R 2 is -<CH 2 ) 2 - or _CH 2 CH(CH 3 )-;
20 FT is -OH, -C(0)0R 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen, methyl or ethyl,
or
-C(0)H;
R is hydrogen, lower alkyl, -C(0)H, or -C(0)OH and is at the
3 — position as follows:
25
and
R 3 is phenyl or halo — substituted phenyl.
194. The method of claim 193, wherein:
WO 97/09973
PCT7US96/14727
-236-
R 7 is -OH, -C(0)OH or -C(0)OCH 2 CH 3 ;
R 3 is phenyl optionally substituted with alkyl, alkoxyalkyl, halo or
trifluoroalkyl;
R is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
5 R 2 is lower alkylene;
R 4 is phenyl, pyridyl or:
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
15 (i) hydrogen, alkyl, phenyl, phenylalkyl or 2 — propenyl, in
which the alkyl groups are lower alkyl; or
<ii) together with the nitrogen to which they are attached
form pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, C, — C 6 alkylpiperidinyl, 4— morpholinyl or
2,6 — ditC^— C 6 alkyOmorpholinyl; and
20 Ar 1 and Ar 2 are independently selected from phenyl or pyridyl.
195. The method of claim 194, wherein:
R is hydrogen or methyl;
R 3 is phenyl optionally substituted with alkyl, alkoxyalkyl, halo or
trifluoroalkyl;
25 R 2 is alkylene containing from 1 to 4 carbons;
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are independently phenyl, which is unsubstituted or
substituted with lower alkyl, alkoxy lower alkyl, halo or halo lower alkyl;
R 4 is cyano or:
30
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-237-
(i) hydrogen, lower alkyl, phenyl, phenyl lower alkyl or
2 — propenyl; or
(ii) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
5 attached, form pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, C, — C 6 alkylpiperidinyl,
4 — morpholinyl or 2,6 — d\(C^— C 6 alkyl) morpholinyl.
196. The method of claim 195 in which the compound has
formula
o
10
or
has formula:
o
or a salt or N — oxide thereof.
197. The method of claim 169, wherein:
20 Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl,
R is hydrogen or methyl,
R 2 is -{CH 2 ) 2 - or -CH 2 CH(CH 3 )-,
R 5 and R 6 are independently methyl or ethyl or, together with the
nitrogen to which they are attached, form pyrrolidinyl or piperidinyl;
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
20
-238-
R 3 is unsubstituted phenyl, 4— chlorophenyl, 4— bromophenyl,
4— fluorophenyl, 3,4, — di — halophenyl or 3 — trifluoromethylphenyl; and
R 7 is -OH.
198. The method of claim 163, wherein the compounds of
formula (I) are of the formula:
R* OH
Ar-
R 2 -N Y HI
wherein:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently a 6— to 10-membered aryl ring
system or a 5— to 10-membered heteroaryl ring system, wherein the aryl
10 and heteroaryl ring systems are optionally substituted with up to three
substituents selected from halo, alkyl and haloalkyl;
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 1 2 carbon atoms,
or straight or branched chain alkenylene of 2 to 12 carbon atoms
containing one double bond;
15 R is hydrogen, alkyl, halo lower alkyl or halo;
R 4 is
FT
/
• N
\
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(i) hydrogen, straight or branched chain alkyl or straight or
branched chain alkenylene, or
(ii) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
25 attached, they form a 3— to 10-membered heterocyclic ring containing
one or two heteroatoms; and
Ar 3 is a 6— to 10-membered aryl ring system or a 5— to 10-
membered heteroaryl ring system containing one or more heteroatoms,
wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are optionally substituted
30 with one or more aryl group substituents.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-239-
199. The method of claim 198, wherein:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from phenyl, which is
optionally substituted with up to three substituents selected from halo,
halo alkyl or alkyl in which the alkyl groups are straight or branched
5 chains of 1 to 6 carbons;
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 3 carbons or
alkenyl of 2 to 3 carbons containing one double bond;
R is hydrogen, lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl or halo, and is in the
3 — position;
10 R 4 is:
O R 5
15
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(i) hydrogen, alkyl or alkenyl, in which the carbon chains are
straight or branched chain of 1 to 6 carbons, or
(ii) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
20 attached, they form pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, alkylpiperidinyl, morpholinyl,
or di(C-| — C 6 alkyl) — morpholinyl; and
Ar 3 is a 6— to 10-membered aryl ring system, which is
unsubstituted or substituted with up to three substituents selected from
halo, halo lower alkyl and lower alkyl.
25 200. The method of claim 163 in which the compounds of formula
(!) are of the formula:
R5
wherein:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-240-
Ar 3 is phenyl, which is optionally substituted with halo; and
R 2 is alkylene containing 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
201. The method of claim 197, wherein the compound is selected
from compounds in which:
5 (i) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R is hydrogen, R 2 is — (CH 2 > 2 — , R 5 and
R 6 , together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form
pyrrolidine, and R 3 is 4— chlorophenyl or 3,4 — dichlorophenyl:
(ii) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R is hydrogen, R 2 is — (CH 2 ) 2 — , R 5 and
R 6 , together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form
10 piperidinyl, and R 3 is phenyl;
(iii) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R 2 is — (CH 2 ) 2 — , R is hydrogen, R 5 and
R 6 are methyl and R 3 is 4— bromophenyl;
(iv) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl. R 2 is — (CH 2 ) 2 — , R is hydrogen, R 5 is
methyl, R 6 is ethyl and R 3 is 4— chlorophenyl;
15 (v) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R 2 is — CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) — , R is hydrogen, R 5
and R 6 are methyl and R 3 is 4— fluorophenyl; and
(vi) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R 2 is — (CH 2 ) 2 — , R is 4— methyl, R 5 and
R 6 are methyl and R 3 is 3 — trifluoromethylphenyl or phenyl.
202. The method of claim 163, comprising a compound selected
20 from 1 —[4— (4 — hydroxy — 4— phenyl — 1 — piperidino) — 2,2 — diphenyl -
butyryl]piperidine; 4— {4— [4— hydroxy— 4— (3— trifluoromethyl-
phenyl)— 1 — piperidino] — 2,2— diphenylbutyryljmorpholine;
1 —{4— [4— hydroxy — 4— (3 — trifluoromethylphenyl)— 1 —piperi-
dino] — 2,2 — diphenylbutyljpiperidine; 4— (p — chlorophenyl) —4— hy-
25 droxy — N — N — ,k— trimethyi — a, a— diphenyl— 1 — piperidine— 1 — butyr-
amide; 4— (p — chlorophenyl) —4— hydroxy — N — N — dimethyl — a, a— di-
phenyl— 1 —piperidine— 1 — butyramide (loperamide); 4— (3,4— dichloro-
phenyl) — N,N— diethyl— 4— hydroxy— a, a— diphenyl — 1 —piperi-
dine— 1 — butyramide; 4— (3,4— dichlorophenyl) — 4— hydroxy — N,N— di-
30 methyl — a, a— diphenyl— 1 —piperidine— 1 —butyramide;
WO 97/09973
PCTVUS96/14727
-241 -
4— (4— chloro — 3— trifluoromethylphenyl)— 4— hydroxy — N,N— dimethyl —
o,o — diphenyl — 1 — piperidine— 1 — butyramide; 4— (p — fluoro-
phenyl) — 4— hydroxy— N — N,K—trimethyl—a,a— diphenyl— 1 —piperi-
dine— 1 — butyramide; 4— (p— bromophenyl) —4— hydroxy— N — N—di-
5 methyl — a, a— diphenyl— 1 —piperidine — 1 —butyramide; 1 -{4-[4-(3,4-
dichlorophenyl) — 4— hydroxypiperidino] — 2,2— diphenylbutyryljpyrrolidine
or 4— (p — chlorophenyl) — N — ethyl— 4— hydroxy — N — methyl — a, a— di-
phenyl— 1 —piperidine— 1 —butyramide.
203. The method of claim 169, wherein the composition
10 comprises 4— (p— chlorophenyl)— 4— hydroxy — N — N — dimethyl — a,a— di-
phenyl— 1 — piperidinebutyramide that has the formula:
ci
15 or a salt or N— oxide thereof.
204. The method of claim 1 69, wherein the composition
comprises 4— (p — chlorophenyl) — 4— hydroxy — N — N— dimethyl — a, a— di-
phenyl— 1 —piperidinebutyramide hydrochloride.
205. A method of treating or preventing pain or irritation
20 associated with hyperalgesia, comprising topically applying to a mammal
in need of such treatment an effective amount of a 4-(p-chlorophenyl)-4-
hydroxy-N,N-dimethyl-a,a-diphenyl-1 -piperidinebutyramide hydrochloride,
wherein the amount is effective to treat or prevent the hyperalgesia.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-242-
206. The method of claim 205, wherein the administration is
effected intra-articularly.
207. The method of claim 163, wherein the peripheral
hyperalgesia is results from a bite, sting, burn, viral or bacterial infection,
5 oral surgery, tooth extraction, injury to the skin and flesh, wound,
abrasion, contusion, surgical incision, sunburn, rash or joint inflammation.
208. The method of claim 203, wherein the peripheral
hyperalgesia results froma a bite, sting, burn, viral or bacterial infection,
oral surgery, tooth extraction, injury to the skin and flesh, wound,
10 abrasion, contusion, surgical incision, sunburn, rash or joint inflammation.
209. The method of claim 163 in which the compounds of formula
(I) are of the formula:
15 wherein:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from a 6— to 10-
membered aryl ring system and a 5— to 10-membered heteroaryl ring
system containing one or more heteroatoms, wherein the aryl and
heteroaryl ring systems are each optionally substituted with up to three
20 aryl group substituents;
Ar 4 is thienyl, furanyl, pyridinyl, thiazolyl or imidazolyl, each of
which is optionally substituted with halo, or Ar 4 is a radical of the
formula:
or'
V
25
R
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-243-
R 10 , R 11 and R 12 are each independently selected from hydrogen,
alkyl, alkyioxy, halide, hydroxy, cyano, nitro, amino, alkylamino,
di(alkyl)amino, aminocarbonyl, arylcarbonylamino, alkylcarbonylamino,
alkylcarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, aminosulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl,
5 alkylthio, mercapto, C 3 _ 6 alkenyloxy, C 3 _ 6 alkynyloxy, arylalkyloxy, aryloxy
or alkyl, in which each group is unsubstituted or substituted with up to 4
halo atoms, and the alkyl groups are straight or branched chains of 1 to 6
carbon atoms;
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
0 R 9 is alkyl, arylalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl or
dialkylaminoalkyl in which the alkyl groups are straight or branched chains
of 1 to 6 carbon atoms in the chain:
R* is:
15
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
20 (•) from hydrogen, aryl containing 6 to 10 members in the
ring, straight or branched chain alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or straight
or branched chain alkenyl of 2 to 6 carbons and 1 or 2 double bonds, or
(ii) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
attached, R 5 and R 6 form a 3 — to 7-membered heterocyclic ring containing
25 one or two heteroatoms selected from O and N;
R 8 is hydrogen or straight or branched chain alkyl of 1 to 6 carbons
atoms.
210. The method of claim 163 in which the compounds of formula
(I) are of the formula:
WO 97/09973 PCT/US96/14727
-244-
wherein:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from a 6— to 10-
membered aryl ring system and a 5— to 1 0-membered heteroaryl ring
5 system containing 1 to 3 oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur atoms, wherein the
aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are optionally substituted with up to
three aryl group substituents;
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 12 carbon atoms
or alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbon atoms;
10 R 7 is — R 1A OR 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, or alkanoyl
containing 2 to 5 carbon atoms, and R 14 is lower alkylene or lower
alkenylene;
R 19 is hydrogen or lower alkyl; and
R 20 is hydrogen, halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl.
15
21 1 . The method of claim 163 in which the compounds of formula
(I) are of the formula:
wherein:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-245-
and
R 19 is lower alkyl; the configuration of the double bond is trans ;
is a tertiary amine selected from azabicycloalkyl containing from 6
5 to 9 carbon atoms with at least 5 atoms in each ring.
212. The method of claim 163 in which the compounds of formula
(I) are of the formula:
<CH 2 ) n
VIII
10 wherein:
15
20
R 19 is lower alkyl; n is an integer from 1 to 3, and
—
is a tertiary amine selected from azabicycloalkyl containing from 6
to 9 carbon atoms with at least 5 atoms in each ring.
213. The method of claim 163 in which the compounds of formula
(I) have formula (IX):
R"
\ /
"(CH.)-N
OR
IX
25
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-246-
wherein: R 19 is lower aikyl; R 18 is hydrogen or lower alkanoyl containing 2
to 7 carbon atoms and is attached at the 5 or 6 position in either the
endo or exo configuration.
214. The method of claim 163 in which the compounds of formula
5 (I) are of the formula:
wherein:
Ar 1 Ar 2 , and Ar 3 are each independently selected from a 6 to 10-
10 membered aryl ring system optionally substituted with up to three
substituents selected from halo, halo lower alkyl and lower alkyl;
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 6 carbons or
alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbons;
R 4 is a 6 to 10-membered aryl ring system or a 5 to 10-membered
15 heteroaryl ring system containing 1 to 3 oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur atoms,
wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are optionally substituted
with one or more substituents selected from halo, halo lower alkyl and
lower alkyl; and
R 7 is selected from:
20 — CH 2 NR ,5 R 16 in which R 15 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or lower
alkanoyl and R 16 is hydrogen or lower alkyl; or
— C(0)OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 7 carbons,
alkenyl of 3 to 7 carbon atoms, aryl or heteroaryl, or an alkali metal or
alkaline earth metal salt; and
25 — R 14 OR 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 4 carbons
or alkanoyl of 2 to 5 carbon atoms, and R 14 is alkylene of 1 to 4 carbons.
215. The method of claim 214, wherein Ar 1 Ar 2 , and Ar 3 are each
independently phenyl, which is optionally substituted with one or two
substituents selected from halo, halo lower alkyl and lower alkyl and R 4 is
X
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-247-
phenyl, which is optionally substituted with one or two substituents
selected from halo, halo lower alkyl and lower alkyl, or pyridyl.
216. The method of claim 163 in which the compounds of formula
(I) are of the formula:
5
wherein:
Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each independently selected from a 6— to 10-
10 membered ring system, which is optionally substituted with up to three
substituents selected from halo, lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl;
R 2 is straight or branched alkylene of 1 to 6 carbon atoms or
alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbons;
R 4 is a 6 to 10-membered aryl ring system or a 5 to 10-membered
15 heteroaryl ring system, optionally substituted with up to three
substituents selected from halo, lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl;
R 15 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 12 carbons or alkanoyl of 2 to 12
carbons; and
Y is alkylene of 1 to 3 carbons.
20 217. The method of claim 216, wherein:
Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each independently selected from phenyl,
which is optionally substituted with one or two substituents selected from
halo, lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl; and
R 4 is phenyl, which is optionally substituted with one or two
25 substituents selected from halo, lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl.
218. The method of claim 163 in which the compounds of formula
(I) are amidinoureas or 2 — [(aminophenyl and amidophenyl)-
amino] — 1 — azacycloalkanes of the formula:
30
XII
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-248-
R3 R 2
5
xn(a) xn(b) xn(c)
wherein:
(i) when W is Xll(a) or Xll(c), then R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 , which are
10 the same or different, are each independently selected from: hydrogen,
halo, lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl, nitro, lower alkoxy, hydroxy, aryl lower
alkoxy, acyloxy, cyano, halo lower alkoxy or lower alkyl sulfonyl; R is
hydrogen or lower alkyl; R' and R" are hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl or
arylalkyl; R' and R" together form a 5 to 7 membered ring which includes
15 0 to 2 heteroatoms selected from N, O or S; R n is hydrogen or lower alkyl,
provided that at least one of R, R' and R" is other than hydrogen; and
(ii) when W is Xll(b), n is 1 to 3;
R 2 , R 3 and R 6 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl of 1
to 6 carbon atoms, or halogen; with the proviso that R 2 and R 6 are not
20 hydrogen at the same time; and one of R 4 and R 5 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1
to 6 carbon atoms, or halogen and the other is of the formula — NR 8 R 7 in
which R 8 and R 7 , which are the same or different, are selected from
among hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, alkoxycarbonyl of 2 to 7
carbon atoms, aryloxycarbonyl of 6 to 12 carbon atoms, alkylcarbonyl of
25 2 to 7 carbon atoms, arylcarbonyl of 6 to 12 carbon atoms,
hydroxyalkoxycarbonyl of 3 to 7 carbon atoms, or haloalkylcarbonyl of 2
to 7 carbon atoms, or R 8 and R 7 are taken together to form — (CH 2 ) p — ,
where p is 4 or 5, or — (CH 2 ) m CO — , and m is 3 or 4.
219. The method of claim 169 which comprises administering
30 topically the composition to a surface of the mammal, wherein the
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-249-
surface is selected from the group consisting of skin and mucosal
surfaces.
220. The method of claim 219, wherein the surface comprises a
skin surface.
5 221. The method of claim 219, wherein the surface comprises a
mucosal surface.
222. The method of claim 221, wherein the mucosal surface is
selected from the group consisting of the eyes, mouth, larynx,
esophagus, bronchial, nasal passages, vagina and rectum/anus.
10 223. The method of claim 222, wherein the mucosal surface
comprises an eye.
224. The method of claim 222. wherein the mucosal surface
comprises the mouth.
225. The method of claim 224, wherein the mouth surface is
15 selected from the group consisting of the lips, tongue, gums, cheeks,
sublingual and roof of the mouth.
226. The method of claim 222, wherein the mucosal surface
comprises the larynx.
227. The method of claim 222, wherein the mucosal surface
20 comprises the esophagus.
228. The method of claim 222, wherein the mucosal surface
comprises the bronchial passages.
229. The method of claim 222, wherein the mucosal surface
comprises the nasal passages.
25 230. The method of claim 222, wherein the mucosal surface
comprises the vagina.
231. The method of claim 222, wherein the mucosal surface
comprises the rectum/anus.
232. The method of claim 219 which comprises preventing or
30 treating a hyperalgesic condition associated with burns, abrasions,
WO 97/09973
PCT7US96/14727
-250-
bruises, contusions, frostbite, rashes, acne, insect bites/stings, skin
ulcers, mucositis, inflammation, gingivitis, bronchitis, laryngitis, sore
throat, shingles, fungal irritation, fever blisters, boils, Plantar's warts or
vaginal lesions.
5 233. The method of claim 232, wherein the hyperalgesic condition
is associated with burns, abrasions, bruises, contusions, frostbite, rashes,
acne, insect bites/stings, skin ulcers, mucositis, gingivitis, bronchitis,
laryngitis, sore throat, shingles, fungal irritation, fever blisters, boils,
Plantar's warts or vaginal lesions.
10 234. The method of claim 232, wherein the hyperalgesic condition
is associated with burns, abrasions, bruises, contusions, frostbite, rashes,
acne, insect bites/stings, skin ulcers, mucositis, inflammation, gingivitis,
shingles, fungal irritation, fever blisters, boils, Plantar's warts or vaginal
lesions.
15 235. The method of claim 232 which comprises preventing or
treating a hyperalgesic condition associated with a burn and the burn is
selected from the group consisting of thermal, radiation, chemical, sun
and wind burns.
236. The method of claim 235, wherein the burn comprises
20 sunburn.
237. The method of claim 232 which comprises preventing or
treating a hyperalgesic condition associated with a rash and the rash is
selected from the group consisting of allergic, heat, contact dermatitis
and diaper rashes.
25 238. The method of claim 237, wherein the contact dermatitis
comprises poison ivy.
239. The method of claim 232 which comprises preventing or
treating a hyperalgesic condition associated with a skin ulcer and the skin
ulcer is selected from the group consisting of diabetic and decubitus
30 ulcers.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-251-
240. The method of claim 232 which comprises preventing or
treating a hyperalgesic condition associated with inflammation and the
inflammation is selected from the group consisting of periodontal
inflammation, orthodontic inflammation, inflammatory conjunctivitis,
5 hemorrhoids and venereal inflammations.
241 . The method of claim 232 which comprises preventing or
treating a hyperalgesic condition associated with an abrasion and the
abrasion comprises a corneal abrasion.
242. The method of claim 232 which comprises preventing or
10 treating a hyperalgesic condition associated with a fungal irritation and
the fungal irritation is selected from the group consisting of athlete's foot
and jock itch.
243. The method of claim 232 which comprises preventing or
treating a hyperalgesic condition associated with a vaginal lesion and the
15 vaginal lesion is associated with mycosis or sexually transmitted diseases.
244. The method of claim 169 which comprises preventing or
treating a hyperalgesic condition associated with post— surgical recovery.
245. The method of claim 244, wherein the surgery is selected
from the group consisting of radial keratectomy, tooth extraction,
20 lumpectomy, episiotomy, laparoscopy and arthroscopy.
246. A kit, comprising: a composition of claim 2 and one or more
a dressing for a wound comprising bandages, bandaids, patches or sterile
gauze.
247. The kit of claim 246, further comprising compositions
25 containing one or more active ingredients selected from antibacterials,
antivirals, antifungals, anti-inflammatories, anti-glaucoma agents,
anesthetics and mixtures thereof.
248. An article of manufacture, comprising packaging material,
one or more of the compounds of claim 1 within the packaging material,
30 wherein the compound is effective for treating peripheral hyperalgesia,
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-252-
and the packaging material includes a label that indicates that the
compound is used for treating hyperalgesic conditions.
249. An article of manufacture, comprising packaging material,
one or more of the compounds of claim 2 within the packaging material,
5 wherein the compound is effective for treating peripheral hyperalgesia,
and the packaging material includes a label that indicates that the
compound is used for treating hyperalgesic conditions.
250. An article of manufacture, comprising packaging material,
one or more of the compounds of claim 9 within the packaging material,
10 wherein the compound is effective for treating peripheral hyperalgesia,
and the packaging material includes a label that indicates that the
compound is used for treating hyperalgesic conditions.
251. An article of manufacture, comprising packaging material,
one or more of the compounds of claim 12 within the packaging material,
15 wherein the compound is effective for treating peripheral hyperalgesia,
and the packaging material includes a label that indicates that the
compound is used for treating hyperalgesic conditions.
252. An article of manufacture, comprising packaging material,
the compound of claim 31 within the packaging material, wherein the
20 compound is effective for treating peripheral hyperalgesia, and the
packaging material includes a label that indicates that the compound is
used for treating hyperalgesic conditions.
253. The composition of claim 1 that is formulated for local
administration.
25 254. The composition of claim 253 which comprises an anti-
diarrheal compound.
255. The composition of claim 3 that is formulated for local
administration.
256. The composition of claim 255, wherein the compound has
30 either:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
10
-253-
(i) a B/A ratio greater than or equal to diphenoxylate and a B value
approximately more than about 2-fold greater than diphenoxylate, or
(ii) has a B/A ratio at least about 2-fold greater than diphenoxylate.
257. The composition of claim 253, wherein the compounds are
either:
(i) selected from the group consisting of 3 — hydroxy — 7 — oxo-
morphinans and 3 — hydroxy — 7 — oxoisomorphinans;
(ii) selected from the group consisting of
Tyr-D-Ala-Gly-Phe-N(Me>Met-NH 2 ; [D-Thr 2 ,A 3 Pro 5 ]-enkephalinamide,
H-Tyr-D-Nva-Phe-Orn-NH 2 , H-Tyr-D-Nle-Phe-Orn-NH 2 ,
H-Tyr-D-Arg-Phe-A 2 bu-NH 2 , H-Tyr-D-Arg-Phe-Lys-NH 2 , and
H — Lys — Tyr— D — Arg — Phe — Lys — NH 2 ; or
(iii) selected from the group consisting of loperamide and analogs
thereof.
15 25s - The composition of claim 10 that is formulated for local
administration.
259. The composition of claim 258, wherein the compound
comprises a quaternary ammonium salt.
260. The composition of claim 258, wherein the aryl or heteroaryl
20 groups in Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 , Ar\ R 4 and Ft 7 are each optionally substituted with
one to three aryl group substituents.
261. The composition of claim 258, wherein the heteroaryl and
heterocycle groups in Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 , Ar 4 , R 4 and R 7 each contain one to
three heteroatoms.
25 262. The composition of claim 258, wherein:
m is 2;
R 2 is alkylene of 1 to 3 carbons or alkenylene of 2 to 3 carbons;
Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each independently phenyl or pyridyl,
optionally substituted with up to three substituents selected from halo,
30 halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl;
R 8 is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
20
-254-
Ar 4 is indolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl, isoquinoiinyl, quinolinyl,
benzimidazolyl, naphthyl, thienyl, furanyl, pyridinyt, thiazolyl or imidazolyl,
each of which is optionally substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or
lower alkyl; R is hydrogen, lower alkyl, halo, halo lower alkyl or OR 9 , and
is at the 3 — position as follows:
R
R7
R 9 is hydrogen, alkyl, arylalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, aminoalkyl,
alkylaminoalkyl or dialkylaminoalkyl, in which the alkyl groups are straight
10 or branched chains of 1 to 6 carbons in the chain;
R 4 is selected from among
(i) phenyl or pyridyl, which are each optionally substituted
with lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl or halo,
(ii) pyrrolidinyl, oxadiazolyl or triazolyl radicals, each of which
15 is optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently selected
from halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl,
(iii) alkyl containing from 1 to 6 carbons, or
(iv)
U — N
\
N
N
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-255-
(a) hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, and aryl, each of
which is unsubstituted or substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or lower
alkyl, or
(b) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
5 attached, form a piperidinyl, morpholinyl or pyrrolidinyl radical that is
optionally substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl; and
R 7 is selected from:
hydrogen;
-OH;
10 -R 14 OR 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen or lower alkyl, and R 14 is
methylene or ethylene;
-CH 2 NR 15 R 16 in which R 15 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or lower
alkanoyl and R 16 is hydrogen or lower alkyl;
— OR 15 ;
-C{0)OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, alkenyl of
3 to 5 carbon atoms, pyridyl, phenyl, tolyi, ethylphenyl, butylphenyl or
halophenyl or a sodium, potassium, calcium or ammonium ion.
263. The composition of claim 258, wherein:
the azabicycloalkyl in M is
15
20
m is 2;
Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each independently phenyl or pyridyl,
optionally substituted with up to three substituents selected from halo,
25 halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl;
R 8 is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
Ar 4 is indolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl, isoquinolinyl, quinolinyl,
benzimidazolyl, naphthyl, thienyl, furanyl, pyridinyl, thiazolyl or imidazolyl.
WO 97/09973
PCTYUS96/14727
-256-
each of which is optionally substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or
lower alkyl;
R 2 is -CH = CH- ( -(CH 2 } 2 - or -CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) -;
R is hydrogen, lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl, halo or OR 9 , and is at
5 the 3 — position as follows:
20
R 9 is selected from alkyl, arylalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, aminoalkyl,
alkylaminoalkyl or dialkylaminoalkyl, in which the alkyl groups are straight
10 or branched chain of 1 to 6 carbons;
R 4 is selected from among:
(i) phenyl or pyridyl which are each optionally substituted
with lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl or halo,
<ii) pyrrolidinyl, oxadiazolyl or triazolyl radicals, each of which
15 is unsubstituted or substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently
selected from halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl,
<iii) lower alkyl of 1 to 6 carbons, or
<iv)
O R 5
H /
u N
O.^
Xl
O
or , . N-
R 5 and R € are independently selected from:
WO 97/09973
PCTYUS96/14727
-257-
(a) hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl or aryl, each of
which is unsubstituted or substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or lower
alkyl, or
(b) together with the nitrogen atom to which each is
5 attached, form a piperidinyl, morpholinyl or pyrrolidinyl radical that is
unsubstituted or substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl; and
R 7 is selected from:
hydrogen;
-OH;
10 — R 14 OR 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen or lower alkyl, and R 14 is
methylene or ethylene;
— CH 2 NR 15 R 16 in which R 15 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or lower
alkanoyl and R 16 is hydrogen or lower alkyl;
— OR 15 ;
15 — C(0)OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, alkenyl of
3 to 5 carbon atoms, pyridyl, phenyl, tolyl, ethylphenyl, butylphenyl or
halophenyl, or a sodium, potassium, calcium or ammonium ion.
264. The composition of claim 258 in which the compounds of
20 formula (I) are of the formula:
R
wherein:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from a 6— to 10-
25 membered aryl ring system and a 5— to 10-membered heteroaryl ring
system, wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are each optionally
substituted with up to three aryl group substituents;
R 3 is Ar 3 ;
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-258-
Ar 3 is a 6— to 10-membered aryl ring system or a 5— to 10-
membered heteroaryl ring system, wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring
systems are each optionally substituted with up to three substituents
selected from halo, lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl;
5 R 2 is straight or branched chain alkyl of 1 to 12 carbons;
R is hydrogen, alkyl or OR 9 ;
R 9 is alkyl, arylalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl or
dialkylaminoalkyl, in which the alkyl groups are straight or branched chain
of 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
10 R 4 is phenyl, pyridyl, cyano or:
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(i) hydrogen, straight or branched chain alkyl of 1 to 3
15 carbons or alkenyl of 2 to 4 carbons and 1 double bond; or
(ii) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
attached, form a heterocycle selected from pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl,
alkylpiperidinyl, morpholinyl, oxadiazolyl and triazolyl radicals, each of
which is optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected
20 from halo, halo lower alkyl and lower alkyl; and
R 7 is — H, —OH, -C(0)OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen or lower
alkyl, — C(0)H or — R 14 OR' 3 in which R 13 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 4
carbons, or alkanoyl of 2 or 3 carbon atoms, and R 14 is methylene or
ethylene.
25 265. The composition of claim 264 in which the compounds of
formula (I) are of the formula (N):
R
wherein:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
15
-259-
R 4 is phenyl, pyridyl, cyano or
FT
/
N ;
\
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
5 (i) hydrogen, lower alkyl, phenyl or lower alkenyl, or
(ii) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
attached form a heterocycle selected from 1 ,3,4— oxadiazolyl,
4— morpholinyl, or dKC, — C 6 alkyl) — morpholinyl;
R 2 is -(CH 2 ) 2 - or -CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) -;
10 R 7 is -OH, — C(0)OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen, methyl or ethyl,
or
-C(0)H; and
R is hydrogen, lower alkyl, — C{0)H, or — C(0)OH and is at the
3 — position as follows:
R
R"
and
R 3 is phenyl or halo — substituted phenyl.
20 266. The composition of claim 265, wherein:
R 7 is -OH, -C(0)OH or -C(0)OCH 2 CH 3 ;
R 3 is phenyl optionally substituted with alkyl, alkoxyalkyl, halo or
trifluoroalkyl;
R is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
25 R 2 is lower alkylene;
R 4 is phenyl, pyridyl or:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-260-
— U' ;
R"
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(i} hydrogen, alkyl, phenyl, phenylalkyl or 2 — propenyl, in
which the alkyl groups are lower alkyl; or
5 (ii) together with the nitrogen to which they are attached
form pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, C,— C 6 alkylpiperidinyl, 4— morpholinyl or
2,6— di(C 1 — C 6 alkyl)morpholinyl; and
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are independently selected from phenyl or pyridyl.
267. The composition of claim 266, wherein:
10 R is hydrogen or methyl;
R 3 is phenyl optionally substituted with alkyl, alkoxyalkyl, halo or
trifluoroalkyl;
R 2 is alkylene containing from 1 to 4 carbons;
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are independently phenyl that is unsubstituted or
15 substituted with lower alkyl, alkoxy lower alkyl, halo or halo lower alkyl;
R 4 is cyano or:
° R s
II '
J N
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(i) hydrogen, lower alkyl, phenyl, phenyl lower alkyl or
20 2 — propenyl; or
(ii) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
attached, form pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, C, — C 6 alkylpiperidinyl,
4 — morpholinyl or 2,6— di(C! — C 6 alkyl) morpholinyl.
268. The composition of claim 267, comprising
25 2,2-diphenyl — 4 — [(4 — carbethoxy — 4 — phenyl)piperidino]butyronitrile that
has the following formula
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-261-
o
or a salt or N — oxide thereof.
269. The composition of claim 267, comprising
1 -(3 — c yano-3,3-diphenylpropyl)-4-phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxyl
acid that has the following formula
o
10 or a salt or N— oxide thereof.
270. The composition of claim 265, wherein:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl,
R is hydrogen or methyl,
R 2 is -(CH 2 } 2 - or -CH 2 CH(CH 3 )-,
15 R5 and R6 are independently methyl or ethyl or, together with the
nitrogen to which they are attached, form pyrrolidinyl or piperidinyl;
R 3 is unsubstituted phenyl, 4 — chlorophenyl, 4 — bromophenyl,
4— fluorophenyl, 3,4-di-halophenyl or 3— trifluoromethylphenyl; and
R 7 is -OH.
20 271. A composition of claim 258, wherein the compounds of
formula (I) are of the formula (III):
25
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-262-
R
R 4 ^-k OH
Ar-
Ar' N ■ Ar"
wherein:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently a 6— to 10-membered aryl ring
system or a 5— to 10-membered heteroaryl ring system, wherein the aryl
10 and heteroaryl ring systems are optionally substituted with up to three
substituents selected from halo, alkyl and haloalkyl;
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 1 2 carbon atoms,
or straight, branched chain alkenylene of 2 to 12 carbon atoms containing
one double bond, or branched chain alkynylene of 2 to 12 carbon atoms
15 containing one triple bond;
R is hydrogen, alkyl, halo lower alkyl or halo;
R 4 is:
R s
/
N
R*
20 R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(i) hydrogen, straight or branched chain alkyl or straight or
branched chain alkenylene, or
(ii) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
attached, they form a 3— to 10-membered heterocyclic ring containing
25 one or two heteroatoms; and
Ar 3 is a 6— to 10-membered aryl ring system or a 5— to 10-
membered heteroaryl ring system containing one or more heteroatoms,
wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are optionally substituted
with one or more aryl group substituents.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-263-
272. The composition of claim 271, wherein:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from phenyl that is
optionally substituted with up to three substituents selected from halo,
halo alkyl or alkyl in which the alkyl groups are straight or branched
5 chains of 1 to 6 carbons;
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 3 carbons or
alkenylene of 2 to 3 carbons containing one double bond;
R is hydrogen, lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl or halo, and is in the
3 — position;
10 R 4 is:
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(i) hydrogen, alkyl or alkenyl, in which the carbon chains are
15 straight or branched chain of 1 to 6 carbons, or
(ii) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
attached, they form pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, alkylpiperidinyl, morpholinyl,
or di(C, — C 6 alkyl) — morpholinyl; and
Ar 3 is a 6— to 10-membered aryl ring system that is unsubstituted
20 or substituted with up to three substituents selected from halo, halo lower
alkyl and lower alkyl.
273. The composition of claim 258 in which the compounds of
formula (I) are of the formula:
R5
25 wherein:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-264-
Ar 3 is phenyl that is optionally substituted with halo; and
R 2 is alkylene containing 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
274. The composition of claim 270, wherein the compound is
selected from compounds in which:
5 (i) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R is hydrogen, R 2 is — (CH 2 > 2 — , R 5 and
R 6 , together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form
pyrrolidine, and R 3 is 4— chlorophenyl or 3,4— dichlorophenyl:
(ii) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R is hydrogen, R 2 is — (CH 2 ) 2 — , R 5 and
R 6 , together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form
10 piperidinyl, and R 3 is phenyl;
(iii) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R 2 is — (CH 2 ) 2 — , R is hydrogen, R 5 and
R 6 are methyl and R 3 is 4— bromophenyl;
(iv) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R 2 is — (CH 2 ) 2 — , R is hydrogen, R 5 is
methyl, R s is ethyl and R 3 is 4— chlorophenyl;
15 (v) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R 2 is — CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) — , R is hydrogen, R 5
and R 6 are methyl and R 3 is 4 — fluorophenyl; and
(vt) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R 2 is — (CH 2 ) 2 — , R is 4— methyl, R 5 and
R 6 are methyl and R 3 is 3 — trifluoromethylphenyl or phenyl.
275. The composition of claim 258, comprising a compound se-
20 lected from 1 —[4— (4 — hydroxy — 4— phenyl— 1 — piperidino) — 2,2 — dip-
henylbutyryl]piperidine; 4 — {4— 14— hydroxy — 4— (3 — trifluoromethyl-
phenyl}— 1 — piperidino] — 2,2— diphenylbutyryl}morpholine;
1 —{4— [4 — hydroxy — 4— {3— trifluoromethylphenyl) — 1 —piperi-
dino] —2,2— diphenylbutyljpiperidine; 4— (p — chlorophenyl) — 4 — hy-
25 droxy — N — N — ,y— trimethyl — a, a— diphenyl— 1 — piperidine— 1 — butyr-
amide; 4— (p — chlorophenyl)— 4— hydroxy — N — N — dimethyl — a, a— di-
phenyl— 1 —piperidine— 1 — butyramide (loperamide); 4— (3,4— dichloro-
phenyl)— N,N— diethyl— 4— hydroxy— a, a— diphenyl — 1 —piperi-
dine— 1 —butyramide; 4 — (3,4 — dichlorophenyl) — 4 — hydroxy — N,N— di-
30 methyl — a, a — diphenyl — 1 —piperidine— 1 —butyramide;
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-265-
4— (4— chloro — 3— trifluoromethylphenyl) — 4— hydroxy — N,N — dimethyl —
a, a— diphenyl — 1 — piperidine— 1 — butyramide; 4— (p — fluoro-
phenyl) — 4— hydroxy — N — N,y— trimethyl — a, a— diphenyl— 1 —piperi-
dine— 1 —butyramide; 4— [p— bromophenyl)— 4— hydroxy — N — N — di-
5 methyl — cr.a-diphenyl — 1 —piperidine— 1 —butyramide; 1 — {4— [4 — (3,4-
dichlorophenyl) — 4— hydroxypiperidino] — 2,2— diphenylbutyryl}pyrrolidine
or 4— (p— chlorophenyl) — N — ethyl — 4— hydroxy — N — methyl — a,a-6\-
phenyl— 1 —piperidine— 1 —butyramide.
276. The composition of claim 265, comprising
10 4— (p — chlorophenyl) — 4— hydroxy — N — N— dimethyl — a, a— di-
phenyl— 1 — piperidinebutyramide that has the formula:
a
or a salt or N — oxide thereof.
15 277. The composition of claim 276, comprising a salt of
4 — (p — chlorophenyl) — 4-hydroxy — Nl — N — dimethyl — a, a — diphenyl — 1 -
piperidinebutyramide.
278. The composition of claim 277, wherein the salt is the
hydrochloride salt.
20 279. The composition of claim 277, wherein the salt comprises a
quaternary ammonium salt.
280. The composition of claim 276, comprising
4 — {p — chlorophenyl) — 4— hydroxy — N — N — dimethyl — a, a— diphenyl— 1 —
piperidinebutyramide, N — oxide that has the formula:
25
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-266
10
\\
CH,
/ "
N
CH
-CH 2 -CH 2 - N
OH
15
281. The composition of claim 258 in which the compounds of
formula (I) are of the formula:
OR 9
R'
Ar-
R — N
Ar'
O
II
N — C — Ar 4
I
R a
wherein:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from a 6— to 10-
membered aryl ring system and a 5— to 10-membered heteroaryl ring
20 system containing one or more heteroatoms, wherein the aryl and
heteroaryl ring systems are each optionally substituted with up to three
aryl group substituents;
Ar* is thienyi, furanyl, pyridinyl, thiazolyl or imidazolyl, each of
which is optionally substituted with halo, or Ar 4 is a radical of the
25 formula:
R 10 , R 11 and R 12 are each independently selected from hydrogen,
30 alkyl, alkyloxy, halide, hydroxy, cyano, nitro, amino, alkylamino,
di(alkyl)amino, aminocarbonyl, arylcarbonylamino, alkylcarbonylamino,
alkylcarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, aminosulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
10
-267-
alkylthio, mercapto, C 3 _ 6 alkenyloxy, C 3 _ 6 alkynyloxy, arylalkyloxy, aryloxy
or aikyl, in which each group is unsubstituted or substituted with up to 4
halo atoms, and the alkyl groups are straight or branched chains of 1 to 6
carbon atoms;
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
R 9 is alkyl, arylalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl or
dialkylaminoalkyl in which the alkyl groups are straight or branched chains
of 1 to 6 carbon atoms in the chain:
R 4 is:
R*
35 i r>6
R and R 6 are independently selected from:
(i) from hydrogen, aryl containing 6 to 10 members in the
ring, straight or branched chain alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or straight
or branched chain alkenyl of 2 to 6 carbons and 1 or 2 double bonds, or
15 <») together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
attached, R 5 and R 6 form a 3 — to 7-membered heterocyclic ring containing
one or two heteroatoms selected from O and N;
R 8 is hydrogen or straight or branched chain alkyl of 1 to 6 carbons
atoms.
20 282. The composition of claim 281, wherein: Ar 4 is phenyl; R 10 is
aryl, lower alkyloxy, C 3 _ 6 alkenyloxy, C 3 _ 6 alkynyloxy, or alkyl
substituted with 1 to 4 halo atoms, and R 11 and R 12 are each indepen-
dently selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, halo, hydroxy,
cyano, nitro, amino, mono and di(alkyl)amino, aminocarbonyl, aryl-
25 carbonylamino, alkylcarbonylamino, alkylcarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy,
aminosulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl, alkyl thio or mercapto in which
each group is unsubstituted or substituted with up to 4 halo atoms, and
the alkyl groups are straight or branched chains that contain 1 to 4
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-268-
carbons; and R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from hydrogen,
C^alkyl, phenyl, phenylmethyl or 2 — propenyl.
283. The composition of claim 284, wherein:
the substituents in the 3— and 4— positions on the piperidine ring
5 have the trans configuration;
R'° is trifluoromethyl substituted on the meta positions, and R 11 and
R 12 are each independently selected from hydrogen, methyl, methoxy,
halo, hydroxy, nitro, amino trifluoromethyl, phenylmethyoxy, phenyloxy,
and propenyloxy.
10 284. The composition of claim 281, comprising
trans — 3 — hydroxy — N.N.y— trimethyl — a. a— diphenyl— 4— f[3 — (trifluorom
ethyl)— benzoyljamino] — 1 — piperidinebutanamide.
285. The composition of claim 258 in which the compounds of
formula (I) are of the formula:
15
wherein:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from a 6— to 10-
membered aryl ring system and a 5— to 10-membered heteroaryl ring
20 system containing 1 to 3 oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur atoms, wherein the
aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are optionally substituted with up to
three aryl group substituents;
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 1 2 carbon atoms
or alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbon atoms;
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-269-
R 7 is — R 14 0R 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, or alkanoyl
containing 2 to 5 carbon atoms, and R 14 is lower alkylene or lower
alkenylene;
R 19 is hydrogen or lower alkyl; and
5 R 20 is hydrogen, halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl.
286. The composition of claim 285, wherein one of Ar 1 and Ar 2 is
phenyl and the other of Ar 1 and Ar 2 is phenyl optionally substituted with
alkyl or halo, or pyridyl.
287. The composition of claim 285, wherein: R 13 is hydrogen or
10 lower alkyl or alkanoyl having 2 to 5 carbon atoms; R 14 is methyl or
ethylene; R 19 is hydrogen or methyl; R 20 is hydrogen, halo or methyl, R 2 is
— (CH 2 ) 2 — ; and Ar 1 is phenyl.
288. The composition of claim 287, comprising 5 — [1 ,1 — di-
phenyl-3-(4-phenyl — 4 — methanolpiperidino)propyl]-2-methyl-
15 1 ,3,4— oxadiazole.
289. The composition of claim 258 in which the compounds of
formula (I) are of the formula:
R 1
VII
H
/
\ '
20 wherein:
R 19 is lower alkyl; the configuration of the double bond is trans :
and
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-270-
is a tertiary amine selected from azabicycloalkyl containing from 6 to 9
carbon atoms with at least 5 atoms in each ring.
290. The composition of claim 289, wherein:
each ring in the azabicycloalkyl is selected from pyrrolidine
5 piperidino and hexamethyleneimino.
291. The composition of claim 289, wherein the azabicycloalkyl is
selected from 7 — azabicyclo[2.2.1]hept— 7 — yl, 2 — azabicyclo-
[2.2.2]oct — 2 — yl, 2 — azabicyclo[3.2.1]oct — 2— yl, 3 — azabicy-
clo[3.2.1 ]oct — 3 — yl, 6 — azabicyclo[3.2.1]oct— 6— yl, 3 — azabicy-
10 clo[3.2.2]non — 3 — yl, 8 — azabicyclo[4.3.0]non — 8 — yl, 2 — azabicy-
clo[3.2.2]non — 2 — yl, 2 — azabicyclo[3.3. 1 ]non — 2— yl, 3 — azabicy-
clo[3.3.1]non — 3 — yl, 2 — azabicyclo[4.3.0]non — 3 — yl, 7 — azabicy-
clo[4.3.0]non — 7 — yl, 8 — azabicyclo[4.3. 1 ]dec — 8— yl, 2 — azabicy-
clo[4.4.0] — dec — 2 — yl, and 7 — azabicyclo[4.2.2]dec — 7 — yl, and:
292. The composition of claim 289, comprising 5 — [1,1 -di-
phenvl — 4 — (2 — azabicvclo[2.2.21oct-2-vl)but-2- trans -en-
I — yl] — 2 — methyl— 1 ,3,4— oxadiazole.
293. The composition of claim 258 in which the compounds of
20 formula (I) are of the formula:
15
VIII
R
19
wherein:
R 19 is lower alkyl; n is an integer from 1 to 3, and
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-271-
— NCZ>
is a tertiary amine selected from azabicycloalkyl containing from 6
5
to 9 carbon atoms with at least 5 atoms in each ring.
294. The composition of claim 293, wherein:
n is 2 or 3; R 19 is ethyl or methyl; and
each ring in the azabicycloalkyl is selected from pyrrolidine
piperidino and hexamethyleneimino.
295. The composition of claim 294, wherein the azabicycloalkyl is
selected from 7 — azabicyclo[2.2. 1 ]hept — 7— yl, 2 — azabicy-
10 clo[2.2.2]oct-2-yl, 2-azabicyclo[3.2. 1 ]oct-2-yl, 3-azabicy-
clo[3.2.1]oct— 3— yl, 6— azabicyclo[3.2. 1 ]oct— 6— yl, 3 — azabicy-
clo[3.2.2]non — 3— yl, 8 — azabicyclo[4.3.0] — non — 8— yl, 2 — azabicy-
clo[3.2.2]non — 2— yl, 2 — azabicyclo[3.3. 1 ]non-2 — yl, 3 — azabicy-
clo[3.3.1]non — 3— yl, 2 — azabicyclo[4.3.0]non — 3 — yl, 7— azabicy-
15 clo[4.3.0]non — 7 — yl, 8 — azabicyclo[4.3. 1 ]dec — 8 — yl, 2 — azabicy-
clo[4.4.0]-dec-2-yl, 7-azabicyclo[4.2.2]dec-7-yl, or
296. The composition of claim 258, comprising
2 — {5 — [2 — (2 — azabicyclo[2.2.2]oct-2-yl)ethylj-10,1 1 -dihydro-5H-di-
20 benzo[a,d]cyclohepten-5-yl}-5-methyl — 1 ,3,4— oxadiazole or
2-{12-[2-{2-azabicyclo[2.2.2]oct-2-yl)ethyl}-5,6,7,l2-tetrahydro-
dibenzo[a,d]cycloocten— 12 — yl} — 5 — methyl — 1,3,4 — oxadiazole.
297. The composition of claim 258 in which the compounds of
formula (I) have formula (IX):
WO 97/09973
PCT7US96/14727
-272-
wherein: R' 9 is lower alkyl; R 18 is hydrogen or lower alkanoyl containing 2
to 7 carbon atoms and is attached at the 5 or 6 position in either the
endo or exo configuration.
5 298. The composition of claim 297, wherein: R 19 is alkyl
containing 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and R 18 is hydrogen or lower alkanoyl
containing 2 or 3 carbon atoms.
299. The composition of claim 297, comprising one or more
compounds selected from among: 5 — [1 , 1 — diphenyl-3-(exo-5-hydroxy-2-
10 azabicyclo[2,2.2]oct — 2— yl) — propyl] — 2— methyl — 1 ,3,4— oxadiazole;
5 — [ 1 , 1 — diphenyl — 3 — (exo — 5 — acetoxy — 2 — azabicyclo[2.2.2]oct-2-yl)-
propyl]-2 — methyl— 1 ,3,4— oxadiazole; 5 — [1,1 —diphenyl — 3-(endo-5-
acetoxy-2-azabicyclo[2.2.2]oct— 2 — yl)-propyl] — 2 — methyl — 1 ,3,4— oxa-
diazole; 5 — [1,1 —diphenyl — 3 — (endo — 5 — hydroxy — 2 — azabicyclo-
15 [2.2.2]oct-2-yl)-propyl] — 2 — methyl— 1,3,4— oxadiazole; 5 — [1,1 —di-
phenyl— 3— (endo— 6— acetoxy— 2— azabicyclo— [2.2. 2]oct— 2— yl)-pro-
pyl]-2-methyl— 1 ,3,4— oxadiazole; 5 — [1 , 1 — diphenyl-3-(endo-6-hydroxy-
azabicyclo[2.2.2]oct-2 — yl) — propyl]-2-methyl — 1 ,3,4— oxadiazole; 5-[1 ,1-
diphenyl — 3 — (exo-6-acetoxy-2-azabicyclo[2.2.2]oct-2-yl)-propyl]-2-
20 methyl — 1 ,3,4— oxadiazole; and 5 — [1 ,1 — diphenyl-3-(exo-6-hydroxy-2-
azabicyclo[2.2.2]oct-2-yl) — propyl] — 2— methyl — 1 ,3,4 — oxadiazole.
WO 97/09973
PCT7US96/14727
-273-
300. The composition of claim 258 in which the compounds of
formula (I) are of the formula:
5 wherein:
Ar 1 Ar 2 , and Ar 3 are each independently selected from a 6 to 10-
membered aryl ring system optionally substituted with up to three
substituents selected from halo, halo lower alkyl and lower alkyl;
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 6 carbons or
10 alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbons;
R 4 is a 6 to 10-membered aryl ring system or a 5 to 10-membered
heteroaryl ring system containing 1 to 3 oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur atoms,
wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are optionally substituted
with one or more substituents selected from halo, halo lower alkyl and
15 lower alkyl; and
R 7 is selected from:
— CH 2 NR 15 R 16 in which R' 5 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or lower
alkanoyl and R 16 is hydrogen or lower alkyl; or
— C(0)OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 7 carbons,
20 alkenyl of 3 to 7 carbon atoms, aryl or heteroaryl, or an alkali metal or
alkaline earth metal salt; and
— R 14 0R 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 4 carbons
or alkanoyl of 2 to 5 carbon atoms, and R 14 is alkylene of 1 to 4 carbons.
301. The composition of claim 300, wherein Ar 1 Ar 2 , and Ar 3 are
25 each independently phenyl that is optionally substituted with one or two
substituents selected from halo, halo lower alkyl and lower alkyl and R 4 is
phenyl that is optionally substituted with one or two substituents selected
from halo, halo lower alkyl and lower alkyl, or pyridyl.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-274-
302. The composition of claim 300, wherein R 7 is — CH 2 NR 15 R 16 in
which R 15 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or lower alkanoyl and R 16 is hydrogen
or lower alkyl.
303. The composition of claim 302, wherein: Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are
5 each phenyl, R 2 is — (CH 2 ) 2 - or -CH 2 CH(CH 3 )-; and R 4 is phenyl or
pyridyl.
304. The composition of claim 302, comprising
4 — aminomethyl — 4— phenyl — 1 — (3,3,3— triphenylpropyDpiperidine or
N — {[4— phenyl— 1 — (3,3,3 — triphenylpropyl)piperidine-4-yl)methyl)-
10 acetamide}.
305. The composition of claim 300, wherein R 7 is — C(0)OR 17 in
which R 17 is hydrogen, alkyl containing from 1 to 7 carbons, alkenyl
having 3 to 7 carbon atoms, aryl or heteroaryl, or is an alkali metal or
alkaline earth metal salt.
15 306. The composition of claim 305, wherein:
Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each independently selected from phenyl that
is optionally substituted with one or two substituents selected from halo,
lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl;
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkylene containing from 1 to 6
20 carbons or alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbons;
R 4 is phenyl or pyridyl, each of which is optionally substituted with
up to three substituents selected from halo, halo lower alky or lower alkyl.
307. The composition of claim 306, wherein:
R 2 is a straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 3 carbons or
25 alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbons; and
R 17 is pyridyl, phenyl, tolyl, ethylphenyl, butylphenyl, halophenyl or
alkenyl.
308. The composition of claim 306, comprising 1 —(3,3,3 — tri-
phenylpropyl)-4-phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxylic acid hydrochloride; ethyl 1-
30 (3,3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxylate; potassium 1-
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-275-
(3 f 3,3-triphenylpropyl)-4-phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxylate; sodium 1 -(3,3,3-
triphenylpropyl)-4-phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxylate; 1 -[3,3-diphenyl-3-(2-
pyridyl)propyl]-4-phenyl-4-piperidine carboxylic acid hydrochloride; sodium
1-[3,3— diphenyl-3-(2-pyridyl)propyl]-4— phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxylate;
5 ethyl 1 — [3,3-diphenyl — 3 — (2-pyridyl)propyl] — 4— phenyl— 4— piperi-
dinecarboxylate; or potassium 1 — [3,3 — diphenyl-3-(2-pyridyl)-
propyl] — 4— phenyl— 4— piperidinecarboxylate.
309. The composition of claim 300, wherein R 7 is — R 14 OR 13 in
which R 13 is hydrogen, straight or branched chain alkyl of 1 to 8 carbons,
10 or alkanoyl of 2 to 5 carbons, and R 14 is alkylene of 1 to 4 carbons or
alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbons.
310. The composition of claim 309, wherein:
Ar\ Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each independently selected from among
phenyl that is optionally substituted with one or two substituents selected
15 from halo, lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbons or halo lower alkyl of 1 to 4
carbons;
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or
alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbon atoms; and
R 4 is phenyl or pyridyl, each of which is optionally substituted with
20 up to three substituents selected from halo, halo lower alky! of 1 to 4
carbons or lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbons.
31 1 . The composition of claim 309, wherein:
R 2 is -(CH 2 ) 2 - or -CH 2 CH(CH 3 )-;
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl;
25 R 14 is -CH 2 - or -(CH 2 ) 2 -;
R 13 is alkyl containing 1 to 7 carbon atoms; and
R 4 is phenyl or 2 — , 3— or 4 — pyridyl.
312. The composition of claim 309, comprising a compound
selected from 1 —(3,3,3— triphenylpropyl)— 4— phenyl— 4— piperi-
30 dinemethanol; 1 — [3,3 — diphenyl — 3 — (2 — pyridyl)-
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-276-
propyl]— 4— phenyl— 4— piperidinemethanol; 1 — (3,3,3 — triphenyl-
propyl)— 4— phenyl— 4— acetoxymethyl — piperidine; 1 — (3,3,3— triphenyl-
propyl)— 4— phenyl— 4— methoxymethyl— piperidine; 1 — (3,3,3— triphenyl-
propyl)— 4— (4— chlorophenyl) —4— piperidinemethanol;
5 1 —[3— p — chlorophenyl — 3,3— diphenylpropyl]— 4— (phenyl) — 4— piperi-
dinemethanol; 1 — [3 — (p — tolyl) — 3,3 — diphenylpropyl] — 4— (phenyl)-4-
piperidinemethanol; 1 —[3 — (p — bromophenyl) — 3,3— diphenyl-
propyl)— 4— (phenyl)— 4— piperidinemethanol; 1 — [3,3-diphenyl-3-<4-
pyridyDpropyll— 4— phenyl — 4— piperidinemethanol; 1 — [3,3 — diphenyl-3-
10 (3 — pyridyDpropyl]— 4 — phenyl— 4— piperidinemethanol; 1 — (3,3,3— tri-
phenylpropyl)— 4— phenyl— 4— hexoxymethyl— piperidine; 1 — (3,3,3-tri-
phenylpropyl)— 4— (p— tolyl)— 4— piperidinemethanol; 1 — (3,3,3 — tri-
phenylpropyl)— 4— (/?— trifiuoromethyl) — 4— piperidinemethanol;
1 —(3,3,3— triphenylbutyl)— 4— (phenyl)— 4— piperidinemethanol;
15 1 —(3,3,3— triphenylpropyl) — 4— (phenyl) — 4— piperidinemethanol;
1 — (3,3,3— triphenylpropyl) — 4— phenyl — 4 — methoxyethylpiperidine;
1 —[3,3 — diphenyl — 3— (2 — pyridyl)propyl] —4 — phenyl — 4 — methoxyethyl-
piperidine; 1 —(3,3,3 — triphenylpropyl) — 4— phenyl— 4— piperidine-
methanol; 1 — [3,3 — diphenyl — 3 — (2 — pyridyDpropyl]— 4 — phenyl — 4-
20 piperidinemethanol; 1 —{3,3,3— triphenylpropyl)— 4— phenyl— 4— acetoxy-
methylpiperidine; 1 —(3,3,3— triphenylpropyl) — 4 — phenyl— 4— methoxy-
methylpiperidine; or 1 —(3,3,3— triphenylpropyl)-4-(chlorophenyl)-4piperi-
dinemethanol.
313. The composition of claim 258 in which the compounds of
25 formula (I) are of the formula:
R * / v or"
XI
Y —
Ar
wherein:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-277-
Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each independently selected from a 6— to 10-
membered ring system that is optionally substituted with up to three
substituents selected from halo, lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl;
R 2 is straight or branched alkylene of 1 to 6 carbon atoms or
5 alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbons;
R 4 is a 6 to 10-membered aryl ring system or a 5 to 10-membered
heteroaryl ring system, optionally substituted with up to three
substituents selected from halo, lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl;
R 15 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 12 carbons or alkanoyl of 2 to 12
10 carbons; and
Y is alkylene of 1 to 3 carbons.
314. The composition of claim 313 wherein:
Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each independently selected from phenyl that
is optionally substituted with one or two substituents selected from halo,
15 lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl; and
R 4 is phenyl that is optionally substituted with one or two
substituents selected from halo, lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl.
315. The composition of claim 313, wherein:
R 2 is -(CH 2 ) 2 - or -CH 2 CH(CH 3 )-;
20 R 15 is alkyl or alkanoyl in which the carbon chains contain 1 to 8
carbons; and
Y is -CH 2 -.
316. The composition of claim 313, comprising a compound
selected from 1 — (3,3,3— triphenylpropyl)4— hydroxy — 4— benzylpiperi-
25 dine; 1 — [3,3,3— triphenylpropyl)— 4— hydroxy — 4— benzylpiperidine;
1 —(3,3,3 — triphenylpropyl) — 4 — hydroxy— 4— p — chlorobenzylpiperidine;
1 —(3,3,3 — triphenylpropyl) — 4 — hydroxy— 4— p — methylbenzylpiperidine;
or 1 — [3,3,3-(2 — pyridyDpropyl]— 4— benzyl — 4— hydroxypiperidine.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
10
-278-
317. The composition of claim 258 in which the compounds of
formula (I) are amidinoureas or 2 — [(aminophenyl and amidophenyl)-
amino]— 1 — azacycloalkanes of the formula:
R3 r2
XII
R 4 (( )) W ,
where W is
o NR r h nr o R -
II II / I II II /
■N — C — N — C — N JsL .N^ N — C — N — C — N
• or ii
\
R R"
(CH 2 )n
xn(a) xno>) xn(c)
wherein:
(i) when W is Xll(a) or Xll(c), then R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 , which are
15 the same or different, are each independently selected from: hydrogen,
halo, lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl, nitro, lower alkoxy, hydroxy, aryl lower
alkoxy, acyloxy, cyano, halo lower alkoxy or lower alkyl sulfonyl; R is
hydrogen or lower alkyl; R' and R" are hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl or
arylalkyl; R' and R" together form a 5 to 7 membered ring which includes
20 0 to 2 heteroatoms selected from N, O or S; R n is hydrogen or lower alkyl,
provided that at least one of R, R' and R" is other than hydrogen; and
(ii) when W is Xll(b), n is 1 to 3;
R 2 , R 3 and R 6 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl of 1
to 6 carbon atoms, or halogen; with the proviso that R 2 and R 6 are not
25 hydrogen at the same time; and one of R 4 and R 5 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1
to 6 carbon atoms, or halogen and the other is of the formula — NR 8 R 7 in
which R 8 and R 7 , which are the same or different, are selected from
among hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, alkoxycarbonyl of 2 to 7
carbon atoms, aryloxycarbonyl of 6 to 12 carbon atoms, alkylcarbonyl of
30 2 to 7 carbon atoms, arylcarbonyl of 6 to 12 carbon atoms,
hydroxyalkoxycarbonyl of 3 to 7 carbon atoms, or haloalkylcarbonyl of 2
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-279-
to 7 carbon atoms, or R 8 and R 7 are taken together to form — (CH 2 ) p — ,
where p is 4 or 5, or — (CH 2 ) m C0 — , and m is 3 or 4.
318. The composition of claim 317, wherein:
when W is Xll(a), R 2 is hydrogen or lower alkyl; R 3 and R 5 are
5 hydrogen, hydroxy or lower alkoxy; R 4 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, hydroxy,
lower alkoxy or halo; R 6 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, nitro, alkoxy or halo; R
and R n are hydrogen or lower alkyl; and R' and R" are hydrogen or alkyl;
provided that R, R' and R" are not all hydrogen at the same time.
319. The composition of claim 317, wherein:
10 when W is Xll(a), then R 2 is hydrogen, methyl or ethyl; R 3 is
hydrogen, hydroxy or methoxy; R 4 is hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, hydroxy,
methoxy, chloro or bromo; R 5 is hydrogen, hydroxy or methoxy; R 6 is
hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, nitro, methoxy, ethoxy, chloro, bromo or fluoro;
R and R n are hydrogen, methyl or ethyl; and R' and R" are hydrogen,
15 methyl, ethyl, propyl, i — propyl, butyl, i — butyl, sec — butyl, t — butyl,
pentyl, hexyl or heptyl; provided that R, R' and R" are not all hydrogen at
the same time.
320. The composition of claim 317, comprising a compound
selected from m— chlorophenylamidinourea; p — chlorophenylamidinourea;
20 3,4— dichlorophenylamidinourea; m— bromophenylamidinourea;
p — bromophenylamidinourea; 3,4— dibromo — phenylamidinourea;
3 — chloro — 4— bromophenylamidinourea; 3 — bromo — 4 — chlorophenyl-
amidinourea; 3 — chloro — 4— fluoro phenylamidinourea;
3 — bromo — 4— fluorophenylamidinourea; 3— fluoro— 4— chlorophenylamid-
25 inourea; 2,6 — dimethylphenylamidinourea; 2,6— diethylphenylamidinourea;
2 — methyl — 6— ethylphenylamidinourea; 2 — methyl — 6 — methoxyphenyl-
amidinourea; 2 — methyl — 6— ethoxyphenylamidinourea; 2 — ethyl-6-
methoxyphenylamidinourea; 2— ethyl — 6— ethoxyphenylamidinourea;
3,4— dimethoxyphenylamidinourea; 3,4— dihydroxyphenylamidinourea;
30 3,4,5 — trimethoxyphenylamidinourea; 3,4,5 — trihydroxyphenylamidino-
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-280-
urea; 2— [(2 — methyl — 3 — aminophenyDamino] — 1 — pyrroline, dihydro-
chloride; 2 — [(2 — methyl — 3 — acetamidophenyl) amino]— 1 —pyrroline,
hydrochloride; or 2 — [(2 — methyl — 3 — (ethoxycarbonylamino)-
phenyDamino] — 1 —pyrroline, hydrochloride.
5 321 . The composition of claim 258 in which the compounds of
formula (I) are 2— substituted — 1 — azabicyclo[2. 2.2. Joctanes of the
formula:
XIII
Ar 2
wherein:
15 R 2 is lower alkylene or lower alkenylene;
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from a 6— to 10-
membered aryl ring system or a 5— to 10-membered heteroaryl ring
system, wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are optionally
substituted with one or more aryl group substituents; and
20 R 4 is alkyl of 1 to 8 carbons, alkenyl of 3 to 6 carbon atoms,
cycloalkyl of 3 to 6 carbons, cycloalkyl alkyl in which the cycloalkyl
contains 3 to 6 carbons and the alkyl contains 1 to 3 carbons, or
cycloalkenyl of 4 to 7 carbons.
322. The composition of claim 321 , wherein:
25 Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from phenyl that is
substituted or substituted with up to three substituents selected from
halo, halo alkyl of 1 to 4 carbons or alkyl of 1 to 4 carbons;
R 2 is alkylene of 1 to 3 carbon atoms; and
R 4 is alkyl of 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
30 323. The composition of claim 321, comprising 2 — (2,2— di-
phenylpentyl) — 1 — azabicylo[2.2.2]octane, 2 — (2,2— diphenylhexyl)-1-aza-
bicylo[2.2.2]octane, 2 — (2,2— diphenylpropyl) — 1 — azabicylo-
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-281-
[2.2.2]octane, 2-(2,2 — diphenyloctyl) — 1 — azabicylo[2.2.2]octane and
2 — (2,2 — diphenylheptyl) — 1 — azabicylo[2.2.2]octane.
324. The composition of claim 253 that is formulated for local
application to the eye.
5 325. The composition of claim 253 that is formulated as an
aqueous suspension containing greater than about 1 % by weight of the
compound.
326 The composition of claim 253 that is formulated as an
emulsion.
10 327 . A combination, comprising a composition of claim 253 and a
patch, sterile bandage, a bioadhesive or sterile gauze.
328. The composition of claim 253 in combination with one or
more additional ingredients selected from antibacterials, antivirals,
antifungals, anti-infiammatories, anti-glaucoma agents, anesthetics and
15 mixtures thereof.
329. The composition of claim 328 in combination with an
antiviral agent.
330. The composition of claim 329, wherein the antiviral agent is
selected from the group consisting of purines and pyrimidinones,
20 Acetylleucine Monoethanolamine, Acridinamine, Alkylisooxazoles,
Amantadine, Amidinomycin, Cuminaldehyde Thiosemicarbzone, Foscarnet
Sodium, Kethoxal, Lysozyme, Methisazone, Moroxydine, Podophyllotoxin,
Ribavirin, Rimantadine, Stallimycin, Statolon, Thymosins, Tromantadine
and Xenazoic Acid.
25 331. The composition of claim 328 in combination with an
antifungal agent or antibacterial agent.
332. The composition of claim 331, wherein the agent is an
antibacterial selected from the group consisting of Aminoglycosides,
Amphenicols, Ansamycins, ^-Lactams, Carbapenems, Cephalosporins,
30 Cephamycins, Monobactams, Oxacephems, Penicillins, Lincosamides,
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-282-
Macrolides, Amphomycin, Bacitracin, Capreomycin, Colistin, Enduracidin,
Enviomycin, Fusafungine, Gramicidin(s), Mikamycin, Polymyxin,
Polymyxin, /ff-Methanesulfonic Acid, Pristinamycin, Ristocetin,
Teicoplanin, Thiostrepton, Tuberactinomycin, Tyrocidine, Tyrothricin,
5 Vancomycin, Viomycin(s), Virginiamycin Zinc Bacitracin, Tetracyclines,
Cycloserine, Mupirocin, Tuberin, 2,4-Diaminopyrimidines, Nitrofurans,
Quinolones, Sulfonamides, Sulfones, Clofoctol, Hexedine, Magainins,
Methenamine, Methenamine Anhydromethylene-citrate, Methenamine
Hippurate, Methenamine Mandelate, Methenamine Subsalicylate,
10 Nitroxoline, Squalamine, and Xibornol.
333. The composition of claim 331 , wherein the agent an
antifungal selected from the group consisting of Polyenes, Allylamines,
Imidazoles, Triazoles, Acrisorcin, Amorolfine, Biphenamine,
Bromosalicylchloranilide, Buclosamide, Chlophenesin, Ciclopirox,
15 Cloxyquin, Coparaffinate, Diamthazole, Dihydrochloride, Exalamide,
Flucytosine, Halethazole, Hexetidine, Loflucarban, Nifuratel, Potassium
Iodide, Propionates, Propionic Acid, Pyrithione, Salicylanilide, Sulbentine,
Tenonitrozole, Tolciclate, Tolindate, Tolnaftate, Tricetin, Ujothion, and
Undecylenic Acid.
20 334. The composition of claim 328 in combination with an
antiinflammatory agent.
335. The composition of claim 334, wherein the agent is selected
from the group consisting of Corticosteriods, Aminoarylcarboxylic Acid
Derivatives, Arylacetic Acid Derivatives, Arylbutyric Acid Derivatives,
25 Arylcarboxylic Acids, Arylpropionic Acid Derivatives, Pyrazoles,
Pyrazolones, Salicylic Acid and derivatives thereof, Thiazinecarboxamides,
e-Acetamidocaproic Acid, S-Adenosylmethionine, 3— Amino — 4 — hydroxy-
butyric Acid, Amixetrine, Bendazac, Bucolome, Carbazones, Difen-
piramide, Ditazol, Guaiazulene, Heterocylic Aminoalkyl Esters of
30 Mycophenolic Acid and derivatives thereof, Nabumetone, Nimesulide,
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-283-
Orgotein, Oxaceprol, Oxazole derivatives, Paranyline, Pifoxime,
2-substituted-4,6-di— tertiary-butyl-s-hydroxy-1 ,3-pyrimidines,
Proquazone and Tenidap.
336. The composition of claim 328 in combination with an
5 antiseptic.
337. The composition of claim 336, wherein the antiseptic is
selected from the group consisting of Guanidines, Halogens/Halogen
Compounds, Nitrofurans, Phenols, Quinolines, Boric Acid, Chloroazodin,
m-Cresyl Acetate, Cupric Sulfate and Ichthammol.
10 338. The composition of claim 328 in combination with an
antiviral agent.
339. The composition of claim 338, wherein the agent is selected
from the group consisting of Purines/Pyrimidinones, Acetylleucine
Monoethanolamine, Acridinamine, Alkylisooxazoles, Amantadine,
15 Amidinomycin, Cuminaldehyde Thiosemicarbzone, Foscarnet Sodium,
Kethoxal, Lysozyme, Methisazone, Moroxydine, Podophyllotoxin,
Ribavirin, Rimantadine, Stallimycin, Statolon, Thymosins, Tromantadine
and Xenazoic Acid.
340. The composition of claim 147 formulated for local
20 administration and containing greater than about 1% by weight of the
compound.
341 . The composition of claim 265 which contains the compound
in an amount of greater than about 1 to about 10%.
342. The composition of claim 341 which contains the compound
25 in an amount of from about 2 to about 10%.
343. The composition of claim 342 which contains the compound
in an amount of from about 2 to about 8%.
344. The composition of claim 343 which contains the compound
in an amount of about 5%.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-284-
345. The composition of claim 344 wherein the compound is
4— (p — chlorophenyl) — 4— hydroxy— N — N— dimethyl — a, a— diphenyl-1-
piperidinebutyramide hydrochloride.
346. The composition of claim 265, wherein the vehicle is
5 formulated for the prevention or treatment of a hyperalgesic condition
associated with post — surgical recovery.
347. The composition of claim 346, wherein the surgery is
selected from the group consisting of radial keratectomy, tooth
extraction, lumpectomy, episiotomy, laparoscopy and arthroscopy.
10 348. The composition of claim 265, wherein the vehicle is
formulated for administration to a joint area.
349. The composition of claim 265, wherein the vehicle is
formulated for administration to a soft tissue area.
350. The composition of claim 349, wherein the vehicle is
15 formulated for administration to a muscle, tendon, ligament or eye.
351 . The composition of claim 350, wherein the vehicle is
formulated for administration to a muscle, tendon or ligament.
352. The composition of claim 276 in combination with one or
more additional active ingredients selected from antibacterials, antivirals,
20 antifungals, anti-inflammatories, anti-glaucoma agents, anesthetics and
mixtures thereof.
353. The composition of claim 265, wherein the vehicle comprises
from greater than 0 to about 10 wt.% of a monobasic salt of phosphoric
acid and from greater than 0 to about 10 wt.% of a dibasic salt of
25 phosphoric acid.
354. The composition of claim 353, wherein the vehicle further
comprises from greater than 0 to about 5 wt.% propylene glycol.
355. The composition of claim 354, wherein the vehicle comprises
from greater than 0 to about 5 wt.% of the monobasic salt.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-285-
356. The composition of claim 355, wherein the vehicle comprises
from about 0.1 to about 0.5 wt.% of the monobasic salt.
357. The composition of claim 356, wherein the vehicle comprises
about 0.2 wt.% of the monobasic salt.
5 358. The composition of claim 354, wherein the vehicle comprises
from about 0.1 to about 5 wt.% of the dibasic salt.
359. The composition of claim 358, wherein the vehicle comprises
from about 0.5 to about 2 wt.% of the dibasic salt.
360. The composition of claim 359, wherein the vehicle comprises
10 from about 1 to about 2 wt.% of the dibasic salt.
361. The composition of claim 360, wherein the vehicle comprises
about 1.3 wt.% of the dibasic salt.
362. The composition of claim 354, wherein the vehicle further
comprises from greater than 0 to about 10 wt.% of a tribasic salt of
15 phosphoric acid.
363. The composition of claim 362, wherein the vehicle comprises
from greater than 0 to about 5 wt.% of the tribasic salt.
364. The composition of claim 363, wherein the vehicle comprises
from about 0.1 to about 1 wt.% of the tribasic salt.
20 365. The composition of claim 364, wherein the vehicle comprises
about 0.6 wt.% of the tribasic salt.
366. The composition of claim 354, wherein the vehicle comprises
from about 0.1 to less than about 5 wt.% propylene glycol.
367. The composition of claim 366, wherein the vehicle comprises
25 from about 0.5 to about 2 wt.% propylene glycol.
368. The composition of claim 367, wherein the vehicle comprises
about 1 wt.% propylene glycol.
369. The composition of claim 253 which comprises
4 — (/?— chlorophenyl) — 4 — hydroxy — N — N — dimethyl — a,a—d\-
30 phenyl— 1 — piperidinebutyramide hydrochloride.
WO 97/09973
PCTYUS96/14727
-286-
370. The composition of claim 354 which comprises
4— (p — chlorophenyl) — 4— hydroxy — N — N — dimethyl — a, a— di-
phenyl— 1 — piperidinebutyramide hydrochloride.
371 . The composition of claim 353, wherein the vehicle comprises
5 two or more salts of phosphoric acid which are selected from the group
consisting of a monobasic salt of phosphoric acid, a dibasic salt of
phosphoric acid, and a tribasic salt of phosphoric acid.
372. The composition of claim 371, wherein the vehicle comprises
a monobasic salt of phosphoric acid and a dibasic salt of phosphoric acid.
10 373. The composition of claim 265, wherein the vehicle comprises
from greater than 0 to less than about 5 wt.% propylene glycol.
374. The composition of claim 354 which comprises
4 — (p — chlorophenyl) — 4— hydroxy — N — N — dimethyl — a, a— diphenyl-1 -
piperidinebutyramide hydrochloride in a vehicle comprising about 0.2
15 wt.% of a monobasic salt of phosphoric acid, about 1.3 wt.% of a
dibasic salt of phosphoric acid, and about 1 wt.% of propylene glycol.
375. A method of preventing or treating peripheral hyperalgesia,
comprising locally administering to a mammal in need of such prevention
or treatment an effective amount of a composition of claim 253.
20 376. A method of preventing or treating peripheral hyperalgesia,
comprising locally administering to a mammal in need of such prevention
or treatment an effective amount of a composition of claim 254.
377. The method of claim 161, wherein the composition is applied
locally.
25 378. The method of claim 377, wherein the aryl or heteroaryl
groups in Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 , Ar 4 , R 4 and R 7 are each unsubstituted or
substituted with one to three aryl group substituents.
379. The method of claim 377, wherein the heteroaryl and
heterocycle groups in Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 , Ar*, R 4 and R 7 each contain one to
30 three heteroatoms.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-287-
380. The method of claim 377, wherein:
R 2 is alkylene of 1 to 3 carbons or aikenylene of 2 to 3 carbons;
m is 2;
Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each independently phenyl or pyridyl,
5 optionally substituted with up to three substituents selected from halo,
halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl;
R 8 is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms; Ar 4 is indolyl,
benzofuranyl, benzothienyl, isoquinolinyl, quinolinyl, benzimidazolyl,
naphthyl, thienyl, furanyl, pyridinyl, thiazolyl or imidazolyl, each of which
10 is optionally substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl;
R is hydrogen, lower alkyl, halo, halo lower alkyl or OR 9 , and is at
the 3— position as follows:
R
R 9 is hydrogen, alkyl, arylalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, aminoalkyl,
15 alkylaminoalkyl or dialkylaminoalkyl, in which the alkyl groups are straight
or branched chains of 1 to 6 carbons in the chain;
R 4 is selected from among:
(i) phenyl or pyridyl which are each optionally substituted
with lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl or halo,
20 f'i) pyrrolidinyl, oxadiazolyl or triazolyl radicals, each of which
is optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently selected
from halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl,
(iii) alkyl containing from 1 to 6 carbons, or
(iv)
WO 97/09973
PCTVUS96/14727
-288-
10
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(a) hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, and aryl, each of
which are unsubstituted or substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or
lower alkyl, or
15 (b) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
attached, form a piperidinyl, morpholinyl or pyrrolidinyl radical that is
optionally substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl; and
R 7 is selected from:
hydrogen;
20 -OH;
— R 14 OR 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen or lower alkyl, and R 14 is
methylene or ethylene;
— CH 2 NR 15 R 16 in which R 15 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or lower
alkanoyl and R 16 is hydrogen or lower alkyl;
25 —OR 15 ;
— C(0)OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, alkenyl of
3 to 5 carbon atoms, pyridyl, phenyl, tolyl, ethylphenyl, butylphenyl or
halophenyl or a sodium, potassium, calcium or ammonium ion.
381. The method of claim 377, wherein:
30 the azabicycloalkyl in M is
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-289-
m is 2;
Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each independently phenyl or pyridyl,
optionally substituted with up to three substituents selected from halo,
5 halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl;
R 8 is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
Ar 4 is indolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl, isoquinolinyl, quinolinyl,
benzimidazolyl, naphthyl, thienyl, furanyl, pyridinyi, thiazolyl or imidazolyl,
each of which is optionally substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or
10 lower alkyl;
R 2 is -CH = CH-, -(CH 2 } 2 - or -CH 2 CH(CH 3 )-;
R is hydrogen, lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl, halo or OR 9 , and is at
the 3 — position as follows:
15
R 9 is selected from alkyl, arylalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, aminoalkyl,
alkylaminoalkyl or dialkylaminoalkyl, in which the alkyl groups are straight
or branched chain of 1 to 6 carbons;
R 4 is selected from among:
20 (') phenyl, pyridyl, which are each optionally substituted with
lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl or halo, or
(ii) pyrrolidinyl, oxadiazolyl or triazolyl radicals, each of which
is unsubstituted or substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently
selected from halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl,
25 (iii) lower alkyl of 1 to 6 carbons, or
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
R 5 and Ft 6 are independently selected from:
(a) hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl or aryl, each of
which is unsubstituted or substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or lower
5 alkyl, or
(b) together with the nitrogen atom to which each is
attached, form a piperidinyl, morpholinyl or pyrrolidinyl radical that is
unsubstituted or substituted with halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl; and
R 7 is selected from:
10 hydrogen;
-OH;
— R 14 OR 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen or lower alkyl, and R 14 is
methylene or ethylene;
— CH 2 NR 15 R 16 in which R' 5 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or lower
15 alkanoyl and R 16 is hydrogen or lower alkyl;
-OR 15 ;
— C(0)OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, alkenyl of
3 to 5 carbon atoms, pyridyl, phenyl, tolyl, ethylphenyl, butylphenyl or
halophenyl, or a sodium, potassium, calcium or ammonium ion.
20 382. The method of claim 377 in which the compounds of formula
(I) are of the formula:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-291 -
R
wherein:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from a 6— to 10-
membered aryl ring system and a 5— to 10-membered heteroaryl ring
5 system, wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are each optionally
substituted with up to three aryl group substituents;
R 3 is Ar 3 or
O
II
N — C — Ar"
I
R 8 .
Ar 3 is a 6— to 10-membered aryl ring system or a 5— to 10-
10 membered heteroaryl ring system, wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring
systems are each optionally substituted with up to three substituents
selected from halo, lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl;
Ar 4 is thienyl, furanyl, pyridinyl, thiazolyl or imidazolyl, each of
which is optionally substituted with halo, lower alkyl or halo lower alkyl,
15 or Ar 4 is a radical of the formula:
R 10 , R 11 and R 12 are each independently selected from hydrogen,
alkyl, alkyloxy, halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, cyano, nitro, amino, alkylamrno,
20 di(alkyl)amino, aminocarbonyl, arylcarbonylamino, alkylcarbonylamino,
alkylcarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, aminosulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl,
alkylthio, mercapto, C 3 _ s alkenyloxy, C 3 _ 6 alkynyloxy, arylalkyloxy, aryloxy
or alkyl, in which each group is optionally substituted with up to four
substituents selected from halo, halo alkyl and alkyl, and the alkyl groups
25 are straight or branched chains of 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-292-
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkyl of 1 to 1 2 carbons;
R is hydrogen, alkyl or OR 9 ;
R 9 is alkyl, arylalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl or
dialkylaminoalkyl, in which the alkyl groups are straight or branched chain
5 of 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
R 4 is phenyl, pyridyl, cyano or:
\
R 5
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(i) hydrogen, straight or branched chain alkyl of 1 to 3
10 carbons or alkenyl of 2 to 4 carbons and 1 double bond; or
(ii) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
attached, form a heterocycle selected from pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl,
alkylpiperidinyl, morpholinyl, oxadiazolyl and triazolyl radicals, each of
which is optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected
15 from halo, halo lower alkyl, hydroxy and lower alkyl;
R 7 is — H, —OH, — C(0)OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen or
lower alkyl, — C(0)H or — R 14 OR 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 4
carbons, or alkanoyl of 2 or 3 carbon atoms, and R 14 is methylene or
ethylene; and
20 R 8 is hydrogen or straight or branched chain alkyl containing from 1
to 3 carbon atoms.
383. The method of claim 382, wherein the vehicle comprises
from greater than 0 to about 10 wt.% of a monobasic salt of phosphoric
acid and from greater than 0 to about 10 wt.% of a dibasic salt of
25 phosphoric acid.
384. The method of claim 383, wherein the vehicle further
comprises from greater than 0 to about 5 wt.% propylene glycol.
385. A method of claim 384, wherein the vehicle comprises from
greater than 0 to about 5 wt.% of the monobasic salt.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-293-
386. The method of claim 385, wherein the vehicle comprises
from about 0.1 to about 0.5 wt.% of the monobasic salt.
387. The method of claim 386, wherein the vehicle comprises
about 0.2 wt.% of the monobasic salt.
5 388. The method of claim 383, wherein the vehicle comprises
from about 0.1 to about 5 wt.% of the dibasic salt.
389. The method of claim 388, wherein the vehicle comprises
from about 0.5 to about 2 wt.% of the dibasic salt.
390. The method of claim 389, wherein the vehicle comprises
10 from about 1 to about 2 wt.% of the dibasic salt.
391 . The method of claim 390, wherein the vehicle comprises
about 1.3 wt.% of the dibasic salt.
392. The method of claim 383, wherein the vehicle further
comprises from greater than 0 to about 10 wt.% of a tribasic salt of
15 phosphoric acid.
393. The method of claim 392, wherein the vehicle comprises
from greater than 0 to about 5 wt.% of the tribasic salt.
394. The method of claim 393, wherein the vehicle comprises
from about 0.1 to about 1 wt.% of the tribasic salt.
20 395. The method of claim 394, wherein the vehicle comprises
about 0.6 wt.% of the tribasic salt.
396. The method of claim 384, wherein the vehicle comprises
from about 0.1 to less than about 5 wt.% propylene glycol.
397. The method of claim 397, wherein the vehicle comprises
25 from about 0.5 to about 2 wt.% propylene glycol.
398. The method of claim 397, wherein the vehicle comprises
about 1 wt.% propylene glycol.
399. The method of claim 383 which comprises topically
administering to the mammal a composition comprising
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-294-
4— (p— chlorophenyl) — 4— hydroxy — N — N — dimethyl — a, a— di-
phenyl— 1 — piperidinebutyramide or a salt or N — oxide thereof.
400. The method of claim 399, wherein the salt comprises the
hydrochloride salt.
5
401 . The method of claim 399, wherein the salt comprises a
quaternary ammonium salt.
402. The method of Claim 384, wherein the vehicle comprises
two or more salts of phosphoric acid which are selected from the group
consisting of a monobasic salt of phosphoric acid, a dibasic salt of
10 phosphoric acid, and a tribasic salt of phosphoric acid.
403. The method of claim 402, wherein the vehicle comprises a
monobasic salt of phosphoric acid and a dibasic salt of phosphoric acid.
404. The method of claim 384, wherein the vehicle comprises
from greater than 0 to less than about 5 wt.% propylene glycol.
15 405. The method of claim 384 which comprises topically
administering to the mammal a composition comprising 4 — (p — chloro-
phenyl) —4— hydroxy — N — N — dimethyl — a, a—diphenyl-1 -piperidine-
butyramide, or a salt or N — oxide thereof, in a vehicle which comprises
about 0.2 wt.% of a monobasic salt of phosphoric acid, about 1.3 wt.%
20 of a dibasic salt of phosphoric acid, and about 1 wt.% of propylene
glycol.
406. The method of claim 382 in which the compounds of formula
(I) are of the formula:
R
25 wherein:
is phenyl, pyridyl, cyano or
o
N
R 5 and R 6
are independently selected from:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
10
-295-
(i) hydrogen, lower alkyl, phenyl or lower alkenyl, or
(ii) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
attached form a heterocycle selected from 1 ,3,4— oxadiazolyl,
4— morpholinyl, or di(C!— C 6 alkyl) — morpholinyl;
R 2 is -(CH 2 ) 2 - or -CH 2 CH(CH 3 )-;
R 7 is —OH, — C(0)OR 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen, methyl or ethyl,
or -C(0)H;
R is hydrogen, lower alkyl, — C(0)H, or — C(0)OH and is at the
3 — position as follows:
R
and
R 3 is phenyl or halo — substituted phenyl.
407. The method of claim 406, wherein:
R 7 is -OH, -C(0)OH or -C{0)0CH 2 CH 3 ;
15 R 3 is phenyl optionally substituted with alkyl, alkoxyalkyl, halo or
trifluoroalkyl;
R is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
R 2 is lower alkylene;
R 4 is phenyl, pyridyl or:
20
_L *'
y — N
\
R*
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(i) hydrogen, alkyl, phenyl, phenylalkyl or 2 — propenyl, in
which the alkyl groups are lower alkyl; or
(ii) together with the nitrogen to which they are attached
25 form pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, C 6 alkylpiperidinyl, 4— morpholinyl or
2,6— dUC^ — C 6 alkyDmorpholinyl; and
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are independently selected from phenyl or pyridyl.
WO 97/09973
PCT7US96/14727
-296-
408. The method of claim 407, wherein:
R is hydrogen or methyl;
R 3 is phenyl optionally substituted with alkyl, alkoxyalkyl, halo or
trifluoroalkyl;
5 R 2 is alkylene containing from 1 to 4 carbons;
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are independently phenyl that is unsubstituted or
substituted with lower alkyl, alkoxy lower alkyl, halo or halo lower alkyl;
R 4 is cyano or:
o R »
^ — n' .
\
R 5
10 R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(i) hydrogen, lower alkyl, phenyl, phenyl lower alkyl or
2 — propenyl; or
(ii) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
attached, form pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, C, — C 6 alkylpiperidinyl,
15 4 — morpholinyl or 2,6 — ditC, — C 6 alkyl) morpholinyl.
409. The method of claim 408 in which the compound of formula
(I) is 1 -(3-cyano-3,3-diphenylpropyl)-4 — phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxylic acid
ethyl ester and has the following formula:
O — CH-,-CH 3
20 or a salt or N — oxide thereof.
410. The method of claim 408 in which the compound of formula
(I) is 1-{3 — cyano — 3,3 — diphenylpropyl)-4-phenyl — piperidinecarboxylic
acid that has the following formula
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-297-
o
o
H
or a salt or N — oxide thereof.
5
41 1. The method of claim 382, wherein:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl.
R is hydrogen or methyl,
R 2 is -(CH 2 ) 2 - or -CH 2 CH(CH 3 } - ,
R 5 and R 6 are independently methyl or ethyl or, together with the
nitrogen to which they are attached, form pyrrolidinyl or piperidinyl;
R 3 is unsubstituted phenyl, 4— chlorophenyl, 4 — bromophenyl,
4— fluorophenyl, 3,4-di-halophenyl or 3— trifluoromethylphenyl; and
R 7 is -OH.
412. The method of claim 379, wherein the compounds of
formula (I) are of the formula:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently a 6— to 10-membered aryl ring
system or a 5— to 10-membered heteroaryl ring system, wherein the aryl
and heteroaryl ring systems are optionally substituted with up to three
20 substituents selected from halo, alkyl and haloalkyl;
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 1 2 carbon atoms,
or straight or branched chain alkenylene of 2 to 12 carbon atoms
containing one double bond;
15
R
wherein:
R is hydrogen, alkyl, halo lower alkyl or halo;
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-298-
R 4 is:
o R .
-J N /
R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(i) hydrogen, straight or branched chain alkyl or straight or
5 branched chain alkenylene, or
(ii) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
attached, they form a 3— to 10-membered heterocyclic ring containing
one or two heteroatoms; and
Ar 3 is a 6— to 10-membered aryl ring system or a 5— to 10-
10 membered heteroaryl ring system containing one or more heteroatoms,
wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are optionally substituted
with one or more aryl group substituents.
413. The method of claim 412, wherein:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from phenyl that is
15 optionally substituted with up to three substituents selected from halo,
halo alkyl or alkyl in which the alkyl groups are straight or branched
chains of 1 to 6 carbons;
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 3 carbons or
alkenyl of 2 to 3 carbons containing one double bond;
20 R is hydrogen, lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl or halo, and is in the
3 — position;
R 4 is:
o R 5
— L; ;
R"
R 5 and R e are independently selected from:
25 (i) hydrogen, alkyl or alkenyl, in which the carbon chains are
straight or branched chain of 1 to 6 carbons, or
WO 97/09973
PCT/TJS96/14727
-299-
(ii) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
attached, they form pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyi, alkylpiperidinyl, morpholinyl,
ordi(C,— C 6 alkyl) — morpholinyl; and
Ar 3 is a 6— to 10-membered aryl ring system that is unsubstituted
5 or substituted with up to three substituents selected from halo, halo lower
alkyl and lower alkyl.
414. The method of claim 379 in which the compounds of formula
(I) are of the formula:
10 wherein:
Ar 3 is phenyl that is optionally substituted with halo; and
R 2 is alkylene containing 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
415. The method of claim 41 1, wherein the compound is selected
from compounds in which:
15 («) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R is hydrogen, R 2 is — (CH 2 ) 2 -, R 5 and
R 6 , together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form
pyrrolidine, and R 3 is 4 — chlorophenyl or 3,4— dichlorophenyl:
(ii) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R is hydrogen, R 2 is — (CH 2 ) 2 — , R 5 and
R 6 , together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form
20 piperidinyi, and R 3 is phenyl;
(iii) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R 2 is -(CH 2 ) 2 -, R is hydrogen, R 5 and
R 6 are methyl and R 3 is 4 — bromophenyl;
(iv) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R 2 is -(CH 2 ) 2 -, R is hydrogen, R 5 is
methyl, R 6 is ethyl and R 3 is 4— chlorophenyl;
25 (v) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R 2 is -CH 2 CH(CH 3 )-, R is hydrogen, R 5
and R 6 are methyl and R 3 is 4— fluorophenyl; and
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-300-
(vi) Ar 1 and Ar 2 are phenyl, R 2 is — (CH 2 ) 2 — , R is 4 — methyl, R 5 and
R 6 are methyl and R 3 is 3— trifluoromethylphenyl or phenyl.
416. The method of claim 379, comprising a compound selected
froml — [4-(4-hydroxy— 4— phenyl— 1 — piperidino) — 2,2 — diphenylbutyryl]-
5 piperidine; 4— {4— [4 — hydroxy— 4— (3— trifluoromethylphenyl)-1 —piperi-
dino]— 2,2 — diphenylbutyryl}morpholine; 1 — {4— [4— hydroxy-4-(3-
trifluoromethylphenyl) — 1 —piperidino] — 2,2— diphenylbutyl}piperidine;
4— (p — chiorophenyl)— 4 — hydroxy — N — N — ,y— trimethyl — a, a — diphenyl-
1 -piperidine— 1 — butyramide; 4— (p-chlorophenyl)-4-hydroxy-
10 N — N — dimethyl — a,a— diphenyl — 1 —piperidine— 1 —butyramide (loper-
amide); 4 — (3,4 — dichlorophenyl) — N,N — diethyl-4-hydroxy — a .a— di-
phenyl— 1 —piperidine— 1 —butyramide; 4— (3,4 — dichlorophenyl)-4-
hydroxy-N,N— dimethyl — a,a— diphenyl — 1 —piperidine— 1 —butyramide;
4 — (4— chloro — 3 — trifluoromethylphenyl) — 4 — hydroxy — N,N— dimethyl —
15 a, a— diphenyl — 1 —piperidine— 1 —butyramide; 4— (p — fluorophenyl)-4-hy-
droxy — N — N,k— trimethyl — cr,a— diphenyl — 1 — piperidine- 1 -butyramide;
4— {p — bromophenyl)-4-hydroxy — N — N — dimethyl-a, a— diphenyl- 1 — piper-
idine— 1 — butyramide; 1 —{4— [4— (3,4— dichlorophenyl)— 4— hydroxy-
piperidino] — 2,2 — diphenylbutyryl}pyrrolidine; or 4— (p — chlorophenyl)-N-
20 ethyl — 4 — hydroxy — N — methyl — a, a— diphenyl — 1 — piperidine- 1 -
butyramide.
417. The method of claim 382, wherein the composition
comprises 4 — (p — chiorophenyl) — 4— hydroxy — N — N —dimethyl — a, a— di-
phenyl— 1 — piperidinebutyramide that has the formula:
25
ci
or a salt or N — oxide thereof.
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
10
-301-
418. The method of claim 382, wherein the composition
comprises 4— (p — chlorophenyl) — 4— hydroxy — N — N — dimethyl — ct.ct— di-
phenyl— 1 — piperidinebutyramide, N — oxide that has the formula:
CH,
\ //
o /
CH.
-CH 2 -CH 2 — N
/
V
OH
15
419. The method of claim 382, wherein the composition
comprises 4 — (p — chlorophenyl)-4-hydroxy— N— N — dimethyl— a,a— di-
phenyi— 1 —piperidinebutyramide hydrochloride.
420. A method of preventing or treating pain or irritation
20 associated with hyperalgesia, comprising locally applying to a mammal in
need of such prevention or treatment an effective amount of a
4— (p — chlorophenyl)-4-hydroxy-N,N-dimethyl — a,a-diphenyl- 1 -piperidine-
butyramide hydrochloride, wherein the amount is effective to treat or
prevent the hyperalgesia.
421. The method of claim 420, wherein the administration is
effected intra — articularly.
422. The method of claim 379 in which the compounds of formula
(I) are of the formula:
OR 9
25
30
R 4
Ar'
R - N
Ar 2
wherein:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from a 6— to 10-
membered aryl ring system and a 5— to 10-membered heteroaryl ring
system containing one or more heteroatoms, wherein the aryl and
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-302-
heteroaryl ring systems are each optionally substituted with up to three
aryl group substituents;
Ar 4 is thienyl, furanyl, pyridinyl, thiazolyl or imidazolyl, each of
which is optionally substituted with halo, or Ar* is a radical of the
5 formula:
R 10 , R 11 and R 12 are each independently selected from hydrogen,
alkyl, alkyloxy, halide, hydroxy, cyano, nitro, amino, alkylamino,
di(alkyl)amino, aminocarbonyl, arylcarbonylamino, alkylcarbonylamino,
alkylcarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, aminosulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl,
15 alkylthio, mercapto, C 3 _ 6 alkenyloxy, C 3 _ 6 alkynyloxy, arylalkyloxy, aryioxy
or alkyl, in which each group is unsubstituted or substituted with up to 4
halo atoms, and the alkyl groups are straight or branched chains of 1 to 6
carbon atoms;
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
20 R 9 is alkyl, arylalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl or
dialkylaminoalkyl in which the alkyl groups are straight or branched chains
of 1 to 6 carbon atoms in the chain:
R 4 is:
25 R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from:
(i) from hydrogen, aryl containing 6 to 10 members in the
ring, straight or branched chain alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or straight
or branched chain alkenyl of 2 to 6 carbons and 1 or 2 double bonds, or
(ii) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are
30 attached, R 5 and R 6 form a 3— to 7-membered heterocyclic ring containing
one or two heteroatoms selected from 0 and N;
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-303-
R 8 is hydrogen or straight or branched chain alkyl of 1 to 6
carbons.
423. The method of claim 379 in which the compounds of formula
(I) are of the formula:
10
N — N Ar2
Ar1
R2— N
15 wherein:
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently selected from a 6— to 10-
membered aryl ring system and a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl ring
system containing 1 to 3 oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur atoms, wherein the
aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are optionally substituted with up to
20 three aryl group substituents;
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 12 carbon atoms
or alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbon atoms;
R 7 is — R 14 OR 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, or alkanoyl
containing 2 to 5 carbon atoms, and R 14 is lower alkylene or lower
25 alkenylene;
R 19 is hydrogen or lower alkyl; and
R 20 is hydrogen, halo, halo lower alkyl or lower alkyl.
424. The method of claim 379 in which the compounds of formula
(I) are of the formula:
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-304-
VI
CH- NT ■)
wherein:
R 19 is lower alkyl; the configuration of the double bond is trans :
and is a tertiary amine selected from azabicycloalkyl containing
5 from 6 to 9 carbon atoms with at least 5 atoms in each ring.
425. The method of claim 379 in which the compounds of formula
(I) are of the formula:
(CHJ
10 wherein:
R 19 is lower alkyl; n is an integer from 1 to 3, and
is a tertiary amine selected from azabicycloalkyl containing
from 6 to 9 carbon atoms with at least 5 atoms in each ring.
426. The method of claim 378 in which the compounds of formula
15 (I) have formula (IX):
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-305-
R
t 9
N
O
OR
18
IX
wherein: R 19 is lower alkyl; R 18 is hydrogen or lower alkanoyl containing 2
to 7 carbon atoms and is attached at the 5 or 6 position in either the
5 endo or exo configuration.
427. The method of claim 379 in which the compounds of formula
(I) are of the formula:
10 wherein:
Ar 1 Ar 2 , and Ar 3 are each independently selected from a 6 to 10-
membered aryl ring system optionally substituted with up to three
substituents selected from halo, halo lower alkyl and lower alkyl;
R 2 is straight or branched chain alkylene of 1 to 6 carbons or
15 alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbons;
R 4 is a 6 to 10-membered aryl ring system or a 5 to 10-membered
heteroaryl ring system containing 1 to 3 oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur atoms,
wherein the aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are optionally substituted
with one or more substituents selected from halo, halo lower alkyl and
20 lower alkyl; and
R 7 is selected from:
— CH 2 NR ,5 R 16 in which R 15 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or lower
alkanoyl and R 16 is hydrogen or lower alkyl; or
R*
X
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-306-
— C(0)0R 17 in which R 17 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 7 carbons,
alkenyl of 3 to 7 carbon atoms, aryl or heteroaryl, or an alkali metal or
alkaline earth metal salt; and
— R 14 OR 13 in which R 13 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 4 carbons
5 or alkanoyl of 2 to 5 carbon atoms, and R 14 is alkylene of 1 to 4 carbons.
428. The method of claim 427, wherein Ar 1 Ar 2 , and Ar 3 are each
independently phenyl that is optionally substituted with one or two
substituents selected from halo, halo lower alkyl and lower alkyl and R 4 is
phenyl that is optionally substituted with one or two substituents selected
10 from halo, halo lower alkyl and lower alkyl, or pyridyl.
429. The method of claim 379 in which the compounds of formula
(I) are of the formula:
f t— v OR "
Ar' j— R 2 N Y XI
wherein:
15 Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each independently selected from a 6— to 10-
membered ring system that is optionally substituted with up to three
substituents selected from halo, lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl;
R 2 is straight or branched alkylene of 1 to 6 carbon atoms or
alkenylene of 2 to 4 carbons;
20 R 4 is a 6 to 10-membered aryl ring system or a 5 to 10-membered
heteroaryl ring system, optionally substituted with up to three
substituents selected from halo, lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl;
R 15 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 12 carbons or alkanoyl of 2 to 12
carbons; and
25 Y is alkylene of 1 to 3 carbons.
430. The method of claim 429, wherein:
Ar 1 , Ar 2 and Ar 3 are each independently selected from phenyl that
is optionally substituted with one or two substituents selected from halo,
lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl; and
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-307-
R* is phenyl that is optionally substituted with one or two
substituents selected from halo, lower alkyl and halo lower alkyl.
431 . The method of claim 379 in which the compounds of formula
(I) are amidinoureas or 2-[(aminophenyl and amidophenyl)amino]-1-aza-
5 cycioalkanes of the formula:
R3 r2
10
, XII
where W is
o
NR
-N — C — N — C-
I I
XH(a)
■N
H
I
NR O
II II ,
N — C — N — C — N
R'
or
XH(b)
R
XH(c)
wherein:
(i) when W is Xll(a) or Xll(c), then Ft 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 , which are
the same or different, are each independently selected from: hydrogen,
halo, lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl, nitro, lower alkoxy, hydroxy, aryl lower
alkoxy, acyloxy, cyano, halo lower alkoxy or lower alkyl sulfonyl; R is
hydrogen or lower alkyi; R' and R" are hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl or
15 arylalkyl; R' and R" together form a 5 to 7 membered ring which includes
0 to 2 heteroatoms selected from N, O or S; R n is hydrogen or lower alkyl,
provided that at least one of R, R' and R" is other than hydrogen; and
(ii} when W is Xll(b), n is 1 to 3;
R 2 , R 3 and R 6 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl of 1
20 to 6 carbon atoms, or halogen; with the proviso that R 2 and R 6 are not
hydrogen at the same time; and one of R 4 and R 5 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1
to 6 carbon atoms, or halogen and the other is of the formula — NR 8 R 7 in
which R 8 and R 7 , which are the same or different, are selected from
among hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, alkoxycarbonyl of 2 to 7
25 carbon atoms, aryloxycarbonyl of 6 to 12 carbon atoms, alkylcarbonyl of
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-308-
2 to 7 carbon atoms, arylcarbonyl of 6 to 12 carbon atoms,
hydroxyalkoxycarbonyl of 3 to 7 carbon atoms, or haloalkylcarbonyl of 2
to 7 carbon atoms, or R 8 and R 7 are taken together to form — (CH 2 ) p — ,
where p is 4 or 5, or — (CH 2 ) m CO — , and m is 3 or 4.
5 432. The method of claim 382 which comprises preventing or
treating a hyperalgesic condition associated with post-surgical recovery.
433. The method of claim 432, wherein the surgery is selected
from the group consisting of radial keratectomy, tooth extraction,
lumpectomy, episiotomy, laparoscopy and arthroscopy.
10 434. The method of claim 382 which comprises administering the
composition to a joint area.
435. The method of claim 382 which comprises administering the
composition to a soft tissue area.
436. The method of claim 435, wherein the soft tissue area is
15 selected from the group consisting of a muscle, tendon, ligament and eye.
437. The method of claim 435, wherein the soft tissue area is
selected from the group consisting of a muscle, tendon and ligament.
438. A kit, comprising: a composition of any of claims 1-156 or
any of claims 253-374, and a package containing one or more a dressings
20 for a wound comprising bandages, bandaids, patches or sterile gauze.
439. The kit of claim 438, further comprising compositions
containing one or more active ingredients selected from antibacterials,
antivirals, antifungals, antiinflammatories, antiglaucoma agents,
anesthetics and mixtures thereof.
25 440. The composition of claim 1 , wherein the at least one
compound is selected from compounds of formula XIII:
30
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-309-
wherein: X is halo or hydrogen, and R is selected from:
10 NHCH,;
N
C2H5
15
f
N
; or
f
N
20 \
the composition is formulated for single dosage administration for
topical or local administration; and
the amount is effective for treating or preventing hyperalgesia.
25 441. The composition of claim 1, wherein the compound is 1-(3-
cyano-3,3-diphenylpropyl)-4-phenyl-4-piperidinecarboxylic acid.
442. The composition of claim 12, further comprising a
vasoconstrictor.
443. The composition of claim 163, further comprising a
30 vasoconstrictor.
444. The composition of claim 258, further comprising a
vasoconstrictor.
WO 97/09973
PCTVUS96/14727
-310-
445. The composition of claim 377, further comprising a
vasoconstrictor.
446. The composition of any of claims 442 and 443 wherein the
vasoconstrictor is an a-agonists.
epinephrine.
448. The composition of claim 444 or claim 445, wherein the
vasoconstrictor is epinephrine.
449. The composition of claim 445, wherein the vasoconstrictor is
10 epinephrine.
450. The composition of any of claims 442-444, wherein the
vasoconstrictor is selected epinephrine, norepinephrine, pseudoephedrine,
phenylephrine, oxymetazoline, propylhexedrine, naphazoline, tetrahydro-
lozine, xylometazoline, ethylnorepinephrine, methoxamine, phenyl-
15 hexedrine, mephentermine, metaraminol, dopamine, dipivefrin,
norphedrine and ciraxzoline.
451. The composition of claim 12, wherein: R 13 is hydrogen or
lower alkyl or alkanoyl having 2 to 5 carbon atoms; R 14 is methyl or
ethylene; R 19 is hydrogen or methyl; R 20 is hydrogen, halo or methyl, R 2 is
20 — (CH 2 ) 2 — ; and Ar 1 is phenyl.
452. The composition of claim 451 comprising 5-[1 ,1 -diphenyi-3-
(4-phenyl-4-methanolpiperidino)propyl]-2-methyl-1 ,3,4-oxadiazole.
453. The composition of claim 42, wherein the azabicycloalkyl is
selected from 7-azabicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-7-yl, 2-azabicyclo[2.2.2]oct-2-yl, 2-
25 azabicyclo[3.2.1]oct-2-yl, 3-azabicyclo[3.2. 1 ]oct-3-yl, 6-azabicyclo-
[3.2.1 ]oct-6-yl, 3-azabicyclo[3.2.2]non-3-yi, 8-azabicyclo[4.3.0]-non-8-yl,
2-azabicyclo[3.2.2]non-2-yl, 2-azabicyclo[3.3. 1 ]non-2-yl, 3-azabicyclo-
[3.3.1 ]non-3-yl, 2-azabicyclo[4.3.0]non-3-yl, 7-azabicyclo[4.3.0]non-7-yl,
8-azabicyclo[4.3. 1 ]dec-8-yl, 2-azabicyclo[4.4.0]-dec-2-yl, and 7-azabicy-
5
447. The composition of claim 446, wherein the vasoconstrictor is
30
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
-311-
454. The composition of claim 42, comprising 5-[1 , 1 -diphenyl-4-
(2-azabicyclo[2.2.2]oct-2-yl)but-2-t!^ns-en-l-vl]-2-methyl-1,3,4-oxadiazole.
455. The composition of claim 48, wherein: R 19 is alkyl containing
1 to 3 carbon atoms, and R 18 is hydrogen or lower alkanoyl containing 2
5 or 3 carbon atoms.
456. The composition of claim 48, comprising one or more com-
pounds selected from among: 5-[1 , 1 -diphenyl-3-(exo-5-hydroxy-2-azabicy-
clo[2,2.-2]oct-2-yl)-propyl]2-methyl-1 ,3,4-oxadiazole; 5-{1 ,1-diphenyl-3-
(exo-5-acetoxy-2-azabicyclo[2.2.-2]oct-2-yl}-propyl]-2-methyl-1,3,4-oxadi-
10 azole; 5-[1,1-diphenyl-3-(endo-5-acetoxy-2-azabicyclo[2.2.-2]oct-2-yl)-
propyl]-2-methyl-1 ,3,4-oxadiazole; 5-[1 , 1 -diphenyl-3-(endo-5-hydroxy-2-
azabicyclo[2.2.-2]oct-2-yl)-propyl]-2-methyl-1,3,4-oxadiazole; 5-[1,1-di-
phenyl-3-(endo-6-acetoxy-2-azabicyclo[2.2.-2]oct-2-yl)-propyl]-2-methyl-
1 ,3,4-oxadiazole; 5-[1 , 1 -diphenyl-S^endo-e-hydroxy^-azabicyclo^^.^l-
IB oct-2-yl)-propyl]-2-methyl-1,3,4-oxadiazole; 5-(1 , 1 -diphenyl-3-(exo-6-
acetoxy-2-azabicyclo[2.2.-2]oct-2-yl>-propyl]-2-methyl-1,3,4-oxadiazole;
and 5-[1 ,1-diphenyl-3-(exo-6-hydroxy-2-azabicyclo[2.2.-2]oct-2-yl)-
propyl]-2-methyl-l ,3,4-oxadiazole.
457. Use of the composition of any of claims 1-156 or any of
20 claims 253-374, 440-456 for the formulation of a medicament for treating
or preventing hyperalgesia.
458. Use of the composition of any of claims 1-156, 440-442,
446, and 452-456 or the formulation of a medicament for topical
application for treating or preventing hyperalgesia.
25 459. Use of the composition of any of claims 253-374, 440, 441 ,
444, 445, and 448 for the formulation of a medicament for local
application for treating or preventing hyperalgesia.
460. The use of any of claims 458-459, wherein the compound is
4— (p-chlorophenyl)-4-hydroxy-N — N —dimethyl — o,a— diphenyl — 1 — piper-
30 idine— 1 — butyramide (loperamide).
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
1 / 5
5000
« 4000
fe| 3000-j
§ 2000-
kxk)4
o
-K)
o MORPHINE
• LOPERAMIDE
— r -
-9
■fr —
i i 1—
-8-7-6
log[ag<Mist](M)
— i —
-5
FIG. I
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
2/5
[=□ VEHICLE
70i m LOPERAMIDE (100 fl/paw)
FORMALIN
INJECTION
I
-1060 -340 -220 -KK) -70 -40 -10
TREATMENT TIMES (MIN)
FIG. 3
♦K)
TREATMENT
FIG. 4
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
WO 97/09973
PCTAJS96/14727
3/ 5
40n
IPSILATERAL IPSILATERAL CONTRALATERAL CONTRALATERAL
FIG. 5
—i — i — i — i — i — i — i i 1—
2345678 12 24
TIME AFTER COMPOUND ADMINISTRATION, HR
FIG. 6
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
WO 97/09973
4/5
PCT/US96/14727
0.1
L0
10.0
DOSE, W
FIG. 7
100.0
1000.0
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
WO 97/09973
PCT/US96/14727
5/5
O - ! ' ' ■ 1 ■ i ' i ■ i ■ i — - — i ■ t | r-
01234567812 24
TIME AFTER DRUG, HR
FIG. 8
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11